Sociology
for
Caribbean Students
Sociology
for
Caribbean Students
Second Edition
NASSER MUSTAPHA
First edition published 2009
Second edition published 2013 in Jamaica by
Ian Randle Publishers
11 Cunningham Avenue
Box 686
Kingston 6
www.ianrandlepublishers.com
© 2013 Nasser Mustapha
ISBN 978-976-637-627-7
Epub Edition @ August 2013 ISBN: 978-976-637-801-1
Mustapha, Nasser
Sociology for Caribbean Students / Nasser Mustapha. – 2nd ed.
p. : ill. ; cm.
Bibliography : p. – Includes index
ISBN 978-976-637-627-7 (pbk)
1. Sociology – Textbooks 2. Social sciences – Textbooks
I. Title
301
dc 22
A CIP catalogue record for this book is available from the National Library of Jamaica.
Sociology for Caribbean Students. Copyright © 2013 by Nasser Mustapha . All rights
reserved under International and Pan-American Conventions. By payment of the required
fees, you have been granted the nonexclusive, non-transferable right to access and read the
text of this e-book on screen. No part of this text may be reproduced, transmitted, downloaded, decompiled reverse-engineered, or stored in or introduced into any information
storage and retrieval system, in any form or by any means, whether electronic or mechanical,
now known or hereinafter invented, without the express written permission of Ian Randle
Publishers.
Cover and Book Design by Ian Randle Publishers
Printed and Bound in the United States of America
To my wife Nazisha and my children Nasha and Adiy,
for the innumerable sacrifices they have made for me
TABLE OF CONTENTS
List of Figures | ix
List of Tables | x
Acknowledgements | xiii
UNIT 1: THE SOCIOLOGICAL PERSPECTIVE
Module 1: Sociological Concepts, Perspectives and Methods
Chapter 1: Sociology as a Discipline | 5
Chapter 2: Sociological Research | 40
Chapter 3: Culture and Identity | 86
Chapter 4: Culture in the Caribbean | 106
Module 2: Social Institutions: Family, Religion and Education
Chapter 5: The Family | 127
Chapter 6: Religion | 159
Chapter 7: Education | 180
Module 3: Social Stratification and Social Mobility
Chapter 8: Social Stratification: Concepts and Theories | 213
Chapter 9: Stratification in the Caribbean | 237
UNIT 2: DEVELOPMENT AND SOCIAL CHANGE
Module 1: Population and Development
Chapter 10: Introduction to Population Studies | 257
Chapter 11: Population Theories | 283
Chapter 12: Population Growth Rates and Trends | 307
Chapter 13: Population and Development in the Caribbean | 337
Chapter 14: Social Development: Concepts and Theories | 346
Chapter 15: Issues in Caribbean Development | 369
Module 2: Crime and Deviance
Chapter 16: Introduction to Crime and Deviance: Concepts and Theories | 385
Chapter 17: Institutions of Social Control | 416
Chapter 18: Crime and Society | 431
Module 3: Caribbean Social Issues: Poverty, Health
and the Environment
Chapter 19: Poverty | 445
Chapter 20: Caribbean Social Issues: Health and the Environment | 460
Bibliography | 489
Multiple Choice Answers | 503
Index | 509
List of Figures
1.1
The Main Sociological Perspectives | 25
2.1
Role of the Observer | 60
2.2
Portrayal of the Role of Observer to Others | 60
5.1
Households by Type in the US, 1970–2000 | 136
8.1
The Indian Caste System | 224
9.1
Stratification in Plantation Society | 245
9.2
The Stratification System of Trinidad and Tobago in the Period following
Emancipation (post-1845) | 246
9.3
The Social Stratification of Trinidad and Tobago in the Period
Post-Independence 1962 | 247
10.1
Population Pyramid for the Caribbean 1980 | 278
10.2
Population Pyramid for the Caribbean 1995 | 278
10.3
Population Pyramid for the Caribbean 2010 | 279
11.1
The Stages of the Demographic Transition Theory | 295
11.2
The Demographic Transition Model | 297
11.3
The Demographic Transition Model Showing Stage 5 | 297
12.1
Population Pyramids for India, Japan and Kenya, 2000 | 309
12.2
Migration from Jamaica 1970–89 | 331
14.l
Gunder Frank’s Dependency Model | 353
15.1
Estimates of Visitor Expenditure | 375
16.1
Robert K. Merton’s Deviance Typology | 395
List of Tables
5.1
Marital Status of Women 15–49 years in Haiti (1994–95; 2000)
and Jamaica (1993; 1997) | 140
5.2
Marital Status of Women 15–49 years in the Dominican Republic (1991; 1996)
and Mexico (1986) | 141
7.1
GDP Per Capita and Gross Enrolment in Tertiary Education | 202
8.1
The Functionalist and Conflict Views of Social Stratification: A Comparison | 232
10.1
Ten Most Populous Countries in the World | 276
10.2
Total Population for CARICOM States, 1990 and 2000 | 280
11.1
Population Growth, Rates of Growth and Components of Growth 1960–85
in Trinidad and Tobago | 300
11.2
The Trade in Enslaved Africans in the Eighteenth Century | 301
11.3
Comparison Stages of the DTT and Rostow’s Stages of Economic Growth | 304
12.1
Population under Age 15 and Aged 65 and Above at the Year 2000
and the Projected Population to 2015 as Percentage of the Total Population
for Selected Caribbean Countries | 310
12.2
Age and Sex Distribution | 311
12.3
Large Ethnic Groups in the United States, 1990 | 313
12.4
Religious Affiliation in Various Territories | 314
12.5
Patterns of Religious Affiliation in Selected Islands | 315
12.6
Employment by Economic Activity | 322
12.7
Population of the Earth up to 1970 (millions) | 324
12.8
World Population Growth | 325
12.9
Projected Population Growth for Selected Countries between 1995 and 2025 | 326
12.10 Annual Population Growth Rate for Some Caribbean Countries | 328
12.11 Percentage of Caribbean Population for Selected Caribbean Territories | 329
12.12 Migration Trends to the Bahamas from Other Caribbean Territories | 331
12.13 Some Differences between Rural and Urban Centres | 332
13.1
Social and Economic Resources in the Caribbean | 341
13.2
Consumption Patterns for Selected Goods and Services | 342
14.1
Overview of Development Theories | 348
14.2
Comparison of Traditional and Modern Societies (Parson’s Model) | 350
14.3
Amin’s Classification of Economies | 354
14.4
Development Indicators | 358
15.1
Natural Population Increase as a Source of Urban Growth, 1970–75 | 371
15.2
Visitor Expenditure as a Percentage of GDP | 376
15.3
Cruise Passenger Arrivals – 2012 and 2011 | 377
19.1
Challenges facing the Poor in Rural and Urban Regions | 456
20.1
The Incidence of Under-Nourishment and Disease in
Selected Caribbean Countries | 472
20.2
Sources and Effects of Air Pollutants | 479
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Presenting sociology to the introductory student in the Caribbean is the main goal of this text.
Many of the introductory texts in the discipline, though comprehensive in scope, give inadequate
attention to the needs and concerns of the Caribbean specifically and developing societies,
generally. Also, many of the writings on developing societies, including the Caribbean, are not
presented in a comprehensible and student-friendly format.
This text overcomes these challenges by presenting introductory sociology material in a userfriendly format, while addressing Caribbean social reality and critically discussing the main
concerns of Caribbean peoples. Seemingly complex and intricate concepts and theories are clarified
and explained in a manner the beginner in sociology will be able to appreciate.
Compared to the earlier edition, this text has been substantially revised with new data, activities
and exercises. The revisions were done in accordance with the new revised CAPE® syllabus (2014).
I wish to express my sincere gratitude to Dr Randy Seepersad for his assistance in revising the
chapters on crime and Dr Denise Gaspard Richards for reviewing the population chapters.
I am also indebted to Mr Anand Rampersad, Ms Karima Pragg, Ms Fareena Alladin, Ms Leistra
Grant and Dr Bennie Berkeley for for their assistance. I am also grateful to Ms Kareemah AliKhan and Ms Shamina Ali for proofreading the manuscript. Finally, I wish to thank Ms Christine
Randle and the staff at Ian Randle Publishers for their support and understanding.
Nasser Mustapha
March 2013
Unit 1
The Sociological
Perspective
UNIT 1 - MODULE 1
SOCIOLOGICAL CONCEPTS,
PERSPECTIVES AND METHODS
CHAPTER I
SOCIOLOGY AS A DISCIPLINE
OBJECTIVES
On completion of this chapter, students should:
1. understand the development of sociology as a discipline from the classical period to the
contemporary period;
2. understand the fundamental concepts in sociology;
3. evaluate the different theoretical perspectives in sociology; and
4. apply the different sociological perspectives to the Caribbean.
CONTENT
1. Sociology as a Discipline
a.
Development of Sociology as a discipline
b.
The development of Sociology in the Caribbean
2. Fundamental Concepts
Social order (structure, function, power); social change; status and roles; values, norms
and sanctions; social group (primary and secondary, in-group and out-group); socialisation
(types and agents – school, family, peer group, mass media, religion); culture (elements and
characteristics).
3. Theoretical Perspectives in Sociology
a.
Consensus/Functionalist
b.
Conflict/Marxist
c.
Interactionist
d. Feminist
6 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
WHAT IS SOCIOLOGY?
Although sociology is primarily an academic discipline, it deals with issues that are of practical
importance in the real world. It helps us to see everyday life through the eyes of a scientist. Even
though people believe that they are independent and unique, they have much in common
with others. Humans are social beings who are influenced by the groups to which they belong.
Thus, human behaviour, thought and ideas are influenced unconsciously by close and continuous
contact with the social environment.
The subject matter of sociology should not be strange to any of us. Since the discipline
deals with human social life, we are exposed to sociological experiences on a daily basis. For
example, we experience issues of classism and sexism in the family, school and church. In
grocery stores these are quite evident. Classism (differences in social class) may be noticed at
schools in which pupils are allowed to pursue specific subjects because of their high- or low-class
position. Schools that enroll middle-class pupils in mainly academic subjects and workingclass pupils in technical subjects are appropriate examples of classism or class bias. Sociology,
however, provides unique insights into social life that might often be overlooked or taken for
granted by non-sociologists. Giddens’s theory of structuration exemplifies this because he looks
at the interrelationship between structure and agency.
Sociology: Some Definitions
‘Sociology is the study of human behaviour in society.’ This definition though broad in scope
demonstrates that sociology is one of the social sciences (M.L. Anderson and H. Taylor 2004).
‘Sociology is the study of human behaviour as shaped by collective life.’ Collective life refers
to groups or institutionalized practices such as family and school relationships and experiences
(B.B. Hess, E. Markson, W. Stein 1993).
‘Sociology: the study of human social life, groups and societies. It is a dazzling and
compelling enterprise having as its subject matter our own behaviour as social beings….’
Giddens claims that sociology is fascinating and interesting because it helps us to understand
our own behaviour. In a similar vein, Comte suggests that sociology is the queen of the social
sciences (A. Giddens 1986).
‘The scientific study of human society and interactions.’ This definition of sociology
emphasizes the use of systematic procedures in the study of human behaviour. In this way,
sociological knowledge is separated from common-sense knowledge (A. Thio 1994).
Sociology as a Discipline | 7
Based on these definitions, we can conclude that sociology is the scientific study of society. It
therefore uses a systematic approach to studying society, based on solid evidence, rather than
intuition or speculation. As sociologists observe social phenomena and see recurrent patterns of
behaviour, they are able to foresee or predict behaviour based on past evidence. Sociologists also
look at the way a society evolves and changes with time, how it creates and maintains its culture
and how groups and institutions influence human social behaviour. In sum, Sociology can be
defined as the scientific analysis of the origin and development of human societies. It also refers
to the systematic study of the roles of institutions within society, and individual behaviour and
group interaction.
The Sociological Imagination
One of the most important concepts for understanding the nature of sociology is the sociological
imagination. This term was coined in 1959 by the American sociologist C. Wright Mills. The
concept describes a person’s ability to see the impact of historical and social forces on his/her
life, thereby illustrating the relationship between an individual and the wider society. It places
great import on the ability to link past events to contemporary occurrences.
This awareness enables a person to see beyond what is apparent (everyday occurrences), and to
identify the links between one’s immediate circumstances, and the external forces (such as
the state, school or church) that help to shape what takes place in that micro-environment.
In this way, connections between individuals and their social environments can be established,
thereby illustrating that individual experiences are shaped and affected by society’s institutions.
It allows sociologists to see beyond their own personal troubles and to consider wider social issues.
The sociologist will view his/her own society as an objective and dispassionate outsider, free
from biases, prejudices, cultural values and attitudes. In this way, sociological knowledge
will become relevant to the understanding of the society as a whole.
THE DEVELOPMENT OF SOCIOLOGY
Origins of Sociology
Auguste Comte (1798–1857), regarded as the founding father of the discipline, developed the term
‘social physics’. He then coined the term ‘Sociology’ which is said to have its roots in the Greek
words socio meaning ‘society’ and logos meaning ‘knowledge’. According to Giddens (1986),
sociology developed in response to the changes occurring in Europe in the nineteenth century.
8 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
These societies were experiencing drastic changes such as urbanization and democratization as a
result of the French and Industrial Revolutions. Furthermore, around this time, the influence
of the church was declining (secularization) and scholars were turning to science to provide
answers to their concerns. For instance, the Enlightenment period in France – often termed the
Age of Reason – was influenced by the political, social and economic changes brought forward by
the Scientific Revolution, shifting focus upon facts and an understanding of the world through
rationalization and reasoning. Traditional structures, norms, values and institutions were
being broken down and replaced by new ones. Europe was in a state of flux and uncertainty.
It was thus the task of the sociologist to provide plausible explanations for these occurrences.
The change from ‘traditional’ to ‘modern’ became a central theme in the work of many nineteenthcentury thinkers and scholars, due to the social instability and turmoil believed to result
from such change. Early sociologists (Auguste Comte and Herbert Spencer [1820–1903]) were
the pioneers in applying the principles of the natural sciences to the study of society. Spencer
believed that society was an organism, that is, it contained parts (institutions) that performed
specific functions for its well-being. For instance, the family helps to maintain society by
carrying out the roles of primary socialization and the stabilization of adult personalities. The
more substantial contributors, however, were from the three major founding fathers of the
discipline: Emile Durkheim, Karl Marx and Max Weber.
The Three Major Founding Fathers of Sociology
Emile Durkheim (1858–1917)
Emile Durkheim was concerned about the changes that occurred in Europe and the resulting
instability they created. Like other functionalists, he viewed society as a balanced system made
up of interrelated and interdependent parts (organic analogy).
According to Durkheim, social order was created by an underlying set of moral rules, norms,
beliefs and values, which gives members of society the shared feeling of belonging, thereby keeping
society in harmony and equilibrium. This collective conscience (shared norms, values and beliefs)
produces and maintains social solidarity (integration among members of society) in society and
therefore contributes to the survival of the social system. He argued that, social facts, (unwritten
rules created by society) influence people’s thoughts and actions, thereby controlling them.
Durkheim developed and advocated the idea and use of positivism (the use of natural science
methods and procedures in the study of humans) to the study of social facts (norms, values and
structures that are external to the individual). He was the first sociologist to develop, apply and
Sociology as a Discipline | 9
carry out a detailed scientific study on suicide. In The Rules of Sociological Method (1895),
Durkheim outlined the methods that should be used in studying the social sciences and applied
these rules to the study of suicide in his work ‘Le Suicide’ (1897).
In his later work, he was able to suggest reasons for suicide, as well as apply scientific methods
to analyse the individual phenomenon, suicide, and the social phenomenon, the suicide rate.
He also founded the first school of sociology in France in 1887.
Karl Marx (1818–1883)
In many instances, Karl Marx is referred to as a philosopher, political scientist and economist.
Though Marx did not call himself a sociologist, there is much sociology in his writings. Marx
looked at human social life from a completely different perspective than the functionalists. Instead
of viewing society as a harmonious and well-integrated system, he saw it as an arena of struggle,
conflict and competing interests.
According to Marx, capitalism results in differences in wealth and power in society. As such,
some groups become more privileged and powerful than others. These competing interests produce
tension in society between the two classes – the proletariat (workers) and the bourgeoisie
(capitalists). The worker becomes alienated (unhappy) because the bourgeoisie appropriates
the products of his labour. He also suggested that the dominant groups control the resources of
society. In addition, because of their greater power and influence, they are able to maintain the
status quo through the control of institutions, such as the school and the church.
False consciousness (the inability of the proletariat to realize the true nature of their oppression)
will exist for some time, as the status quo remains in existence. However, with the passage
of time, the working class will develop a class-consciousness that will enable it to function as
one unified group. This class-consciousness (the awareness that develops when the proletariat
move from a class in itself to a class for itself ) will lead to the downfall of capitalism through
a violent upheaval. Conflict will lead to tensions and hostility in society over goals and values,
and in consequence will eventually be a change in the social order.
For Marx, societies evolved in a linear trend, since they have progressed from ancient slavery to
feudalism and then to capitalism. Conflict theory indicated that the capitalist society is not the
ideal. With the development of class-consciousness, the status quo will be overthrown, thereby
leading to communism, which would be a classless society. For his scholarly writings, Marx
is often regarded as the founding father of the conflict perspective in sociology.
10 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Max Weber (1864–1920)
Max Weber was a German scholar whose writings were of relevance to economists, sociologists
and historians. Unlike the other two founding fathers who viewed society from a
macro-perspective, Weber introduced a completely different approach to the study of society.
He felt that social behaviour could not be adequately understood by looking at the large
structures studied by the functionalist theorists. He believed that the smaller groups should
be studied in more depth and detail in order to uncover the meanings underlying human
social action. Weber describes a social action as any action that has meaning, takes account of
the presence of others and, as such, is oriented in its course. Among Weber’s major works is
The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism (1904). In this seminal work Weber disputes
Marx’s theory of the revolutionary transformation of society from ancient slavery to capitalism.
Instead he posits that capitalism developed as a result of the spread of ascetic Protestantism in
Europe. For example, Calvinism, which became popular during the sixteenth and seventeenth
centuries, was thought to promote the conditions of frugality and thrift that set the stage
for the onset of capitalism.
Weber’s social action theory provided the foundation for the interactionist perspective later
developed by George Herbert Mead and others such as Erving Goffman, Blumer and Cooley.
The Development of Sociology as a Discipline
Auguste Comte (1798–1857)
Auguste Comte was a French mathematician and philosopher who advocated the application
of positivism to the study of the social sciences. Positivism is a system of philosophy based on
experience and empirical knowledge of natural phenomena. It therefore involves applying the
principles and methods of the natural sciences to the study of society. Comte was of the opinion
that such an approach would produce a ‘positive science of society’. He advocated that since
certain laws governed human behaviour, it could therefore be measured objectively.
Comte was of the opinion that human behaviour is controlled by the social environment in
much the same way that the behaviour of organisms is controlled in the natural environment.
As such, human behaviour can be predicted and measured in much the same way as organisms
behave in the natural world.
Comte’s work, though limited, provided the foundation for the development of sociology as it
is known today. Many of Comte’s doctrines were later adapted and developed by other social
thinkers such as Durkheim.
Sociology as a Discipline | 11
Talcott Parsons (1902–1979)
Talcott Parsons played an important role in elaborating upon Durkheim’s theory. In some ways,
he was also influenced by Max Weber’s social action theory. Weber’s influence on Parsons
is evident when he talks about the role of religion in society. Parsons argues that religion helps
to provide meaning to human life especially in times of disaster such as drought or famine.
It was Weber who first theorized that social action conveys specific meanings that determine
other social actions. He became one of the world’s most influential sociologists.
Like Durkheim, he viewed society as a system made up of interrelated parts. He also noted
that a society has four functional prerequisites (preconditions that must exist to ensure the
survival of society) or needs: adaptation, goal attainment, integration and pattern maintenance
(latency). These prerequisites must be fulfilled for any society to survive. This is facilitated
by the society’s institutions such as economy, government, schools and families respectively.
Parsons also felt that social change is gradual and evolutionary, and may result in the transition
of simple traditional societies into complex modern ones. Societies change in order to adapt to
their changing needs. Parsons uses five pairs of pattern variables to describe the changes in
values as a society is transformed from traditional to modern.
Parsons’ Pattern Variables
Pattern Variables A
Pattern Variables B
• Ascription
• Achievement
• Diffuseness
• Specificity
• Particularism
• Universalism
• Affectivity
• Affective-neutrality
• Collective-orientation
• Self-orientation
Pattern Variables A and B are the main values of traditional (pre-industrial) and modern
societies respectively.
You will explore this topic later in this text.
12 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Robert Merton (1910–2003)
Robert Merton refined Parsons’ work. He questioned the previously held assumption by
functionalists that as long as a phenomenon persists, it must be functional for society. Merton
believed that some institutions can at times be functional, non-functional or dysfunctional.
He further claimed that a function, or dysfunction, may be obvious or intended (manifest) or
hidden and unintended (latent). Latent functions themselves can be negative or positive. Schools
can bring people together (manifest function) but some can develop life-long friendships such
as marriage (latent function).
Another key aspect of Merton’s contribution is his work on Strain theory which emphasizes the
incongruence between what the culture calls for and what the structure allows. Merton posited
that strong societal emphasis on achievement is not equally met by the institutionalized means
of achieving success therefore individuals are strained to achieve and seek alternate channels of
attainment.
Activity 1.1
1.
Fill in the blank spaces with the following statements: collective conscience,
prerequisite, positivism, social facts, function.
a)
Laws, beliefs and practices that constrain human behaviour. __________________
b)
The view that human behaviour can be subjected to the methods and principles of
natural science. _________________
c)
The part an institution plays in the maintenance of society. _________________
d)
A state of common thinking attained by consensus of members of society.
___________________
e)
A need of society for it to remain in existence.
2.
Circle T for True or F for False after each statement.
a)
Manifest functions are those intended outcomes of human conduct.
T/F
Sociology as a Discipline | 13
b)
c)
d)
e)
3.
Latent functions are the unintended outcomes of human conduct.
Dysfunctionality expresses the idea that some aspect or part of a
social system is detrimental to society’s well-being.
T/F
Emile Durkheim identified the functional prerequisites of society.
Institutions are always functional for society.
T/F
T/F
T/F
Use the terms about the functional prerequisites to complete the sentences below:
GOAL ATTAINMENT
LATENCY
INTEGRATION
ADAPTATION
a.
The patterns of behaviour learnt that are not always easily discernible
__________________.
b.
The processes through which man satisfies his basic needs of food, clothing and shelter
_______________________.
c.
A state of equilibrium attained by bringing together people from different families
__________________.
d. The role played by government in ensuring that common desirable social ends are
realized ___________________.
The Conflict Theory
Like functionalism, conflict theory is a structural or macro-sociological perspective. Unlike the
functionalists, conflict theorists depict society as being in a state of conflict between opposing
groups. According to Karl Marx, the founder of this perspective, historically, societies have been
characterized by clashes of competing interests between economic groups/social classes. Such
clashes usually result from injustice, inequality, and the exploitation and subjugation of the
less powerful groups. Conflict theorists believe that conflict is desirable because it could lead to
positive social change such as the introduction of a classless society. In this type of society people
will be happy because they would no longer be exploited and oppressed. Marx posited that at
some point in time, the proletariat will revolt and overthrow the bourgeoisie and a classless or
communist society will result. This will mark the end of oppression and exploitation since the
means of production will now be communally owned.
14 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Marx, like Auguste Comte, was a well-known thinker of his time. However, Marx was not only
an intellectual, he was also a revolutionary with a deep social concern for the poor and oppressed.
This social conscience was reflected in his work. His many writings include The Communist
Manifesto (1848), The German Ideology (published posthumously), and Capital (1867). Marx
analysed the capitalist mode of production and examined production in a society comprising
two classes, which he identified as the proletariat (working class) and the bourgeoisie (capitalists).
Other theorists have continued to be influenced by Marx’s model of society. Neo-Marxists revised
and reformulated several aspects of Marx’s theory of society, thereby extending its relevance to the
social and technological changes taking place. Ralf Dahrendorf is one theorist who, though very
critical of the shortcomings of classical Marxism, adopts a conflict model of society. Dahrendorf
opposed Marx’s view that conflict exists between the bourgeoisie and the proletariat. Instead, he
contends that in the twentieth century there is conflict between the managers and workers as
managers exercise authority over them.
The Interactionist Perspective
This perspective focuses on the individual and interaction processes occurring in small groups.
It was largely inspired by the social action theory of Max Weber.
Weber was critical of Marx’s thinking which was too economically deterministic. This means
that Marx associated all human behaviour with economic factors, (that is, society’s institutions
are controlled by the economic base of society). As such, Weber tried to incorporate social,
political and cultural elements into his theories. For instance, he believed that members of
the upper class could be distinguished by their values, status and prestige. Someone born into
a wealthy family and socialized into the upper-class culture would be easily distinguished from
a newly rich individual whose taste may be perceived as vulgar.
Interpretive Sociology is very wide and can be subdivided into many other perspectives. These
approaches focus on the individual and are classified as micro-sociology.
Interpretive theorists view people as living in a world of meaningful objects. They try to find
the meaning of social action at the individual level, unlike functionalism and Marxism, which
conduct their analyses at the macro level, or at the level of society. The branches of interpretivism
include symbolic interactionism (George Herbert Mead), dramaturgy (Erving Goffman),
ethnomethodology (Harold Garfinkel) and phenomenology (Alfred Schutz).
Symbolic interaction argues that life is made up of symbols that convey specific meanings.
For example, the symbol ‘chair’ means something to sit on. However, meanings can change
according to the context. The chair can be used as a shield (in a fight) or a ladder (to put
up Christmas decorations) in other contexts.
Sociology as a Discipline | 15
Dramaturgy compares ordinary life to the theatre. Goffman describes individuals as actors who
fulfill different roles through the use of Impression Management (controlling behaviour to elicit
favourable responses from others). People carefully manage their behaviour to give others a
particular perception. The waiter at a restaurant is ever smiling and polite with customers
because he wants them to feel comfortable.
Ethnomethodology suggests that people build up a stock of knowledge that they use
to make sense of their everyday experiences. In fact, they give order to events around them.
Sometimes, order is imposed on situations that may have no order to others at all. As such,
Ethnomethodology is the study of the ways in which people make sense of and assign order to
their daily lives.
Phenomenology purports that people make sense of the world by categorizing or classifying
objects, events and other people. A young child for instance will use his experience of animal
sounds to categorize barking animals as dogs.
Functionalism, Marxism and Interpretive Sociology have laid the groundwork for subsequent
theorizing in the discipline of sociology. Today, much of the study of sociology is informed
by these theories, even though the work being produced may be of a more specialized nature.
THE BRANCHES OF SOCIOLOGY
Though sociology began as the study of modern industrial society, today sociologists study
all human societies. In addition, the discipline has become very specialized and sophisticated
in response to the growing complexity of human society, resulting in the development of a
number of sub-disciplines.
These include the following:
1. Gerontology – the study of ageing in society.
2.
Rural Sociology/Urban Sociology – the study of rural and urban social systems.
3. Criminology – the application of sociological theories and concepts to the understanding
of crime and deviance.
4. Demography – the study of populations: theories and population issues.
5. The Sociology of Development – the attempt to explain why some societies are more
advanced than others.
6. The Sociology of Education – studies which include the study of teaching, schools,
equality, achievement, stratification.
16 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
7. Environmental Sociology – focuses on social factors influencing behaviour towards the
environment.
8. Industrial Sociology/ Sociology of Work and Occupations.
9. Sociology of the Family – Studies types of family and relationships within the family.
10. Sociology of the Media – focuses on issues such as media ownership and influences on
audience.
11. Mathematical Sociology.
12. Medical Sociology.
13. Military Sociology.
14. Sociology of Race Relations – is concerned with racial and ethnic inequalities, and ways
of reducing them.
15. Sociology of Inequality/Stratification and Mobility – studies different forms of social
inequality.
16. Political Sociology – studies a wide range of topics such as voting behaviour and
characteristics of leaders.
17. Sociology of Religion – focuses on issues like secularization and syncretism.
18. Gender Studies – examines themes such as patriarchy and women’s equality.
19. Social Psychology.
20. Sociology of Language – tries to understand differences in language between people
based on social factors such as ethnicity and class.
21. Sociology of Sport.
Sociology as a Discipline | 17
Activity 1.2
1. List chronologically the more prominent sociologists in each of the three main theoretical
perspectives (functionalist, conflict and interactionist). For each sociologist, state his/her
main contribution in no more than two sentences.
2. Identify the differences between Durkheim and Marx in relation to the following:
a.
the structure of society;
b.
the maintenance of social order; and
c.
the nature of social change.
3. Briefly explain the following terms: Verstehen, class consciousness, micro-sociology,
dramaturgy, and latent function.
THE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN SOCIOLOGY AND THE
OTHER SOCIAL SCIENCES
Though sociology is an independent discipline, there is much overlap with other social sciences
such as anthropology, history, psychology, political science, and economics.
A brief description of these other disciplines is provided:
Cultural anthropology – the study of human cultures, their origin and transformation over
time. Usually, qualitative or descriptive methods of analysis are used. Some sociologists are
interested in the study of culture and culture change. Many also use qualitative methods of
research. There is considerable overlap between the concerns of sociology and cultural
anthropology.
History – a record and analysis of the personalities and events of the past in a society. This
obviously has an overlap with sociology and anthropology. A good example of this is the study
of changes brought about by industrialization such as the decline or expansion of the family.
Psychology – the study of the human mind, personality and individual behaviour. There are
certain things important and common to both sociologists and psychologists. One similarity
is the concern about the impact of parenting on academic performance.
Political Science – concerned with the administration of society, the distribution of power,
international relations, and the control of power and authority in society. These issues overlap
18 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
with the concerns of sociologists. Marx’s work on class inequality is common to political scientists
and sociologists.
Economics – concerned with the production and distribution of goods and services, demand
and supply, pricing, money and trade. Issues such as poverty, work and industry, development
and population studies are of interest to both disciplines. Both are concerned with the impact
of unemployment on the poor, for instance.
THE DEVELOPMENT OF SOCIOLOGY IN THE CARIBBEAN
The recorded history of the region extends only from the period of 1492 to the present. Very
little is known about the period prior to the arrival of the Spaniards in 1492. The Caribbean
is made up of several, fairly small and very heterogeneous nations. These are either island or
mainland territories.
The indigenous populations, which consisted of Amerindian tribes, were decimated through
European conquest and colonization. Subsequently, African slaves and East Indian indentured
workers were brought in large numbers to work on the plantations. Attempts were also made to
introduce other groups, such as the Chinese, to provide labour on the plantations. Over time,
several other groups came to the Caribbean, in most cases in search of better opportunities than
those existing in their respective countries. A major part of the population, therefore, consists
of people who were brought from their respective ancestral homelands and remained in the
region to live side by side with others, often total strangers. Subsequently, these diverse groups
interacted and negotiated their respective cultural traits leading to the emergence of a new and
unique Caribbean culture as we know it.
Early sociological thought in the Caribbean came mainly in the form of literary, political, and
economic writings with historical underpinnings. The literature focused on the period from
slavery to independence in the 1960s. The issues discussed ranged from the legacy of slavery
and colonialism to development issues (which characterized the 1960s) as well as migration,
and the ‘brain drain’ (which plagued many of the islands). There is a wealth of literature in
these areas, which emanated from historians, economists, social workers, demographers and
geographers, but there was a dearth of contributions from full-fledged sociologists. Among the
pioneers in Caribbean sociology were Lloyd Braithwaite and M.G. Smith.
Today, in the Caribbean, these writings largely forms the basis for sociological theorizing. The
work of renowned sociologists such as Auguste Comte, Karl Marx, Talcott Parsons and
Emile Durkheim served to inform early Caribbean sociological theorizing. Hence, Caribbean
sociology, like sociology in other parts of the world, was influenced by mainstream theories
such as functionalism and conflict theory.
Sociology as a Discipline | 19
More specific work, which could be applied distinctively to the Caribbean region, was usually
informed by work done in other parts of the world. For example, M.G. Smith (1965) described
the Caribbean as having a plural society. Smith was initially inspired by J.S. Furnivall’s work
on plural societies of the Dutch East Indies and applied the concept to the Caribbean. R.T.
Smith (1956), in writing on the family, used, as the basic starting point for his analysis,
the traditional family form in European societies (the nuclear family). For many mainstream
sociologists, these traditional family forms are viewed as the norm, and any other family
structures are seen as adaptations or deviations from the norm.
The early works sought to explain the trends, as well as the reasons, underlying the cohesiveness
in Caribbean societies. Some of these works also sought to categorize Caribbean societies or
identify characteristics by which Caribbean societies can be differentiated.
Among other issues that have engaged the attention of sociologists in the Caribbean, is the
manner in which the migrant populations sought to find solutions to the living conditions that
faced them. Other works covered areas such as migration and the ‘brain drain’ that many
Caribbean sociologists view as a response to unemployment and harsh living conditions. In My
Mother Who Fathered Me, Edith Clarke (1957) looks at migration from a rural Caribbean
community. Clarke examines the implications of migration on the community, and the impact
on the livelihood of family members left behind.
Family Land, by Hymie Rubenstein (1987), is an example of what many writers see as a response
to living conditions. Many sociologists claim that Family Land was the ex-slaves’ answer to the
scarcity of land. Through this system, a person provided for those who came after, by
allowing his/her land to belong to none in particular, but allowing all, even future generations,
the use of the land. Rubenstein sought to explain the existence of several families occupying
the same plot of land. This was a practice that was not observed in European and Western
societies. Other areas, which have been covered by Caribbean sociologists, include the topic of
race, ethnicity and culture. Sociologists and others have been debating whether there has been
retention of the culture of the major races, or whether there has been any acculturation (forced
acceptance) and diffusion (spread).
Some sociologists have also addressed women’s issues. Patricia Mohammed has done extensive
work on women of East Indian descent in the Caribbean, whilst Rhoda Reddock has looked at
Caribbean women and their role in history. Reddock documented important facts about the life
and times of Elma Francois. Such information would have been otherwise lost to society with
the death of the informants concerned. Through this method of research, Reddock was able to
document the part played by women in the events that led up to the Butler Riots in Trinidad
in the 1930s. Reddock described the part played by Elma Francois, a migrant to Trinidad.
Through her work she showed that Caribbean women had been left out of history just as
20 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
had been done in historical writings in Europe and elsewhere. The Caribbean has produced
many sociologists who are making contributions in several spheres, both as academics and
practitioners.
The following are work by some of the people who have made invaluable contributions
to Caribbean sociology:
a.
Susan Craig, Sociological Theorizing in the English Speaking Caribbean: A Review
(1982).
b. R.T. Smith, The Negro Family in British Guiana: Family Structure and Social Status
in the Villages (1956).
c.
M.G. Smith The Plural Society in the British West lndies (1965).
d . Bill Riviere, Contemporary Class Struggles and the Revolutionary Potential of Social
Classes in Dominica (1982).
e.
Angel Quintero Rivera, The Socio-Political Background to the Emergence of ‘The
Puerto Rican Model’ as a Strategy for Development (1982).
f.
Paget Henry, De-colonization, Tourism and Class/Race Structure in Antigua (1981).
g.
Elsa Goveia, Slave Society in the British Leeward Islands at the End of the Eighteenth
Century (1965).
h. Derek Gordon, Class, Status and Social Mobility in Jamaica (1987).
i.
George Beckford, Persistent Poverty (1972).
j.
Rex Nettleford, Emancipation: The Lessons and the Legacy (1994).
k.
Lloyd Braithwaite, Social Stratification and Cultural Pluralism (1960).
Sociology as a Discipline | 21
Activity 1.3
1. Which of the following is not related to the development of Caribbean sociology?
a.
Lloyd Braithwaite
b. M.G. Smith
c.
Lloyd Best
d. R.T. Raymond
2. Which theorist is associated with the study of family life in Jamaica?
a.
Edith Clarke
b.
G.P. Murdock
c.
Bill Riviere
d. Rhoda Reddock
3. Which statements apply to Caribbean sociology?
i.
it was influenced by European sociological theories.
ii. it seeks to understand the nature of social issues in the region.
iii. it examines social issues in developed societies in great detail.
iv. it enables us to make sense of the historical forces that impact upon the region’s
social and political development.
a. i, ii and iii
b. i, ii, and iv
c. i, iii and iv
4. Which theorist and social issue are incorrectly matched?
a.
R.T. Smith – family
b.
M.G. Smith – culture
c.
Paget Henry – education
d. Elsa Goveia – slavery
d. ii, iii and iv
22 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
5. Which Caribbean theorist was influenced directly by J.S. Furnivall?
a.
Angel Quintero Rivera
b.
Rex Nettleford
c.
M.G. Smith
d. Susan Craig
SOCIOLOGY AS A SCIENCE
What is a Science?
Science has been defined as ‘a body of systematically arranged knowledge that shows the operation
of general laws’ (Tischler 2002). According to Comte, human behaviour is governed by
the same laws of cause and effect as those that pertained to the study of the natural sciences.
Further, he believed that this behaviour was measurable. In particular, behaviour such as crime,
marriage, divorce and church attendance are easily measurable via rates.
According to Giddens (1986), science is the use of systematic methods of research and
investigation and the logical analysis of arguments in order to develop an understanding of a
particular subject matter. Many sociologists believe that sociology resembles a science in its
approaches and procedures. The key concept ‘systematic’ refers to a step-by-step procedure
that is easily replicated.
Sociology possesses characteristics that allow us to identify it as a science:
(1) It is Empirical
Sociological knowledge is based on solid evidence that has been acquired by objective (bias
free) procedures. Sociological research follows the steps of the scientific method. In order for
information to be empirical, it has to be based on facts obtained through various methods of
investigation. These methods are inclusive of questionnaires, surveys, interviews and observations.
(2) It is Theoretical
The data obtained by research are used to formulate theories, which are models that attempt to
explain various social phenomena such as issues of family life and educational attainment.
According to Schaefer and Lamm (1998), ‘a theory is a set of statements that seeks to explain
problems, actions or behaviour. An effective theory may have both explanatory and predictive
Sociology as a Discipline | 23
power.’ In sociology we have different theoretical perspectives (that is, different approaches
to the study of the same phenomena).
(3) It is Cumulative
The sociologist builds upon the efforts of his/her predecessors. Most new theories develop,
modify, expand and refine the older ones. Its cumulative nature implies that new knowledge
continuously builds upon what is already known. Durkheim built on ideas of society as an
organism, first developed by Herbert Spencer. He showed how the different institutions are
interconnected in greater detail than did Spencer.
(4) It is Objective
The sociologist tries to be dispassionate and unbiased at all times and his/her values, and personal
preferences should not be allowed to influence the research. However, in contemporary
times, most sociologists recognize that this is almost impossible to attain. Some go so far as to
say that subjectivity makes the quality of data richer.
(5) It is ‘Value-Free’
Scientific research should simply discover and report the truth rather than offer moral judgements
or commentary on social life. Research that is non-ethical must be objective. The sociologist
must therefore prevent personal values and beliefs from influencing his/her work. In studying
society, the facts obtained by research must be accurately reported and not distorted to agree
with the researcher’s feelings, preferences and emotions.
Sociology studies human social behaviour, which is sometimes abstract, changing, and not always
easy to measure. Sociology has developed approaches to overcome this problem. The term
‘empirical’ indicates that sociology is based on facts and not on value judgements, emotions
or even opinions. Empiricism restricts knowledge to the domain of experience and establishes
that knowledge should be based on experience. The theory underlying sociology is based
on observation, and even inquiry. Comte, Locke and Bacon advocated empiricism. Opposing
empiricism is another philosophy known as rationalism, which advocates that the mind recognizes
reality by means of reason. Advocates of this school of thought were philosophers such as René
Descartes. Immanuel Kant, another philosopher, believed that there should be a compromise
between empiricism and rationalism, which would limit knowledge to the domain of the
experience and, at the same time, integrate sensations into that experience.
Based on the foregoing discussion, one may conclude that if sociology is empirical, theoretical,
cumulative, objective and non-ethical, then it possesses the major characteristics of a science.
24 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
However, there are those who are of the opinion that the study of sociology should be conducted
in a much different manner to the natural sciences. This school of thought is of the view that since
the subject matter of sociology is the study of communities and societies, sociology cannot be
studied in the same manner as the study of matter, and therefore the laws of the natural sciences
cannot be applied to the study of people. Phenomenologists and ethnomethodologists adopt
this view and call for the use of humanistic methods (qualitative methods, such as participant
observation and unstructured interviews).
Some theorists call for a middle ground with a combination of both approaches. Ralf Dahrendorf,
writing about Max Weber in his essay ‘Max Weber and Modern Social Science’, has been quoted
as saying that Weber was of the opinion that ‘statements of fact are one thing, statements of value
another, and any confusing of the two is impermissible.’ It is not known where Max Weber stood
on objectivity, but it is widely believed by many that Weber was advocating a two-tiered approach.
SOME BASIC CONCEPTS
SOCIETY
Defining Society
A society is any set of people living together in a group comprising a single community
and whose members are interdependent. The word ‘society’ is commonly used to refer to
national communities, for example, the British society or the Jamaican society or subsections
of society such as rural society. The term is also used to indicate groups of people who share
a common interest, such as the Horticultural Society of Trinidad and Tobago, and may even
transcend local and regional political boundaries, for example, the National Geographic Society,
whose members extend across the face of the earth.
How Does Society Work?
In attempting to study society, sociologists have made different assumptions, used different
approaches and methods, and have arrived at different explanatory models of human social
reality. These different approaches are termed ‘sociological perspectives’. In sociology, there
are three major perspectives: structural theories, interpretivist theories and postmodernism.
The figure below illustrates this:
Sociology as a Discipline | 25
Figure 1.1: The Main Sociological Perspectives
Structural
FUNCTIONALISM
Interpretivist
Theories
Postmodernism
Phenomenology
Ethnomethodology
MARXISM
Symbolic
Interationism
In all societies, a common understanding develops over time among individual members,
accompanied by a unique relationship among their institutions. In such a setting, the individuals
in that society interact and live together and usually understand one another. In Western societies,
some of these institutions may include education, religion and the family. Individuals may
belong to a family and to a particular school, a church, a Boy Scouts group or the Red Cross
Society.
In sociology, the social structure is the distinctive arrangement of these institutions whereby
individuals in the society interact and are able to live together. Societies may be stratified (divided)
by race, gender or by economic factors like wealth and income. Social class is largely an economic
category that consists of a group of people who are employed in similar occupations, are of the
same socio-economic status, and share similar living conditions. In most societies the upper,
middle and lower classes are most commonly used to separate the population.
What is Socialization?
Socialization is the process whereby individuals learn about the culture of their society.
They learn about behaviours that are acceptable and those that are not. The agents or
institutions that are responsible for the socialization process include:
•
The family
•
Peers
26 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
•
School
•
The mass media
•
Church
Implicit in the socialization process is the learning of values. Children are likely to learn and
develop the social values of their parents by observing them. The socialization process occurs
from the moment they are born, and continues throughout adult life.
There are two main types of socialization: primary socialization and seconday socialization.
Primary socialization
This begins during childhood. Children look at the way adults in their environment behave
and learn which actions constitute acceptable behaviour. The family is the key institution
involved in the primary socialization process and is responsible for training the child in basic
social skills like sharing and respect for others. Primary socialization teaches the child correct
behaviour and other skills, such as the use of language to communicate, and how to take a
bath. The American sociologist Talcott Parsons says that one of the family’s basic functions is
the primary socialization of young children.
Secondary socialization
The school (educational system) is largely responsible for the secondary socialization process
whereby more specific training and skills are learnt. This institution prepares the individual for
work and public life. Interaction with teachers and peers in the education system prepares the
individual for the world of work. It socializes the individual into working according to rules and
regulations, getting to work on time, as well as knowing how to interact with peers and those
in authority. Feminists also view the school as serving to reinforce many of the masculinity and
femininity issues just learnt in the family. They suggest that because girls learn domestic
chores (e.g., cooking, cleaning ) at home, they were more likely to be assigned subjects such as
home economics at school.
SOCIOLOGICAL PERSPECTIVES
Sociological perspectives are general outlines as to how theorists view social patterns and the
assumptions they make about society and individuals. Each perspective provides sociologists
with a different view of social life and a starting point for viewing the world.
Sociology as a Discipline | 27
In seeking to explain society, sociologists may take one of two approaches: (Refer to Figure 1.1)
•
the macro approach, by looking at the social structure and its impact on individuals.
This approach studies the large-scale structures, such as entire societies, to conduct its analysis.
Examples of macro-sociological theories in sociology include: the Structural–Functional
Perspective, and the Social–Conflict Perspective.
OR
•
the micro perspective, that is, by approaching the study of society using the
individual as the focus. Micro perspectives take the individual and the actions of the
individual as the point of departure for the study and analysis of society.
Functionalism
The structural–functional perspective depicts society as a complex system with many institutions
or parts that work together to promote solidarity and stability. This perspective focuses on
social order, functions and systems and investigates how the relationship among institutions
contribute to this order and the survival of society as a whole. As stated earlier, functionalism
developed from the ideas of theorists such as Herbert Spencer and Emile Durkheim, but has had
its roots traced as far back as the original founding father of sociology, Auguste Comte. The
more contemporary functionalism developed from the contributions of several theorists such
as American sociologists Talcott Parsons, Robert Merton, Kingsley Davis and Wilbert Moore.
The functionalist approach places emphasis on the following key concepts:
•
Functions
•
Interdependence
•
Equilibrium, and
•
Consensus
Functions
According to the functionalist perspective, society is a system that consists of a number of
components or institutions, such as the state, the family, religion, the economy and education.
Functionalists envisage each of the parts or components as contributing to society, just as each
organ in the body contributes to its efficient running. For the functionalists, each part of
society is therefore performing a function or functions necessary for the maintenance of order
in the society (i.e., organic analogy). It adopts an organic analogy of society as it compares the
social system to that of a living organism whose functioning depends upon the collaboration of
28 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
the different parts to maintain the whole. Functionalism perceives the different parts of society
to be contributing positively to the operation or functioning of the system as a whole.
The functionalist perspective sees each system as having certain needs which must be fulfilled
in order for social life to develop. The family performs tasks such as reproduction: procreation
takes place, and the population is maintained. In general, the family performs functions such
as nurturing the young and socializing them so that later on they will be able to take their place
in society. In similar fashion, the institution of religion contributes to the continuation of society
since it strengthens adherence to the norms and values of the society.
Interdependence
Functionalism sees each part as being interrelated and interdependent, and therefore contributing
to the maintenance of the whole. Change in any part will affect the other parts and will require
each part to adapt as necessary. For functionalists, each individual in society has a part to play
which leads to the interdependence of individuals. This influences the smooth running of
society. Each individual has a status in society, and with this status comes a role that he/
she has to perform. A role is the behaviour which is expected of the individual who occupies a
given social position or status in a society. Each individual in society has a role or one of many
roles that he/she has to play. An individual may be a doctor, which represents his/her position or
social status. Accompanying this status, he/she has a role to play, which may be that of a medical
practitioner attending to patients in a hospital. In addition to that role, the individual may also
have to fulfil the role of parent to his/her children, child to his/her parents, and may also be a
sibling, cousin, nephew/niece and aunt/uncle, among other roles.
Equilibrium
Functionalism sees each part of the system as being interrelated and interdependent. It maintains
that each part must be functioning properly, fulfilling its functions, and must therefore be in
equilibrium (a state of order and balance within society that is derived from shared norms and
values i.e., the collective conscience) if it is to contribute to the maintenance of the equilibrium
of the whole. Change in these systems must be orderly, and any change in one institution will
result in an orderly movement of the forces within that institution toward equilibrium. This
results in the movement of the whole to a new equilibrium, which maintains the social order.
For example, if there is a shortage in the economy of a certain product, the price for that
commodity will increase drastically, and it may even be sold in a ‘black market’. This would
then motivate manufacturers to produce more, in search of increased profits. Eventually the
shortage in the country will be ironed out. A major critique of this perspective is its tendency
to ignore the inequalities in society while overemphasizing the occurrence of social cohesion.
Sociology as a Discipline | 29
Activity 1.4
1. Match the statements on the left with the concepts on the right:
A state in which order is maintained in society.
Consensus
The part played by an institution in maintaining social order.
Interdependence
Social structures such as schools, families, churches and
community groups are often referred to as ----------
Function
The principle based on agreement to shared values
Equilibrium
The principle of reciprocity and mutuality of individuals and
organizations is referred to as
Institutions
2. The functionalist perspective of stratification is of relevance to the Caribbean because
a.
there is some amount of value consensus.
b.
groups are always in conflict with one another.
c.
governments act on behalf of the ruling class.
d. schools act independently of the state.
3.
Put True or False after each statement
a.
Durkheim advanced functionalism in the late nineteenth century.
b.
Parsons is a renowned American functionalist.
c.
Functionalism is concerned with values and norms as key agents of social
solidarity.
d. During the 1960s functionalism enjoyed great popularity in the US.
e.
In sociology functionalists use organic analogy to compare society to an organized
system.
30 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Conflict Theory
The social–conflict perspective suggests that society is characterized by inequality that perpetuates
conflict and social change. This perspective focuses on conflict, change and the evolution
of society. Karl Marx (1818–83) has been credited with many of the ideas associated with this
theory.
Central to this perspective is the tension that is present in society. In Marx’s analysis of the
capitalist mode of production, he identified two classes, the proletariat and the bourgeoisie,
based on the part played in production and the relationship to the means of production. The
division in society is highlighted by these distinctly different social groups who simultaneously
pursue their own conflicting interests. Tension and conflict will be ever present since their separate
interests produce an unequal relationship where one group (bourgeoisie) benefits at the expense of
the other (proletariat). Marx claimed that the capitalist mode of production promotes differences
in wealth and power in society. Due to the distribution of wealth in this mode of production,
some groups are more privileged than others and are able to exercise control over those who do
not own capital. According to Marx, the dominant groups control not only the resources but
also the status quo (established order). They do this through the institutions that are present
in society, such as the education system, and the church. He explained this by arguing that
religion acts to keep the poor in poverty. It encourages subservience and an acceptance of
exploitation. One way it does this is by the promise of happiness in the afterlife for those
who suffer in the present.
Marxist theory claims that the status quo will be maintained up to a certain point in time,
and the proletariat will continue to serve the bourgeoisie, and aspire to their goals and ideals.
However, with time, the underprivileged group will develop a class-consciousness that will enable
it to move cohesively. This class-consciousness will lead to the downfall of capitalism through a
violent upheaval. Conflict will lead to tensions and hostility over goals and values, and these
will, according to Marx, result in violence.
For Marx, society evolved in a linear trend where societies progressed from ancient slavery to
feudalism and then to capitalism. Marx assumed that inequality and tension would lead to
revolution. In general, one expects the exploited and alienated to arm themselves and violently
overthrow their oppressors. He believed that the more alienated (unhappy) the man, the greater
the possibility that he will rise up against those who dominate him. Conflict theory indicates
that the capitalist society is not the ideal, and with the development of class-consciousness, the
status quo will be overthrown, the result being communism. Marx saw communism as the
ultimate society, with all societies tending towards this ideal. In the communist system, Marx
indicated that there would be an even distribution of resources in what he termed a ‘classless’
society. It is important to note, however, that the expansion of capitalism and the collapse of the
Sociology as a Discipline | 31
communist Soviet Union nullifies the Marxist claim that a communist system is the ideal system
to which all societies strive.
Activity 1.5
1. Explain why Marxism is a structural perspective. (Answer in four lines)
2. State and explain two differences between the Marxist and functionalist perspectives.
The Interactionist Perspectives
Micro perspectives use the actions of the individual as the point of departure for the study and
analysis of society. The symbolic–interactionist perspective does not depict the individual
as a passive actor, produced solely by external social forces, but takes into consideration
the actions of the individual in society. Critical to these theories are symbols, interaction
and meanings. Max Weber, George Herbert Mead and Erving Goffman are some of the major
theorists who influenced this perspective.
The interactionist perspective focuses on individuals and their interpretation of the social world.
Unlike the macro perspective, which focuses on the structures of society, the interactionists
focus on the individual. It views individuals as creators of society who actively produce the
structures through their everyday routine actions. Thus, sociology needs to study how people
act and thereby understand the reason and meaning behind their actions.
The interactionist perspective includes the following approaches:
•
Symbolic Interactionism
•
Ethnomethodology
•
Phenomenology
•
Dramaturgy
Symbolic Interactionism
This perspective evolved out of the work of George Herbert Mead (1863–1931). Symbolic
interactionism assumes that individuals place meanings on objects in the environment, and
it is these meanings that determine behaviour in the society. There are three core elements of
symbolic interactionism:
32 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
1. the symbol
2. the self
3. interaction
The Symbol – Symbolic interactionism assumes that individuals place meanings on objects
in the environment, and it is these meanings that determine their behaviour. Mead claims that
for sense to be made of the real world and the actions of other individuals, there must be shared
symbols. These allow all members of society to sharing a common perception of reality.
The world is, therefore, made up of symbols that are created by humans to give meaning or
order in society. Such symbols include language, which facilitates communication among
individuals and acts as a reference point from which individuals can base their interaction.
The Self – Mead refers to the individuals in society as ‘actors’. He elaborates by asserting that
the mind and the self are socially constructed in a social process through which individuals or
social actors interact, and out of this interaction each person internalizes how he/she is perceived
by others. The individual’s notion of self, Mead refers to as ‘I’; and the notion that we perceive
others have of us, he calls the ‘Me’. This is important because reference groups, or what Mead
terms ‘the generalized other’, influence interaction in society.
Interaction – According to Mead, no interaction is possible unless individuals are aware of the
intention of others. In society, individuals assume that they share common understandings
of the symbols (for example, language) and so place themselves in the place of others, and react
accordingly. Thus, social interaction depends on the meaning that individuals place on things
and on how they are perceived by others.
Symbolic Interactionism emphasizes three principles:
1. Ascribed Meanings: The actions of human beings are based on the meanings that
they ascribe to objects or things.
2. Communication: The meanings which individuals place on things have evolved out of
their interaction and contact with other individuals.
3. Interpretation: The individual undertakes an interpretive process through which he/
she assigns meanings to the things in the environment.
Ethnomethodolgy
The American sociologist Harold Garfinkel founded ethnomethodology in the early 1960s.
This perspective emphasizes the way in which people make sense of their social world. It is
Sociology as a Discipline | 33
said to be the study of common sense and practical reasoning. Ethnomethodology takes the
view that social life appears to be orderly, when in fact it is very chaotic; social order is constructed
in the minds of the individuals. According to Garfinkel, this order is achieved through a process
called ‘the documentary method’. In this process, individuals, as social actors, make sense of
social life by observing a set of unwritten rules that guide routine situations. He illustrated the
method through an experiment carried out among students at a university. Students were
asked to speak with someone about their problems, to which random responses were given to
the students. The students then tried to make sense of the responses that they obtained,
even if these responses did not make sense. Garfinkel argued that the students were, in many
instances, making sense of a senseless interaction. Students were constructing a social reality
to give order to their senseless reality. Garfinkel suggested that people use this method in their
daily lives to make sense of statements or symbols in the context in which they occur.
Ethnomethodology suggests that all meanings are subjective and as a result, reality is purely
subjective, or socially constructed to create a sense of order.
Phenomenology
This perspective opposes the positivist view of sociology. It does not believe that human beings
can be scientifically studied using the methods and principles of natural sciences. Phenomenology
is a school of philosophy that attempts to explain social action by studying the phenomena or
human experience first-hand. Alfred Schutz (1899–1959) adapted phenomenology from the
work of Edmund Husserl (1859–1938). This theory attempts to discover the essence of
the objects being studied in society.
Phenomenological studies require that the researcher actually experience the phenomena being
investigated, because the only way the true meaning can be discovered is by having lived
experiences.
It argues that people make sense of the world by a process known as ‘typification’. It entails
the use of a stock of ‘common sense knowledge’ and experience to categorize phenomena (objects,
events and situations).
Dramaturgy
Erving Goffman developed this line of analysis, called dramaturgy, by claiming that people
‘stage’ social life. In Goffman’s book, The Presentation of Self in Everyday Life, he discusses
impression management, and how this explains individual behaviour (Goffman 1959).
34 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
According to Goffman, social interaction by individuals is similar to the interaction of actors
in a play. To be accepted by the audience, the actor has to portray his or her role convincingly.
In order to achieve this, impression management is practised. The actor on stage follows a script
to portray his or her character; the audience is only allowed to view the on-stage activities
and not the activities ‘backstage’, if the performance is to be convincing.
Individuals in society adopt similar roles in everyday interaction, that is, a ‘front stage’
and a ‘back stage’ role. The role that the person adopts depends on the audience. According to
Goffman, the ‘front stage’ is what the individual wants the world to see and the ‘back stage’ is
what is kept out of the view of the world, only certain individuals are privy to the ‘back stage’. In
life, individuals are like actors and certain roles entail a certain type of behaviour that is expected
of the individual if he/she is to be accepted.
Thus, individuals portray themselves in different ways because of what they think people
expect from them and what they want people to think of them. The individual puts forward an
impression that he or she wants people to accept and believe. This presentation differs depending
on the audience or group involved in the interaction.
Conclusion
In this section, an outline of the three major sociological perspectives was presented. Sociology
as a scientific discipline is dynamic and constantly evolving. As such, its theories and methods
are constantly being modified and adapted to changing social situations that require explanation.
Activity 1.6
1. Match the sociologists’ names to the statements below:
a.
George Herbert Mead
b.
C. Wright Mills
c.
Emile Durkheim
d. Max Weber
Sociology as a Discipline | 35
I.
Explained how religion could lead to social change; also pioneered the study of
bureaucracy.
II. Introduced the concept of the ‘sociological imagination’.
III. Conducted the first empirical sociological study in which he explained how such
individual acts as suicide could be explained by understanding social integration and
other social forces.
IV. Introduced the symbolic interaction perspective.
2. State which of the following statements are True and which are False.
a.
Latent functions reflect the intended consequences of social processes.
b.
According to Marxist theory, a class in itself is a class that is fully aware of its true
position in society.
c.
Impression Management is a concept put forward by Harold Garfinkel that indicates
that human beings are social actors.
d. Talcott Parsons was influenced by both Durkheim and Weber.
3. Which of the following is NOT a component of the scientific method?
a.
Experimentation
b.
Personification
c.
Observation
d. Generalization
4. Which was the ideology that Max Weber said justified economic success through rational
disciplined hard work?
a.
The Iron Laws of Wages
b.
Verstehen
c.
Communism
d. The Protestant Ethic
36 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
5. Empiricism is the feature of science that stresses
a.
Observable entities.
b. Abstract concepts.
c.
Philosophical doctrines.
d. Objectivity.
6. Gestures, like a nod of the head, are
a.
Universal and always have the same meaning.
b.
Understood in the same way by all cultures.
c.
Defined uniquely by each culture.
d. Instinctively understood by humans.
7. Which of the following is a functional prerequisite as stated by Talcott Parsons?
a.
Integration
b.
Pattern variables
c.
Social equilibrium
d. Social systems
8. Which of the following is a concept associated with the work of Karl Marx?
a.
Alienation
b.
Social order
c.
Microsociology
d. Dysfunctions
Sociology as a Discipline | 37
Feminism
What is feminism?
Feminism is not a unified movement since there is disagreement among the various perspectives
concerning what causes the subjugation of women and the methods of liberating women from
their oppressed state. Delmar (1986) referred to this division as the ‘fragmentation’ of feminism.
The main idea that unites all branches of feminism, though, is the notion that women in society
are subordinated and it is essential that liberating strategies be developed. Moreover, the feminist
movement firstly concerns itself with the reality that the chief reason for women’s inferior status
is discrimination based on their sex. Thus, feminists agree that the unifying factor among all
women is their shared experiences.
The various branches of feminism call for the social, political and cultural alteration in society
in order for the needs of women to be met.
With specific relevance to the discipline of Sociology, Feminist theorising holds the united front
that the discipline is male-dominated by research done for and by men, and that the perspective
of women is analysed from the male viewpoint and therefore is unrepresentative of the true
women’s perception. For instance, the discipline was initially developed by men – the founding
‘fathers – such as Comte and Durkheim.
The Feminist Perspective in Sociology
Feminists have levelled numerous critiques against the discipline of Sociology. One of the major
concerns of this movement surrounds the research and development of theories. Ann Oakley
(1982) proposed that Sociology is a male profession and has been biased from its inception.
Feminists are of the opinion that research has been conducted by men, utilizes all-male samples
and the findings are generalized to explain entire populations. In this regard, the voices of women
are not heard; therefore, their input is not included. As a result, feminists claim that issues deemed
relevant by women are not documented; they are overlooked and classified as insignificant.
Another feminist critique relates to subject matter of the discipline. Sociology developed as a
response to the political and economic changes of Europe in the nineteenth century. Men were
the ones who were predominantly active in these sectors while women were occupied in the
private domain. Consequently, the focus upon governance and the economic structure dominated
the discipline while the domestic arena – the woman’s area – was left untouched. This division
between men and women was seen as natural and given biological explanations thus, sociologists
saw no need to include sex and gender as variables in their analyses. This according to Abbott
and Wallace (1997) is sexist.
38 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
The Branches of Feminism
As previously stated, the feminist movement comprises various arms, each analysing and explaining
women’s disadvantaged position in society from different standpoints. Some of these branches
include, but are not limited to, Liberal Feminism, Radical Feminism and Marxist Feminism.
Liberal Feminism
The main idea of Liberal feminism is that men and women are created equally and should therefore
have the same opportunities and rights. Discrimination against women has roots within the legal
system. Liberal feminists believe women’s entry into the public sphere is limited because of the
misconception that they are the weaker sex. Liberal feminists call for the alteration of society
through policy implementation for equality of rights for all citizens.
Radical Feminism
Radical feminists see the society as male-dominated society. Women’s liberation will result only
from the complete marginalization of men and through the establishment of female-centred
institutions. The Radical view challenges and seeks to overthrow patriarchy by opposing standard
gender roles and what they see as male oppression of women. Subscribers to this philosophy
argue that the oppression of women cuts across racial and cultural boundaries and can only be
demolished through revolutionary social change.
Marxist Feminism
This branch highlights the introduction of private property as the reason for women’s oppression
since this eliminated the previous system of equity. Since men are the owners of the means of
production, they are able to oppress women economically. They also believe that the family
structure is an agent of female suppression since women’s unpaid domestic labour renders them
economically dependent upon men. As a result, they lack independence and reinforces their
passive status in society.
Sociology as a Discipline | 39
Activity 1.7
1. How would you define Feminism?
2. List two criticisms of Sociology by the feminist movement.
3. To what extent do women in Caribbean society today experience domination by their male
counterparts?
Chapter 2
SOCIOLOGICAL RESEARCH
OBJECTIVES
On completing this chapter, students should be able to:
1. define and distinguish between quantitative and qualitative research;
2. state the main quantitative methods and compare their advantages and disadvantages;
3. state the main qualitative methods and compare their advantages and disadvantages;
4. state the main middle range methods and compare their advantages and disadvantages;
5. define the term sampling;
a.
list and explain four types of probability samples;
b.
state and explain three types of non-probability sampling; and
6. identify and describe ethical issues in research.
CONTENT
1. Principles of Scientific Research
a.
Sociology as a science
b.
Ethical issues in research
2. Research Methods
a.
Positivism and interpretivism
b.
Quantitative, qualitative and triangulation
c.
Surveys and sampling methods
d. Document studies
e.
Observation (participant and non-participant)
f.
Cross-sectional and longitudinal studies
Sociological Research | 41
INTRODUCTION
It is imperative that sociologists employ systematic methods of collecting data from samples of
the population. Emile Durkheim sought to develop the science of sociology by applying inductive
logic (specific to general, that is, beginning with observation and then formulating a
theory based upon the initial observation) to the study of human behaviour. The emphasis
today, however, is on the collection of data that are valid, reliable and dependable. The
procedures utilized in one research project must be replicable, repeatable or verifiable, if
sociological knowledge is to stand the test of time.
There are two broad traditions that underpin the study of sociology: positivism and interpretivism.
Positivism suggests that the scientific study of humans is possible using the methods and procedures
of natural science such as observation, multivariate analysis and correlation. This scientific
approach places heavy emphasis upon quantitative research methodologies and assumes that the
only valid knowledge is knowledge that has been derived from scientific testing. Critics claim
that positivism ‘reifies’ society; that is, it oversimplifies social life and treats human behaviour
as a thing (tangible object), since it is perceived to be measurable, observable, and conditioned
by invariable laws. That is to say, positivism treats human behaviour as something tangible and
quantifiable rather than recognizing its abstract existence.
The French sociologist Auguste Comte is largely regarded as the founding father of positivism.
He believed that human beings were controlled in much the same way that matter was constrained
by the laws of nature. To advance the cause of positivism, Comte theorized that the study
of society could be pursued under two broad topics: social statics and social dynamics.
The German sociologist Max Weber regarded as the founder of interpretivism, was opposed
to the idea that human behaviour is exactly quantifiable. He proposed instead that there were
aspects of human behaviour that could not be measured because they were concerned with
emotions and feelings. On this basis he suggested that sociologists focus their study on the way
people interpret the behaviour of others with whom they are interacting. In this regard,in
order to truly capture the nature of human behaviour, the focus of the sociologist should be upon
culture and lived experiences of individuals. This belief has led to the development of qualitative
methodology such as unstructured interviews, participant observation and case studies.
Between the 1930s and 1960s a number of American sociologists (G.H. Mead, E. Goffman and
H. Garfinkel) took Weber’s theory of interpretive understanding a step further. Both Goffman
and Garfinkel employed subjective approaches in their research. Goffman made extensive use of
participant observation, while Garfinkel used unstructured interviews.
42 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Government censuses and opinion polls frequently adopt the positivist approach while feminist
researchers such as Peggy Antrobus and Patricia Mohammed have drawn conclusions based on
interpretivist methodologies as well.
QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE RESEARCH
In this section both types of research will be examined. It should be clear to us at this point that
quantitative research is generally associated with positivism and qualitative research with
interpretivism.
In modern times many researchers are more concerned with acquiring relevant, reliable,
dependable or trustworthy data, than with the type of data collected. In any event, some researchers
collect both quantitative and qualitative data, because it will lead to a more comprehensive
understanding of the phenomenon being studied. An example of this is E. Barker’s investigation
of the Unification Church, or Moonies, (Barker 1984). Barker was able to understand the group
because of the use of statistical (quantitative) data and in-depth explanation (qualitative).
Quantitative Data
Quantitative data usually takes the form of statistical or numerical information. For example,
if a researcher wishes to express the number of crimes committed by working-class males in a
given year, sometimes this information may be expressed in the form of a rate. Often reference
is made to the crime or marriage rate in any given year.
Durkheim believes that the analysis of statistical data can indicate both cause and correlation.
He argues that through complex statistical approaches, such as multivariate analysis (statistical
test used to measure multiple variables), the researcher can know the main causes of a particular
social phenomenon. For example, the main reasons for the increase in crime, or the decrease
in the rate of marriage, could be identified. Additionally, multivariate analysis can help the
scientist discover the complexity of social life. An example of this is that rising crime rates
may be associated (correlated) with other factors, like unemployment, poverty, gender, social
class, ethnicity or religion.
Today, the analysis of social phenomena using multivariate analysis, correlation and causation,
and the accompanying methods of computation are much easier than before. Several statistical
packages have been developed to compute statistical correlation and causation. Two popular
programs are Statistical Package for the Social Sciences (SPSS) and MINITAB. Details about
Sociological Research | 43
these programs are available online. If ever you are interested in conducting a quantitative study
involving correlation, you are advised to become familiar with the basic features of one of these
programs or consult a good statistician who will assist you with the process.
For your School-based Assessment (SBA) less sophisticated statistical methods such as mean,
median, mode and standard deviation are used. These should pose few problems because you
would have calculated such values in your mathematics or statistics courses.
For the most part, students resort to percentages and raw scores to analyse data. Do not
become too concerned if you feel inadequate in mathematics or statistics; you can always seek
the assistance of your teacher.
Measures of Central Tendency
1. The mean or arithmetic average is obtained by adding individual scores and then
dividing the total by the number of cases.
In this example, the individual scores are added and then divided by the number of
cases. If we wish to find the mean of the following seven scores, we firstly find the sum
of the scores.
34, 27, 46, 55, 22, 34, 20
Sum of scores = 238
Number of cases = 7
Mean = 238/7 = 34
2 . The median – the value or score that falls in the centre of a distribution or data set.
e.g. for the data set 2, 3, 6, 8, 9, the median is 6.
3 . The mode – the most frequently occurring statistic in a set of data, e.g., for the data
set 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 3, 5, 8, the mode is 1.
4. Standard Deviation (SD) – indicates the amount of dispersion from the population
mean. It is usually indicated graphically by a bell-shaped curve.
44 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
SD =
∑(x
‒ x)
2
N
where x = statistic number
x
= sample mean
Σ = sum of
N = number of cases (sample size, number of responses)
Activity 2.1
Distinguish between ‘positivism’ and ‘interpretivism’, giving an example of each.
a.
Explain Comte’s role in developing positivism.
b. Describe Weber’s contribution to interpretivism.
Those of you who have carried out questionnaire research involving close-ended (for example,
multiple choice) questions would have engaged in less sophisticated descriptive statistics, such
as frequencies and measures of central tendency, like mean, median and mode. Sociologists
hardly ever draw conclusions from data in these forms, because they cannot tell how statistically
significant the data are. An illustration is provided below.
Crime Survey
1. Sample size: 1,000
2. Sample Question: Have you been a victim of crime in the last year?
1. Yes
2. No
3. Hypothetical Response:
40 per cent Yes
60 per cent No
A sociologist will not assume that because 60 per cent of the sample is not directly affected by
crime, that crime is not a serious problem. One can only know this by finding out the extent to
which these percentages are truly significant. In your later studies, you will encounter more
accurate statistical techniques such as correlation, chi-square and multiple regressions.
Sociological Research | 45
Activity 2.2
Define each of the following terms in no more than three lines:
a.
b.
Correlation
Measures of Central Tendency
c.
Multivariate Analysis
d. Causation
e.
Standard Deviation
We are now in a position to address the following issues:
a.
Planning Quantitative Research
b.
The Advantages of Quantitative Research
c.
The Disadvantages of Quantitative Research
PLANNING FOR QUANTITATIVE RESEARCH
The researcher must first consider issues such as sample size and cost, once the purpose of the
research is known. The data collection instrument will also have to be developed. In cases where
the sample is large, researchers prefer to use questionnaires involving fixed-choice questions.
Once the researcher is sure about the objectives (desired outcomes) of the research, the
questionnaire will be formulated. This is a systematic process. Most importantly, the researcher
ensures that the questions are valid. Today, many people opt for what are called Standardized
Instruments. These are questionnaires that have been widely used by popular researchers who
have found the questions to be both valid and reliable measures of a particular phenomenon. For
instance, there are many standardized IQ (intelligence quotient) tests.
If the researcher chooses to formulate his/her own questionnaire, a systematic approach should
be followed. However, caution must also be exercised in using standardized tests. Firstly, the
researcher needs to ensure that the circumstances are similar to those where the instruments
were developed. Also, permission must be sought to use copyrighted material, and appropriate
acknowledgements should be provided. Another important planning consideration is the budget.
The scale of research is important. A large-scale research study (i.e., one with a large sample) will
require more funds than a small-scale one. Sometimes funds for research can be obtained from
sources such as government departments, universities or non-governmental agencies (NGOs).
46 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Researchers also need to decide whether paid assistance from trained interviewers is required.
University students or graduates often make excellent co-researchers, because of the training
acquired during their course of study. Of course, other arrangements such as transport, housing
and meal allowances may have to be worked out if the research is being conducted in another
country or in another (distant) town.
Some Terms for Assessing Data Gathering Tools
You should learn the meanings of the following terms, because they are useful for commenting
on the merits and demerits or the various quantitative and qualitative research methods.
1. Practicality – the extent to which a particular method saves the researcher time
(time-effective) and money (cost-effective).
2.
Validity – the extent to which the results of research are a truthful reflection of social
reality.
It is enhanced by the use of the most appropriate technique, e.g., if the researcher wants
to understand a rape victim’s point of view, an unstructured interview will yield more valid
results than, say, a social survey. In this regard, a qualitative methodology proves to be
more appropriate than a quantitative one depending upon the nature of the subject under
investigation.
3. Objectivity – the extent to which a researcher’s values, attitudes, beliefs, opinions and
emotions are omitted from the research findings. Durkheim advocated that the key to
objective research is for complete detachment of the researcher from his/her subjects. In
other words, it eliminates the ‘observer effect’ which refers to any differences in the subjects’
behaviour as a reaction to the presence of the observer or researcher.
4. Reliability – this is concerned with internal consistency, that is, the extent to
which successive repetitions of the same research yield similar or the same findings.
The reliability of data is affected by the following:
a.
time – the shorter the time lapse between repetitions, the more likely it is that
results will be similar.
b.
sample representativeness – a more representative sample increases the tendency to
achieve similar results.
Sociological Research | 47
c.
type of question – closed-ended questions are more likely to produce similar
results than open-ended questions, which allow respondents more flexibility.
Reading
M. Haralambos, and M. Holborn, Sociology: Themes and Perspectives, 7th edition (London:
Collins, 2008). See chapter 14. This reading provides very useful information on conducting
sociological research.
The Advantages of Quantitative Research
The main quantitative research methods are:
i) Social Surveys
•
Questionnaires (primary)
•
Structured interviews (primary)
ii) Official statistics (secondary)
Some general advantages of quantitative research:
a.
The study is easily replicable (reliability).
b.
This method saves the researcher time and money, since it is cost-effective and
practical.
c.
It collects standard data.
d. The data are easy to quantify.
e.
Validity is enhanced by the use of large samples (or a cross section of the population).
f.
It provides more objective data, since the researcher may not have to interact with
the respondents (that is, they may not be influenced by the researcher’s race, age or
political affiliation).
g.
It facilitates theory formulation – as a large amount of data is collected, the researcher
is able to formulate theories. As a result, quantitative data lends itself to Inductive
theorizing.
48 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Some disadvantages of quantitative data:
a.
There is no indication of the respondents’ personal state, for example, his or
her mood, attitude or feelings when providing the information. This is so since
respondents are not given the opportunity to clarify or explain their responses because
of the structured nature of quantitative measurement instruments.
b.
Unrepresentative samples can sometimes be drawn, thus leading to inaccurate and
invalid information.
c.
Generalizations of any kind may not apply to all people in all circumstances. For
example, not all crimes have the same cause, and the reason for divorce varies
according to family.
Quantitative research has been widely used in the Caribbean. Many of our researchers have
resorted to the use of statistical analysis in order to measure the extent of poverty, unemployment,
crime, educational success/failure and gender inequality, for example.
Types of Social Surveys
Social surveys are usually large-scale research projects that collect standardized data from a large
cross section of the population. A government census is a good example. Censuses are, however,
based on the entire population, whereas sample surveys are based on a sample.
There are different types of surveys. These include:
Descriptive Surveys – Though based on quantitative data, the analysis is usually general and
exploratory. The questions are usually fixed choice and allow the researcher the opportunity
to make correlations about social phenomena, such as information about people’s age, marital
status, occupation, income and ethnicity. For instance, high status occupations are more closely
associated with high incomes than low status occupations. However, it does not mean that a low
status occupation cannot command a high wage. Such is the case of a skilled craftsman in some
Caribbean territories.
Attitude Surveys – this asks mainly close-ended questions that attempt to find out
people’s feelings or opinions about a party, political figure or brand of a particular food item.
The Jamaica Gleaner has been known to conduct polls concerning the voting intentions of the
Jamaican electorate. The ANSA-McAL Psychological Research Centre and the North American
Caribbean Teachers’ Association (NACTA) also conduct attitudinal surveys about a number
of issues in Trinidad and Tobago. These include the spiralling crime rate, racial equality, equity
in employment and the relative popularity of prominent public figures.
Sociological Research | 49
Explanatory Surveys – this type of survey, unlike the first two, seeks answers that require more
than a simple response, such as Yes, No or Don’t Know. Respondents are given the opportunity
to clarify their feelings in greater depth. Some Weberians have made extensive use of explanatory
surveys, because these allow them to understand the world from the respondents’ point of view.
Thus, we may question the actual extent to which some methods occupy an intermediate position
between quantitative and qualitative research techniques.
Advantages of Social Surveys
1. They are valid because the data are collected from a large cross section of the population.
2. The data can be used to make generalizations about the behaviour of society as a whole.
3. Statistical techniques can be used to analyse the data, thus saving the researcher time.
4. The selection of representative (unbiased) samples saves the researcher the time of having
to find all individuals with relevant information.
5. The research is easily replicable (especially by other researchers). The reliability of the
survey is thus easy to verify.
Disadvantages of Social Surveys
1. The data can be invalid if a representative sample was not selected.
2. Once a questionnaire is used, the researcher will suffer the same disadvantages (that is,
problems of validity).
The Questionnaire
A questionnaire is a number of preset questions that can contain open-ended, fixed choice, or a
combination of both types of questions.
Questionnaire Construction
The steps in constructing a questionnaire are summarized below:
1.
Operationalize (convert from an abstract to a measurable form) the key terms and concepts.
Robert Blauner (1964) studied worker alienation by operationalizing it into the
following subconcepts: meaninglessness, powerlessness, self-estrangement and isolation.
50 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
2.
Formulate questions based on each sub-topic.
For instance, Blauner decided to write a number of questions to determine the extent to
which workers felt each of the following:
a.
The degree to which the work they did was meaningless (that is, boring, routine).
b.
The degree to which they felt that they had no power (control) over the work they
did.
c.
The degree to which they felt like strangers to themselves.
d. The degree to which they did not interact with other workers on the job.
By following this simple plan, you can save time. You should include questions in the questionnaire
that have some relevance to the research topic.
Once the questionnaire is constructed, the researchers might decide to test it before conducting
the survey. This is referred to as a pilot study, where a small group of people with similar
characteristics to those of the target sample answer the questions. Based on their responses, the
researcher can determine a number of facts about the questions: for example, the suitability
of the wording, and the amount of non-response.
Advantages of Questionnaires
1. They are usually easy to administer.
2. They can be used to reach a large number of people, even if they are geographically
dispersed (for example, the mailed questionnaire can do this). Additionally, questionnaires
can be distributed via the internet by email or online surveys.
3. They save the researcher time, since a large number can be administered at the same
time.
4. It is not costly to produce a large number of questionnaires.
5. The data can be easily tabulated, measured and analysed especially through the use of
statistical packages and computer programs.
Disadvantages of Questionnaires
1. What is gained in reliability may be lost in terms of validity for the following reasons:
a.
The wording may, intentionally or not, mislead the respondent.
b.
The researcher’s bias affects what he deems as important in formulating the
Sociological Research | 51
questionnaire, for example, this is the case with Blauner’s study of worker alienation.
He determined what four factors affected ‘alienation’.
c.
Respondents left on their own may not be concerned about the questions. They
may provide erroneous information, or treat the issues too lightly.
d. The fixed-choice questionnaire may force a respondent to choose an answer that
does not quite capture his feelings about an issue. Responses with choices such as
YES/NO or TRUE/FALSE encourage this tendency.
e.
Respondents may lie, forget, or lack information. The latter creates a case known
as ‘missing data’. In this regard, validity and reliability are both affected.
2. Postal questionnaires have a low rate of return (usually less than 50 per cent) and may
be completed by someone other than the intended respondent. This can undermine the
representative aspect of the sample.
Official Statistics
Official statistics are a secondary source of data. Unlike questionnaires and social surveys, the
researcher relies upon other people to collect the data. Statistics are numerical information about
human behaviour. They are called official because they are usually collected by a government
or another agency empowered to do so. For instance, the Central Statistical Office (CSO) of
Trinidad and Tobago collects almost all types of data such as demographic (census) and economic
data. It acts in collaboration with other official agencies such as the Central Bank and the various
ministries of government. Official statistics can also be gathered by international organizations
such as the World Bank and the United Nations. Statistical publications can be accessed from
the organizations’ websites as well as published reports.
Advantages of Official Statistics
1. They save the researcher time, since they provide a readily available source of data.
2. The conclusions drawn are objective (free of researcher bias) because there is no
interaction with the respondents or people from whom the information was collected.
3. The researcher can generalize because such statistics usually cover data for a large number
of people.
4. The researcher can understand the nature of social change by comparing statistics for
different times, for example, comparing the marriage rate in any given past year with the
rate of marriage today.
5. The researcher can use statistics to gain a deeper understanding of human relationships.
For example, results of interviews can be compared with official statistics. If we know that
52 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
ten people perceive crime to be a serious problem, then we can examine the crime rate to
see if people’s perceptions are matched by the ‘reality’ of crime.
Disadvantages of Official Statistics
1. Like all other secondary sources, official statistics can produce invalid data because the
data collection procedures used may have been biased.
a.
Crime statistics may be biased because police officers may record some crimes and
not others. For example, working-class, male and minority crimes are seen as more
destructive to social life than crimes committed by middle-class females and the elite.
b. by government officials who may wish to give the impression that policies are
working.
2. The validity of some official statistics (especially criminal statistics) may be lowered,
because people may not always report crimes considered too trivial. In addition, some
victims may fear the police or reprisals, or may be too embarrassed to come forward.
There is always a ‘dark figure’.
3.
Technological developments (for example, DNA analysis, or camera surveillance) may
make it appear that there are more crimes taking place today. Thus, it may be difficult for
researchers to compare past and present statistics. When statistics are dated, it makes the
effects of social change or human behaviour more difficult to measure.
4. The fact that statistics are secondary data contributes to their low level of reliability. For
example, we cannot go back into the distant past to find out the real crime, marriage or
unemployment rate. The reliability of statistics and the data collection processes cannot
be verified.
Complete the following activity before going on to the next section:
Activity 2.3
1. Sociologists make use of data in numerical, quantitative or statistical form because
it saves time and money. The level of objectivity is increased because there are times
during data collection when the researcher does not have to be present.
i. What is meant by the term quantitative data?
ii. Distinguish between a questionnaire and a social survey.
iii. Identify and describe two important procedures in questionnaire construction.
iv. List three advantages of quantitative data not mentioned in the passage.
Sociological Research | 53
2. i. Explain why quantitative data are quite reliable.
ii. Name two types of official statistics.
iii. State three advantages of the use of official statistics over the use of social surveys.
iv. Illustrate how, by being objective, data can be more valid.
v. Distinguish between a ‘primary’ and a ‘secondary’ source of data.
3. A researcher wants to study domestic violence in a community. Which is the most
appropriate set of issues to be considered when formulating a questionnaire?
i. marital status, age, social class, ethnicity, a n d educational level
ii. causes such as the level of isolation from kin, financial difficulties and marital role
expectations
iii. effects such as physical, emotional and psychological ill-health
iv. all of the above
Activity 2.4
Self-Test 1
Instructions
•
Use a pencil to put a tick in the box following the selected option.
•
Do not consult your notes or any other readings.
•
Re-read the section if you get two or more incorrect responses.
1. Which term is not necessarily associated with questionnaires?
a. Open-ended [ ]
b. Postal or mail [ ]
c. Close-ended [ ]
d. Face-to-face [ ]
2. Which is not an advantage of questionnaires?
a.
It saves time and money. [ ]
b.
It collects standardized data. [ ]
54 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
c.
It provides in-depth information.[ ]
d. It is easily replicable. [ ]
3. Which group represents types of social surveys?
a.
Sample, explanatory, attitude, descriptive [ ]
b. Sample, snapshot, representative, government [ ]
c.
Sample, selective, attitude, numerical [ ]
d. Sample, large scale, representative, descriptive [ ]
4. Which group best summarizes the advantages of quantitative data?
a.
Objective, valid, numerical, attitudinal [ ]
b. Reliable, valid, theoretical, attitudinal [ ]
c.
Objective, valid, theoretical, reliable [ ]
d. Reliable, attitudinal, subjective, descriptive [ ]
5. The facts below are relevant to a particular quantitative method. Which is it?
i.
Saves time and money
ii. Usually free of researcher bias
i i i . Can challenge ideas of contemporary life
iv. Depends on organizations
a.
Questionnaires [ ]
b.
Surveys [ ]
c.
Pilot studies [ ]
d. Official Statistics [ ]
You should be able to resume reading once your score on the self-test was satisfactory.
Sociological Research | 55
Structured Interviews
Structured interviews are similar to questionnaires, since respondents are required to answer the
same questions in the same order. Most items require the person interviewed to select one
from a number of options (i.e., fixed choice).
Structured interviews have been used extensively by the Ansa-McAl Psychological Research Centre
at the St Augustine Campus of the University of the West Indies. In particular, they
are advantageous for investigating current issues such as crime and voting behaviour intentions.
Advantages of Structured Interviews
1.
Practical – they save researchers time and money. For instance, the structured nature of the
questions and the fixed number of choices per question makes tabulation of the results a fast
process since researchers do not have to decipher lengthy or vague responses.
2. Theoretical – because the data are usually in numerical form, theories can be formulated.
3. The sample is geographically dispersed; hence, the research study may cover a wide
cross section of the population, allowing generalizations about human behaviour to be
made.
4. Reliable – the research can be easily and quickly repeated so that the chances of
getting similar results are enhanced. This is usually the case with opinion pollsters. When
combined with quota sampling techniques, this technique ensures that a representative
sample is more easily attained.
5.
Valid – there is opportunity for clarification of misconceptions on the part of the interviewer
and interviewee. In addition, the likelihood of the observer effect is minimized when the
interview is conducted via telephone (i.e., it does not involve face-to-face interaction).
Disadvantages of Structured Interviews
1.
Partial validity – this may occur because respondents may have little opportunity to
elaborate their views, especially when they may not fully agree to any of the g i ve n
options.
2. In addition, qualitative researchers may criticize structured interviews on the same
grounds as questionnaires, because it is the researcher who determines what questions are
important (i.e., there is a lack of complete objectivity).
56 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Readings
Mike O’Donnell, A New Introduction to Sociology, 3rd edition (London: Thomas Nelson
and Sons, 1992), 25–36, chapter 2.
A. Barnard and T. Burgess, Sociology Explained (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press,
1996), 33–40, chapter 1.
Activity 2.5
Read the following passage then answer all of the questions that follow.
The use of quantitative methods requires that sociologists exercise caution in the
collection of data. Mistakes by the researcher or the respondents can lead to the collection of
inaccurate information.
i.
What is another term for inaccurate data?
ii. State three mistakes the researcher can make in the collection of quantitative data.
iii. Explain two ways in which respondents may mar the accuracy of data.
iv. Explain why official statistics may be less accurate than data obtained from social surveys.
Qualitative research methods will now be discussed.
Qualitative Research Methods
Qualitative research methods include the following primary or secondary forms:
a. Unstructured interviews (primary)
b . Participant observation (primary)
c.
Non-direct/non-participant observation (primary)
d. Case studies (secondary)
e.
Documents (secondary)
Sociological Research | 57
Qualitative research collects in-depth subjective data such as information about people’s emotions,
feelings and values and focuses upon obtaining the reasons behind human behaviour.
The researcher usually interacts directly with the respondents (that is, face-to-face) or by
actually joining in their everyday activities. We will now examine each method by stating its
main advantages and disadvantages.
Advantages of Qualitative Data
•
Practical (appropriate) for studying sensitive issues such as rape, domestic violence
and drug addiction.
The essence of some phenomena, such as the aforementioned, may not be adequately captured
via the structured nature of quantitative techniques. This is because further clarification and
explanation of the human emotions and experiences can be better obtained through the loose
framework and open-ended nature of qualitative inquiry.
•
Can challenge already existing theories of behaviour because of the use of small
samples that provide an in-depth understanding of personal life.
•
Data are high in validity because researchers get first-hand accounts of events. People
are usually studied in their natural environment.
Disadvantages of Qualitative Data
Low in reliability because they take a long time to be collected.
May raise ethical concerns since researchers may have to witness crime or immoral acts in
order to obtain data for their study. Moreover, ethical concerns are also raised in cases where
subjects are unaware that their actions are being observed and recorded. This is known as covert
observation and will be elaborated upon further along in the chapter.
Unstructured Interviews
The unstructured interview is a face-to-face interaction process in which a researcher tries to
get as much useful information as possible from a respondent or a number of respondents.
It can take the form of a one-session interview or a number of sessions that seek to explore the
topic further.
It is important that the researcher should gain the respondents’ trust. Factors such as the social
class, sex or ethnicity of the interviewer can influence the level of trust. W. Labov (1973) reported
58 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
that black children did not trust white interviewers as much as they did black interviewers.
Feminists insist that women are best suited to interview other women, especially in cases of rape,
assault or intimidation (by male perpetrators). It can be understood therefore, that ethical
considerations are of paramount importance to qualitative studies.
Interviewers can employ either the directive or non-directive approach. H. Becker (1971) admitted
to the use of persuasive tactics (the directive approach) to get teachers to acknowledge their more
positive perception of middle-class pupils. Those who are non-directive interviewers refrain
from offering their personal opinions and encourage power sharing.
Advantages of Unstructured Interviews
1. The v alidity of data is enhanced by the following:
a.
The researcher can detect lies or inconsistencies in the interviewees’ accounts by
observing facial reactions or body language.
b.
Due to the interaction between interviewer and respondent, misunderstandings can
be clarified.
c.
The researcher can understand the world from the point of view of the interviewee.
J. Young (1971) in a study of hippie marijuana users in Notting Hill, England,
found that they began to see themselves in terms of the police’s perception of
them – as ‘worthless’ and ‘lazy’. Patricia Mohammed (1988) found, in her interview
of two East Indian women in Trinidad, that she could understand their feelings about
the traditional female role as housewife and mother.
d. The researcher can gain information that he never thought about asking. Such was
the case of Elizabeth Bott (1971) who found that conjugal relationships are affected
by spouses’ social networks. The more involved a spouse is in a social network,
the less dependent he/she is on the other partner.
2. The use of unstructured interviews may be the most practical research technique for
exploring specific issues. A questionnaire completed by a rape victim may provide limited
amounts of data but an unstructured interview can help the interviewer understand
the victim’s experiences.
3. Because small samples are used, the unstructured interview can be useful for challenging
or refuting already existing theories. For example, Ann Oakley interviewed her respondents
in order to dispute Young and Willmott’s claim that by the 1970s the working-class
family had become symmetrical, that is, there was more sharing of housework, child care
and decision-making (Young and Willmott 1969).
Sociological Research | 59
4. The interviewer loses reliability, especially if a lot of time has elapsed between successive
interviews of the same respondents.
Despite the advantages that unstructured interviews provide according to mainly interactionist
and feminist researchers, caution must be exercised to avoid the disadvantages.
Disadvantages of Unstructured Interviews
1. The validity of the data can be reduced (that is, made invalid) by a number of factors.
These are explained below:
i.
The ‘observer effect’ – this occurs when the presence of the interviewer influences or
inhibits the interviewees. They may provide responses that they believe the researchers
want to hear. Rice reported that researchers often induce specific responses when
they express their views to respondents.
ii. A related case involves deliberate lies on the interviewees’ part. Laurie Taylor (1984)
experienced being lied to by former members of the London underworld who wanted
to see how gullible he was.
2. Interviews may also be time-consuming, especially if the researcher has not yet gained
the trust of respondents.
3. The large quantity of qualitative data collected by interviews can pose problems in
analysis.
4. Having to listen to long transcripts of talk can also prove both tedious and timeconsuming.
5. Sometimes interviews can produce limited information on a particular topic. This happens
in times of unwillingness or open hostility on the part of the respondent. This point can
be directly related to the issue of trust and acceptance.
6. Interviews of respondents in geographically dispersed areas can prove to be quite expensive
and time consuming.
However, in spite of these drawbacks, the unstructured interview remains one of the more popular
research techniques, since it can be used in a wide range of social situations. Relations within
schools, mental asylums, prisons, the workplace and home have all been studied via the use
of unstructured interviews.
60 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Observational Studies
Figure 2.1: Role of the Observer
I. Role of the Observer
Partial
observation
Full
participant
observation
Onlooker:
observation as
outsider
Source: adapted from Patton (1986)
Figure 2.2: Portrayal of Role of Observer to Others
II. Portrayal of Role to Others
Overt observations:
subjects know that
observations are
being made and who
the observer is
Observer role is
known by some, but
not others
Covert observation:
Subjects do not know
that observations are
being made or that there
is an observer
Source: adapted from Patton (1986)
Figure 2.1 above shows the three main types of observational studies: Full Participant, Partial
Observation and Non-Participant Observation. In Figure 2.2 the types of participant observation
are shown.
Participant Observation
Participant observation is widely regarded as a scientific tool because the researcher studies
people in their natural environment by joining their daily activities. However, he/she tries to
be as objective (non- j u d g m e n t a l , not overly involved) as possible, in order to capture the
reality of the subjects.
Sociological Research | 61
The researcher can opt to be overt, by letting the group members know that they are being
studied, or can choose to keep his/her identity secret (covert). Ken Pryce (1976) employed both
overt and covert forms in a study of West Indians in St Paul’s, Bristol (England).
As in unstructured interviews, the researcher must gain the group’s trust at the start. Subjects
must not be made to feel uncomfortable. In the case of deviant gangs or delinquent groups, it is
crucial that the participant observer should fit into the group without arousing suspicion. ‘James
Patrick’(1973) faced a difficult situation when studying a violent gang in Glasgow, Scotland. He
was sickened by its violence and fled when he could no longer bear it.
The Advantages of Participant Observation
1. The validity of data is enhanced by the fact that
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
2. i.
the researcher witnesses the group first hand, which makes it difficult for people
to provide false information repeatedly over an extended period of time;
the ‘observer effect’ is minimized if the researcher does not reveal his/her identity
to the subjects (for example, in covert studies);
the researcher can ask questions to clarify events and actions of the group (for
example, in overt studies);
the researcher can understand the group’s subjective point of view by studying them
in their natural environment.
The information is useful for formulating theories about human behaviour. By
studying a group over a protracted period of time, the researcher understands
the effect of social change. Thus, a change in leadership over time can lead to
new group dynamics in a deviant group of young people.
ii.
Data from participant observation can be used to challenge already existing theories.
3. Participant observation may be the most practical method for studying deviant or secret
groups and activities such as gangs and homosexuality. The covert form allows the researcher
the opportunity to gain information that would not be obtained from open methods like
unstructured interviews and questionnaires.
The Disadvantages of Participant Observation
1. The validity of data may be compromised in the following situations:
i.
The covert observer may overlook information when making secret recordings
(that is, in the field notes).
62 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
ii. The covert observer may provide his/her o wn interpr etations of the gr oup’s
behaviour because asking for clarification may re veal the r esearcher’s identity.
iii. O vert observation is likely to produce the ‘observer effect’, since the participants
may change their behaviour once under the scrutiny of the observer.
2. The data may lack reliability because
i.
the study takes a long time to be completed, thus social changes such as further
education or maturation may change the social outlook of the group, making
it impossible to study the group again; and/or
ii. ther e is no standar diz ed way to observe people’s behaviour. Sociologists will
use their own observational techniques. Cicourel (1968) admitted this in studying
delinquency in the US.
3.
Participant observation is costly and time-consuming. The researcher takes very long
to collect valid data and this may prove too expensive for the researcher, especially if
sponsorship is inadequate. For example, anthropologists inter ested in studying tribes in
less - developed societies for long periods may need financial assistance during the research,
for basic items such as food, clothing, and toiletries.
At this stage you should realize that with the use of covert or overt research forms of participant
observation, what is gained in validity is lost in terms of reliability.
Non-Direct Observation
This involves the researcher being completely detached from the group under observation. It is
effective in experimental situations where people are observed under laboratory-like conditions.
A good example of this is the observation of Hawthorne workers’ attitude to changes in their physical
environment. A similar situation involves examining people’s behaviour from the outside, under
laboratory conditions. Effects research of the 1930s reported that people exposed to violent television
are more likely to act violently if provoked. The experiments isolated two groups of people for
a week; one group watched violent programmes, the other did not.
The Advantage of Non-Direct Observation
The data are more objective than data obtained from participant observation, because the
researcher’s presence does not influence the group’s behaviour.
Sociological Research | 63
The Disadvantages of Non-Direct Observation
1. The validity of the data is compromised by the fact that the researcher draws conclusions
about the behaviour of people with whom he/she did not interact (that is, findings
may result from personal interpretation or guesswork). As such, data are dependent upon
the researcher’s subjective interpretation and objectivity is undermined.
2. Putting people under laboratory conditions creates artificiality (that is, people are
aware that their behaviour is to be observed and thus may respond unnaturally). The
‘Hawthorne effect’ is the most applicable way to describe this phenomenon.
Case Studies
Case studies are unique because they do not require the use of any specific data-gathering tool or
tools. The researcher turns to this method when he/she wants to gain an in-depth insight into
a typical example of specific phenomena. Such studies are similar in nature to social surveys in
one way: they cannot be actually administered to respondents. Some other method(s) must
be used to gather the data for the case studies to be effected.
Ken Pryce (1976) in his study of St Paul’s, Bristol, employed this method to study West Indian
subcultures. He used both covert and overt participant observation (together with unstructured
interviews) in order to collect the data. Undoubtedly, one of the most famous case studies is that
done by Paul Willis (1977) who also made use of participant observation and unstructured
interviews. He focused on a group of 12 working-class male students in a single school in England.
The study demonstrated that schools are not always successful in transmitting middle-class
values, as the ‘lads’ displayed resistance to academics by deliberately disrupting classes.
The Advantages of Case Studies
1. The data may be valid because a number of qualitative methods are used. These provide
an in-depth understanding of the phenomenon being studied.
2. They are useful for challenging theories because of the use of non-representative samples.
3. In-depth information is gained since focus is placed upon a single phenomenon.
The Disadvantages of Case Studies
1. They are low in reliability, since they are time-consuming.
2. They cannot be used for generalizing about human behaviour because one may not know
the extent to which one example may demonstrate the typical characteristics of a
particular social phenomenon.
64 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Documents
Documents contain information, usually in qualitative form. There are two main types of
documents: personal and historical. Personal documents include letters, diaries, biographies and
autobiographies. However, historical documents usually contain information written by people
who lived during a particular era, for example, Columbus’s log, or accounts by plantation
bookkeepers or owners.
Documents, unlike unstructured interviews and observation, are secondary data sources.
The data already exist, and hence save time for the sociologist.
The Advantages of Documents
1. Documents save the researcher time and money.
2. They provide insights into aspects of life to which sociologists would otherwise have
no access. For example, diaries can provide information about the individual’s private
life that he/she would not easily disclose (we can see the world through the eyes of the
producer).
3. Documents may be the most practical method of studying past events. For example,
we will rely on documents to help us understand the social and economic history of
the Caribbean. In this way, documents can provide a solid framework for background
information concerning a particular area under study.
4. The information from documents can be used to measure the extent of social change.
For example, planters’ log entries can help us understand how levels of social justice have
increased since slavery.
The Disadvantages of Documents
The main disadvantages of documents are the invalidity and unreliability of the data.
1. The data may be invalid because of producer bias. People may deliberately falsify
information, especially if they know that their writing will attract an audience. People can
forge documentary evidence.
2. Information from old documents may be difficult to read, and some documents may be
damaged or affected by missing pages. This reduces the usefulness of the document
for drawing conclusions.
3. Some types of documents may be extremely difficult to access (that is, they may be lost,
misplaced or stolen).
Sociological Research | 65
4. The researcher may have to supplement documentary evidence with information from
other sources, since the evidence may be dated or limited in scope.
Readings
Andy Barnard and Terry Burgess, Sociology Explained (Cambridge: Cambridge University
Press, 1996), 33–40, Chapter 1.
Paul Taylor et al., Sociology in Focus (Bath: The Bath Press, 2002).
Activity 2.6
Read the following passage then answer the questions that follow.
Interpretivists often resort to the use of subjective data-collection techniques. They believe
that these offer them a rich source of data about human behaviour. With this information, they
can understand the ways in which people make sense of their everyday experiences.
1. Explain the phrase ‘subjective data-collection techniques’.
2. State two advantages of subjective data-collection techniques mentioned in the passage.
3. Explain why it is important for subjective researchers to gain the trust of their subjects.
4. State four types of subjective research methods.
5. Explain why subjective research methods are well suited to challenging theories of social
life.
6. Describe the main differences between documents and other subjective research methods.
Activity 2.7
Self-Test 2
Instructions
•
Use a pencil to put a tick in the box following the selected option.
•
Do not consult your notes or any other readings.
•
Re-read the section if you get two or more incorrect answers.
66 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
1. Which of the following are classified as documents?
i. Letters
ii. Diaries
iii. Autobiographies
a.
i, ii and iii
[ ]
b.
i, iii and iv
[ ]
c.
ii, iii and iv
[ ]
d. i, ii, iii and iv
[ ]
iv. Biographies
2. Which is not a general advantage of qualitative research?
a.
It provides an in-depth understanding of the phenomenon. [ ] b.
It can be used to test or challenge theories developed from quantitative research. [ ]
c.
It produces data that are reliable because the process is time-consuming. [ ]
d. It leads to an understanding of the subjective view of respondents. [ ]
3. Which research method do the statements below refer to?
a.
The researcher studies people in their natural environment.
b.
The researcher can ask questions on some occasions.
c.
The subjects only make changes in their behaviour initially.
a. Documents
[]
b. Unstructured interviews
[]
c. Overt participant observation
[]
d. Covert participant observation
[]
4. The Participant Observation research method is recommended by which of the following?
a. Structural functionalists
[]
b. Conflict theorists
[]
c. Interactionists
[]
d. Marxists
[]
Sociological Research | 67
5. How is participant observation similar to unstructured interviews?
a. The trust of respondents is important for the validity of the data.
[]
b. People are always studied in their own environment.
[]
c. They can only study one person at a time.
[]
d. They are equally unreliable.
[]
Activity 2.8
Self-Test 3
Instructions
•
Use a pencil to put a tick in the box following the selected option.
•
Do not consult your notes or any other readings.
•
Re-read the chapter if you get two or more incorrect responses.
1. How is quantitative research advantageous to qualitative research?
a. The data are more valid.
[]
b. The data are more reliable.
[]
c. The researcher is detached from the subjects.
[]
d. The information is more subjective.
[]
2. Which pair of research methods contains data produced by people other than sociologists?
a. Unstructured interviews and official statistics
[]
b. Unstructured interviews and social surveys
[]
c. Documents and official statistics
[]
d. Documents and social surveys
[]
68 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
3. The statements below should be associated with
i.
Quantitative data
ii. Multiple correlation
iii. Laws of human behaviour
a.
Positivism and Durkheim
[]
b.
Positivism and Weber
[]
c.
Interpretivism and Weber []
d. Interpretivism and Durkheim
[]
4. Qualitative data are more useful than quantitative data because there is
a.
greater validity since respondents cannot lie.
[]
b. greater reliability, since people get to give their point of view.
[]
c.
[]
more practicality, because the information is not very detailed.
d. greater validity, since the researcher and respondent interact a great deal.
[]
5. Which is the best inference we can make about quantitative and qualitative research?
a.
Sociologists will never combine them because their disadvantages will reduce the
validity of data. [ ]
b. Their use will depend on the purpose of research and the intentions of the
researcher. [ ]
c.
It is always best to combine both to enhance the reliability of data. [ ]
d. Sociologists will use alternative methods in the future, because both types of
research have their limitations. [ ]
6. Match the following research methods with the appropriate research design
Research Methods
Social survey
Research Design
Qualitative Research
Unstructured interviews
Official statistics
Participant observation
Structured questionnaires
Quantitative Research
Qualitative Research
Quantitative Research
Quantitative Research
Sociological Research | 69
Activity 2.9
Instructions
•
Write a plan for any one of the essays from each section below.
•
Use the plan to write an essay of 500–600 words.
•
Ask your teacher to mark the essay as follows:
Knowledge and Understanding (8 marks)
Interpretation and Application (10 marks) and
Analysis and Evaluation (7 marks)
Section A
1. Can questionnaires really capture the truth about people’s behaviour? Illustrate, using
examples from research. (25 marks)
2. ‘Social surveys are popular because the information is reliable.’ Explain and assess this
statement. (25 marks)
3. Why and how should Caribbean sociologists use official statistics in their research?
(25 marks)
Section B
1. Assess the usefulness of unstructured interviews as a data-gathering tool in sociology.
(25 marks)
2. a. ‘Participant observation of social groups provides the best opportunity for sociologists
to really understand their behaviour.’ Explain and critically assess this statement.
(25 marks)
OR
b.
Compare and contrast overt participant observation with covert participant
observation. (25 marks)
3. Examine the benefits and limitations of documents to sociological research. (25 marks)
At this point you should be able to compare quantitative and qualitative research
methods. Since they both help us understand human behaviour, we should see them as
complementary (mutually inclusive) instead of diametrically opposed (mutually exclusive).
70 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Middle Range Studies
These can collect both quantitative and qualitative data even though they may be used to collect
more of one than of the other.
Longitudinal or Panel Studies
Longitudinal studies involve the study of a large sample of people over a long period of time.
It is usually a quantitative research process but some researchers do employ qualitative methods.
Longitudinal studies are not very popular in the Caribbean. One possible reason may be
the high cost involved. Another may be the small size of some Caribbean populations, making
it difficult for researchers to select a large sample of individuals with the same characteristics. In
Nevis or Anguilla (with a population of less than 15,000), sociologists will be hard-pressed
to select a sample of say, 3,000 or 4,000 for follow-up study.
The Advantages of Longitudinal Studies
1. The validity of the data is enhanced, because conclusions are drawn from data collected
from multiple methods.
2. The large sample may enhance the validity of data.
3. Researchers can understand how social changes – for example, the gaining of higher
education may impact on an individual’s outlook on life. J.W.B. Douglas (1964) and his
associates found that middle-class pupils are socialized to place greater value on education
from infancy right up to secondary school. Their homes place much more emphasis on
educational success than those of their working-class counterparts. (Of course this is a
sweeping generalization). As such, the researcher is able to trace, identify and account for
changes over an extensive period of time.
The Disadvantages of Longitudinal Studies
1. The data are usually low in reliability, due to the fact that the study takes a long time
to complete. The J.W.B. Douglas et al. study took five years. Beverly Skeggs (1997)
took 12 years to study female sexuality.
2. The original sample size is difficult to attain the second time, because people may die,
migrate or refuse to participate. In this case, attrition makes it more difficult to compare
the information obtained from the initial and follow-up studies. Douglas et al. had lost
almost 500 of their original sample between 1957 and 1962.
3. The use of questionnaires and unstructured interviews can pose problems in
drawing conclusions. Standardized and subjective data may measure different issues.
Sociological Research | 71
Cross-Sectional Studies
The main difference between cross-sectional and longitudinal studies is that cross-sectional
studies take place at a single point in time, whereas longitudinal studies involve a series of
measurements taken at different points in time. Cross-sectional studies usually employ primary
research methods. Researchers may study a cross section of the population when undertaking
a descriptive or attitude survey.
However, in some cases, cross-sectional studies can involve the collection of data from secondary
sources. In the case of cross-cultural studies, secondary data are used. A good example of this
is G.P. Murdock’s cross-cultural study of family life, leading him to conclude that the nuclear
family is a universal social institution.
The Advantages of Cross-Sectional Studies
1. The data are valid because they come from people in different geographical regions
(either within or between countries). For example, Durkheim’s survey considered 11
different European nations and drew conclusions about the nature and types of suicide in
Europe (Durkheim, 1970).
2. The researcher can compare and contrast social life between places differentiated by
factors such as religion, culture and social class.
3. The researcher can make generalizations about the cause of human behaviour because of
the large sample size.
The Disadvantages of Cross-Sectional Studies
1. The act of generalizing the findings may distort social reality. For example, the findings
may relate more to some sections of the sample than others especially if the sample
was inappropriately drawn. This will be explained later, when the multistage sample is
discussed.
2. The information collected will be subject to the same disadvantages as questionnaires,
since researchers often opt for more fixed-choice questions when undertaking a large
study.
3. The findings of secondary surveys can be distorted by cultural biases. For example,
ethnocentrism can result from interpreting the behaviour of people in pre-industrial and
less developed societies.
72 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Longitudinal and cross-sectional studies are described as middle range because they can
collect both quantitative and qualitative data, despite the fact that most involve the collection
of statistical information. B. Skeggs and G.P. Murdock are notable exceptions, however.
Readings
M. Haralambos and M. Holborn, Sociology: Themes and Perspectives, 7th edition (London:
Harper Collins, 2008).
Mike O’Donnell, A New Introduction to Sociolog y, 3rd edition (London: Thomas Nelson
and Sons, 1992).
Activity 2.10
Sociologists sometimes opt for studies that take a long time to complete, because it enables them
to understand how people’s lives are shaped by a variety of economic, social and political factors.
1. Name one economic factor that has changed the outlook of young people in your society
over the last five years.
2. Differentiate between longitudinal studies and cross-sectional studies.
3. State two similarities between a cross-sectional study and a census.
4. Identify and explain two reasons why people in your country may hesitate to
participate in a longitudinal study.
Activity 2.11
Self-Test 4
Instructions
•
Use a pencil to put a tick in the box following the selected option.
•
Do not consult your notes or any other readings.
•
Re-read the section if you get two or more incorrect answers.
Sociological Research | 73
1. Which is true of longitudinal studies?
a.
They collect mainly quantitative data.
[]
b.
They collect mainly qualitative data.
[]
c.
They are low in reliability.
[]
[]
d. They are low in validity.
2. Which statements about cross-sectional studies are true?
i.
They are useful for comparative purposes.
ii. They use only secondary data sources.
iii. They are conducted on small numbers of people.
iv. They can collect data about the culture of different groups.
a.
i and ii
[]
b.
ii and iii
[]
c.
i and iv
[]
d. i, ii and iv
[]
3. Which groups of factors can reduce the size of an original sample for a panel study?
a.
Death, refusal, inaccessibility
b.
Death, subjectivity, attrition
c.
Attrition, socialization, geographical mobility
d. Attrition, maturation, social mobility
[]
[]
[]
[]
4. Which pair of research studies is best classified as ‘middle range’?
a.
Longitudinal and quantitative
[]
b. Longitudinal and cross-sectional
[]
c.
[]
[]
Cross-sectional and qualitative
d. Censuses and cross-cultural
74 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
5. Which is not an advantage of ‘middle range’ studies?
a.
They allow for generalizations to be made.
[]
b.
They usually use large samples.
[]
c.
They usually produce very reliable data.
[]
[]
d. They are more practical than participant observation.
Sampling
The study of sampling is very important, because in many instances sociologists select samples
in order to obtain information for their research. You should become familiar with the terms
used in sampling: Sampling Unit, Sample, Sampling Frame and Population.
a.
Sampling Unit – each individual selected for the sample.
b. Sample – a group of people selected from the population. The sample refers to a
subset of the entire population. The units selected are deemed to be representative
of the population from which they are drawn (that is, they have the same characteristics
as those of the population, or are selected in proportion to their numbers in the
population). Sampling lowers the cost attached to research and make the data collection
process much faster.
c.
Sampling Frame – a list of persons drawn from the population. It comprises those
sampling units possessing the social characteristics relevant to the research, for example,
social class background, religious affiliation, educational attainment. The sampling
frame thus selects only those individuals who are considered important for the study
because they may have relevant information. A good case in point arises in victim-studies.
Only victims of crime will be selected from the population if the researcher wants to
determine their personal experiences. On many occasions there may be no need to consider
the sampling frame. This occurs when general information is being sought so that almost
anyone in the population may have answers to researchers’ questions.
d. Population – all the individuals who make up a particular society, group or organization
with a wide range of social characteristics such as sex, religion, age, and social class.
Sociological Research | 75
Simulated Example
Purpose of Study: To determine the association between social class and the impact of crime
Population:
Sampling Frame: 1 million
50,000 citizens who are victims of crime
1,000 victims of crime of upper-, middle-, and working-class
Sample:
status (50:100:850)
Sample Unit:
one victim of crime
Samples are divided into two broad groups: probability and non-probability. Probability samples
provide the chance for almost any sampling unit to be selected. They can be randomly drawn;
in this case there is no predetermined or patterned system independently. However, in nonprobability samples the researcher may deliberately select some individuals since it is known that
they possess the characteristics relevant to the research. In this case, sampling units do not have
an equal chance of being selected.
Probability Sample
The main types of probability samples are:
1 . Simple Random Sampling
2 . Systematic Random Sampling
3 . Stratified Random Sampling
4. Multistage Sampling
Simple random is the most basic way of selecting a sample. The researcher chooses the sample
from the population in a manner similar to selecting numbers from a hat. The advantages
are that a large sample can be quickly drawn and every unit has the same chance of selection.
However, the chance of drawing an unrepresentative sample increases, as there is no control over
the proportions of units in the population. For instance, since each person has an equal chance
of selection, then certain characteristics – for example sex, race, or socio-economic status – of
the population may be overrepresented or underrepresented as the case may be.
Systematic random samples are particularly useful in house-to-house surveys. First, the units are
ordered or arranged in some logical order (such as first to last, alphabetically or chronologically).
The research then finds the sampling interval k. This is the total population divided by
76 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
the desired sample size. Then, a number between 1 and k is randomly selected. Finally, the
researcher selects every kth house/person is a particular locality. Once this is completed the sample
is selected by picking the appropriate units. For example if the kth/ = every 25th household,
then every 25th, 50th, 75th, 100th, 125th, 150th etc. would be chosen.
Systematic sampling may reduce the amount of randomness. This means that every member
of the population or sampling frame will not have an equal chance of selection. Despite this
drawback, systematic sampling is practical because it saves time when samples are to be drawn
from large geographical areas. Compared to simple random, systematic random can yield
slightly more representative samples because of the ordering of the units.
With stratified random sampling, the sampling frame is divided into groups before a proportionate
number of units is selected from each group. A researcher interested in studying class and
gender will divide the population into, say, middle-class male, middle-class female, working-class
male and working-class female. This sample is more representative than the simple random but
it reduces the chance of some individuals being selected.
Multistage sampling is more complex than the first three types. It involves the division of
the population into groups considered to have the features typical of the society. For instance,
in an opinion poll on voting intentions, the researcher will select only those constituencies
in which all the major political parties obtained substantial support.
The following illustrates a simple example of multistage sampling in Trinidad and Tobago.
No. of constituencies = 41
Marginal constituencies = Tunapuna, St Joseph, San Juan/Barataria, Point-a-Pierre (for example)
•
The sociologist will select the marginal constituencies because they comprise people
likely to support both political parties almost equally.
•
From these he/she will then randomly select a representative sample proportionate to
their numbers in the population.
Non-Probability Samples
The main non-probability samples are
i.
Quota
ii. Snowballing
iii. Non-Representative
Sociological Research | 77
Quota samples are biased, primarily because the researcher determines the relevant characteristics
of the people being studied. For example, the researcher may require individuals who are within
a particular age grouping and a specific socioeconomic standing. Since certain criteria are to be
met, each member of the population does not have an equal chance of selection. Additionally,
the researcher knows the proportion of each group in the population.
Quota samples are advantageous because they save researchers much time. No sampling frame
is necessary. One easy way for quota samples to be selected is to have an interviewer stand at a
busy street corner and ask passers-by questions to ascertain whether or not they fit the relevant
criteria. Once they do, the questions can be asked (either through an interview or questionnaire).
These samples are especially useful if the researcher wishes to test a particular theory. An example
is illustrated below.
Research objective: To find out whether or not married women aged 25–40 are victims of domestic
violence.
1. The sample: 20 married women aged 25–40
2. Procedure: Have a trained interviewer stand at the corner of Frederick and Queen Streets,
Port of Spain to find out from women passing by:
i.
If they are married
ii. If they are between 25 and 40 years
iii. If they are willing to answer the questions for the research.
The main drawback with quota samples is their lack of randomness. In other words, some members
of the population have no chance of selection because they do not have the characteristics deemed
important for the research.
Snowballing is not frequently used by Caribbean sociologists. This could be attributed to
the small population size in many territories. With this technique, the researcher builds up a
sample by asking one respondent to name other potential respondents because they have the
relevant characteristics. In this case there may be no sampling frame. This type of sample is
built incrementally and relies on personal contacts and referrals.
The advantages of snowballing are that the researcher may gain access to information that
would not otherwise be obtained and it saves the trouble of selecting a sample from a sampling
frame. This method is particularly useful for getting in touch with members of a population
that may not easily be accessible, for example drug traffickers, since there may be no sampling
frame from which respondents can be drawn. However, these samples are likely to be small
and unrepresentative, and therefore sociologists could hardly generalize from such findings.
78 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Laurie Taylor used this method to study crime in the London underworld. First he located
John McVicar, a known former criminal and interviewed him. Following this, he asked him to
suggest the name of another former member of the underworld, and so on.
Non-representative sampling, like snowballing, is not very popular in the Caribbean. For this
sample, the researcher looks for an atypical example of a phenomenon and studies it in detail
mainly through qualitative methods. In other words, non-representative samples are useful
in case studies. For example, in Trinidad and Tobago, the Matelot Community School may
be a non-representative or an atypical example of schooling, because it contains a number of
educational levels simultaneously under the control of one principal. The Hedonism III
institution may be suitable for a case study because it may be the only institution that allows
organized nudity in Jamaica, for example, people can get married without clothes.
Activity 2.12
Self-Test 5
Instructions
•
Use a pencil to put a tick in the box following selection option.
•
Do not consult your notes.
•
Re-read the section if you get two or more incorrect responses.
1. Which is the best example of snowballing?
a.
Meeting people at a public place
[ ]
b.
Interviewing a number of people with the same characteristics
[ ]
c.
Studying an atypical example of a social phenomenon
[ ]
d. Building up a sample incrementally through personal contact
[ ]
2. Which of the following statements is correct?
a.
Surveys use probability sampling[ ]
b.
Unstructured interviews use probability sampling
[ ]
c.
Participant observation uses probability sampling
[ ]
d. Structured interviews use non-probability sampling
[ ]
Sociological Research | 79
3. For which of these samples will a researcher divide the sampling frame into groups in
accordance with their relative proportion in the population?
a.
Quota[ ]
b. Non-representative[ ]
c.
Stratified random[ ]
d. Simple random[ ]
4. A researcher is able to generalize from the findings of a study if which one of the
following sampling techniques is used?
a.
Stratified random[ ]
b.
Quota[ ]
c.
Snowball[ ]
d. Non-representative[ ]
5. A researcher wants to conduct an opinion poll on people’s views of the Caribbean
Single Market and Economy (CSME). Which is the correct order for selecting the sample?
i.
Selecting countries known for supporting other regional initiatives
ii. Mailing questionnaires to respondents
iii. Selecting a proportionate number of respondents in each country
a.
i, iii, ii
[ ] b.
i, ii, iii
[ ]
c.
iii, ii, i
[ ] d.
ii, i, iii
[ ]
Activity 2.13
1. Most sociologists make use of some kind of sampling technique in their research. The
aim may be to select a representative sample, or one that the researchers know beforehand
is biased.
a.
What do you understand by the term ‘representative sample’?
b.
List two factors that can contribute to a sample becoming biased.
80 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
c.
Name three research methods that may require researchers to use biased samples.
d. Distinguish between probability and non-probability samples (giving examples of
each).
2. Attempt the three essay- type questions below: (Follow the instructions outlined earlier).
You may ask your teacher for feedback.
a.
Why do sociologists select samples in their research projects?
b.
Discuss the claim that the sample selection process is critical to sociological
research.
c.
Evaluate the usefulness of non-probability samples in Caribbean research.
Ethical Issues in Research
Ethical issues are important in all cases involving the treatment of human subjects. In psychological
research, medical research and in sociological research, for example, the respondents must either
directly or indirectly benefit from the process. However, their lives should not be endangered
nor should their privacy be invaded in a way that could lead to any negative repercussions.
While there are many ethical issues, the following ones seem to be worthy of mention for our
purposes:
a.
The safety of the researcher and participant
b. Informed consent
c.
Anonymity (privacy rights and confidentiality)
d. Adversity
e.
Right to service.
The Safety of the Researcher and Participant
This deals with the physical and emotional safety of both the researcher and the subject. For
instance, some sociologists have been accused of unethical behaviour in the course of their
research. Ken Pryce (1976) in his study of West Indians in St Paul’s, Bristol, was accused of having
a good time with the sample of subjects whom he studied using overt participant observation.
Sometimes researchers can upset subjects by asking them to recall painful events in their lives or
may put pressure on them to act immorally. Some participant observers of deviant acts have
Sociological Research | 81
been known to condone them in the interest of discovering the subjects’ meanings and motives.
Howard Parker (1974) may have unintentionally caused ‘deviancy amplification’ by conversing
with a delinquent gang of car-radio thieves so that he could ‘see the world through their eyes’.
Informed Consent and Privacy Rights
This suggests that the researchers proceed with the research only with the participants’ consent.
However, sometimes researchers may have to conceal their true identity in order to gain consent.
William Foote Whyte (1993) found that by telling his subjects he was a writer, he was able to
study a group of Italian-American men.
We can also consider the instances when participants are unaware that they are being studied. For
instance, researchers have been known to watch people as they go about their social life in grocery
stores, on street corners, in classrooms and public restrooms, without their consent.
In other instances, researchers may fail to adopt privacy protecting strategies such as requesting
anonymity in filling out a questionnaire or using voice modification systems in taped conversations.
This, according to the Belmont Report on ethics, is the first principle of ethics in research (National
Commission for the Protection of Human Subjects of Biomedical and Behavioural Research 1979).
Adversity
This pertains to the researcher’s manner of dealing with open hostility from respondents. As a
good professional and ethical practitioner, the researcher should avoid meeting hostility with
hostility. ‘James Patrick’ showed good sense by opting out of research of a violent Glasgow gang
when he became sickened by its activities and developed fear for his life.
The positivist Durkheim provided an alternative to this by suggesting that researchers avoid
personal contact with subjects. In this way, they pre-empt adversity and maintain a higher level
of objectivity (neutrality and value freedom) by keeping their personal opinions and biases out of
the research. He also advocated the avoidance of social experiments that also put the researcher in
a position of having to deal with open hostility at times. The events of the Hawthorne experiment
demonstrate Durkheim’s position. Because the subjects were aware of their ‘guinea pig’ status,
they acted contrary to expectations. Instead of varying their productivity to match physical work
conditions, researchers observed that workers worked harder because they knew that they were
part of the research process.
82 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Right to Service
According to Trochim (2002), this issue arises in experimental research particularly in medicine.
A case in point is the use of no-treatment groups. Such participants may feel disadvantaged
because they will not benefit from the treatment being tested. Kimmel (1988) suggests that the
issues of values and adherence to strict professional standards are also significant ethical concerns.
In most developed societies, research institutions have established Institutional Review Boards
(IRBs). These boards consist of individuals who review grant proposals with respect to ethical
implications, and decide whether additional action needs to be taken to assure participants’
safety and rights. IRBs also advise researchers about the legal implications of conducting research,
and may also ensure that justice is meted out to all participants. For example, young children,
prisoners and other vulnerable groups should never be coerced into taking part in any research
process.
It should be noted that some research methods pose more ethical concerns than others. With
questionnaires, researchers need to avoid asking ‘leading’ questions. These questions tempt
respondents to provide answers that researchers wish to hear or read. Researchers need also to
ensure that their samples are drawn scientifically, or in congruence with the aims and objectives
of the research.
However, qualitative research poses more concerns about researcher attitude and conduct. In
interviews, the deliberate attempt to influence respondents by intimidating eye contact or body
language is highly unethical. With participant observation, questions of bias are frequently
raised. Sometimes findings are contaminated by over-sympathetic judgements. This arises
because the researcher may become too involved in subjects’ lives, and lose his/her sense of
objectivity. The opposite can occur if the researcher negatively evaluates subjects’ culture
(i.e., ethnocentrism) and presents a view based on his cultural standards.
Readings
William M.K. Trochim, The Research Methods Knowledge Base, 2nd edition (Cincinnati,
OH: Atomic Dog Publishing, 2002).
Sociological Research | 83
Activity 2.14
Self-Test 6
Instructions
•
Use a pencil to put a tick in the box following the selected option.
•
Do not consult your notes.
•
Re-read the section if you get two or more incorrect responses.
1. Which statement about ethics and research is true?
a.
Quantitative methods pose more ethical issues.
[ ]
b.
Qualitative methods pose more ethical issues.
[ ]
c.
Neither quantitative nor qualitative methods pose ethical issues.
[ ]
d. Both quantitative and qualitative methods pose the same risks of unethical
behaviour among researchers.[ ]
2. In which pair of research methods would ethical issues most likely affect the process?
a.
Questionnaires and social surveys[ ]
b. Questionnaires and documents[ ]
Unstructured interviews and participant observation
[ ]
d. Unstructured interviews and documents
[ ]
c.
3. In which type of research may some subjects benefit more than others?
a.
A quasi-experimental research design with no control group
[ ]
b.
A structured interview with direct observation
[ ]
c.
Participant observation of a deviant gang
[ ]
d. A cross-sectional survey of a large country
[ ]
84 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
4. Which is the best example of ethical behaviour in the face of participant hostility?
a.
Walk away as quickly as possible from the hostile participant
[ ]
b.
Return the hostility to let the participant know how the researcher feels
[ ]
c.
Thank the participant for his contribution before leaving politely
[ ]
d. Coerce the participant to behave politely
[ ]
5. The Belmont Report says that one of the following is the first ethical issue.
Which is it?
a.
Dealing with adversity[ ]
b.
Right to service[ ]
c.
Informed consent[ ]
d. Right to privacy[ ]
Activity 2.15
1. Researchers need to exercise extreme caution when conducting research. This is especially
the case in medical and psychological laboratories where people may adopt ‘guinea pig
status’.
a.
What do you understand by the phrase ‘guinea pig status’?
b.
State two situations in conducting sociological research that may involve the
sociologist unethically prying into people’s lives.
c.
Explain why functionalists, like Durkheim, believe that people should not be
used as ‘laboratory rats’.
d. State and briefly describe two reasons why some researchers may deliberately
falsify their findings.
Sociological Research | 85
2. Distinguish between the pair of terms/concepts/phrases, giving examples of each.
a.
Quantitative and qualitative (research)
b. Positivism and interpretivism
c.
Questionnaires and interviews
d. Validity and reliability
e.
Non-direct observation and participant observation
3. a. Explain why a sociologist might opt for a quantitative method.
b. Explain why some researchers prefer qualitative methods.
c.
Explain the association (if any) between the sociologist’s research method and the
choice of a sample.
d. Describe two measures that sociologists can take to minimize the influence of ethical
problems in their research, thereby improving the quality of data they collect.
e.
Briefly explore the relationship between social surveys and longitudinal studies.
Activity 2.1 6
Do the essay-type questions below:
1. Evaluate the proposition that sociological research can and should be free of ethical
problems. (25 marks)
2. To what extent do the researchers’ values, beliefs, attitudes and opinions influence the
degree to which their research is ethically sound? (25 marks)
3. Outline and discuss the reasons why ethical issues may arise during the conduct of
sociological research. (25 marks)
Chapter 3
CULTURE AND IDENTITY
OBJECTIVES
On completion of this chapter, students should be able to:
•
discuss the elements and characteristics of culture;
•
discuss Caribbean cultural diversity and change.
CONTENT
Culture and the Social Order
a.
Caribbean socio-cultural diversity: continuity and change, conflict and assimilation, creole
and plural societies;
b.
Caribbean popular culture, for example, music, dance, art, theatre or folklore (historical
background and social context).
INTRODUCTION
Today, the world’s population consists of more than six billion people who have developed a
multiplicity of lifestyles in accordance with their particular physical and social environments.
When people speak about ‘the way of life’ of people with a distinctive lifestyle, whether they
live in Australia, Africa or the Caribbean, they are speaking about culture. Culture is a powerful
human tool for survival, but it is constantly changing and may easily be lost. Culture is a
large and integral part of our everyday lives. Culture accounts, in part, for the unprecedented
success of the human species in adapting to extreme environments. People could not survive
without culture. Culture provides the context (background) that people use to interact with one
another. It defines boundaries that have emerged to distinguish social groups from one another.
It defines what is considered important and unimportant to different people.
Culture and Identity | 87
Definition of Culture
The word culture has many different meanings to the average person. For some, it refers to
an appreciation of good literature, music, art, food, governments, buildings, and other manmade things. These, however, are merely the manifestations of culture; they are not culture in
themselves. In sociology, we define culture as the full range of learned human behaviour patterns.
It refers to everything that people create or develop. Values, norms, goals, and culture in general,
develop as people interact with one another over time. It includes beliefs, values, behaviours,
and physical objects that create a people’s way of life. In a sense, people create their culture,
and this culture, in turn, shapes their behaviour.
According to Tylor (1871), culture is ‘that complex whole which includes knowledge, belief,
art, law, morals, custom, and any other capabilities and habits acquired by man as a member
of society.’
Linton (1945) defines culture as ‘the way of life of [a society’s] members; the collection of
ideas and habits which they learn, share and transmit from generation to generation.’
In sum, culture encompasses the total way of life of individuals in a given society. It creates a
sense of belonging and identity among people who share the same beliefs and values. With this
in mind, it is important to note that culture is not static, that is, it is not constant over time and
space. Every society has its own ideas of what are acceptable or unacceptable forms of behaviour.
These ideas themselves change over time and vary among individuals. For instance, the members
of a particular gang may gauge stealing as an acceptable form of behaviour while members of a
prayer group will judge this action as deviant.
Material and Non-material Culture
In the eyes of the sociologist, there are two types or parts to culture: the material and the nonmaterial.
Material culture is the part that is concrete and tangible, the material things that a society
creates and uses for survival. These consist of the physical or technological aspects of
our daily lives, including food items, houses, clothing, paintings, books and other types of
stationery, musical instruments, household appliances, factories, cars, telephones, computers,
and raw materials. These objects do not have inherent meaning but rather they are significant
because of the meaning that is imbued by a given society. These include all the tools that are
used both in the developing and in the highly developed societies. Thus, material culture
consists of the physical objects that those members of a society produce to reflect their interests
and preoccupations.
88 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
The non-material culture refers to all intangible components of our ways of life. They are the
languages, norms, ideas, values and beliefs of human societies. We can neither see nor touch
them. It includes things like religion, ideas, techniques, customs, beliefs and philosophies shared
by members of a society. Culture is the embodiment of the people, it is all of the things
they share and do together. Culture is the totality of learnt, socially transmitted behaviour,
constantly shaping behaviour and consciousness within a human society from generation to
generation. Culture gives us a ‘design for living’. Culture is concrete, in that we can observe the
cultural objects and practices that define human experience. Culture is abstract in that it is a
way of thinking, feeling, believing and behaving. It creates continuity across time because it
is transmitted from one generation to the next, and is often transported, even in the migration
process, as will be seen when Caribbean culture is discussed.
Activity 3.1
State whether the examples below represent material or non-material culture:
•
food
•
norms
•
monuments
•
values
•
religious beliefs
•
clothing
•
ideas
•
church buildings
•
beliefs
•
art.
Characteristics of Culture
•
Culture is learnt – One of the primary ideas within sociology is that people are not born
knowing how to behave; there is no automatic or instinctive heritage. A society’s culture
has to be transmitted to each succeeding generation by the institutions of society. This
transmission of culture occurs through the process of socialization whereby individuals
become acquainted with the norms and values of society.
Culture and Identity | 89
•
Culture is shared – This means that systems consist of negotiated agreements. Members
of a human society must agree to relationships between a word, behaviour, or other
symbol and its corresponding significance or meaning. For example, members of a
society share a common language, which facilitates day to day exchanges with others.
No person can escape entirely from his/her culture. Different individuals may behave
differently in society, even though they have been raised in accordance with similar
cultural values.
•
Culture is transmittable – Culture comes down from the past, is not created by
any one person or generation, and continues beyond the individual lifespan. Each
generation passes it on to the next and constantly reinforces it. If the culture is not
transmitted, it will eventually die.
•
Culture is adaptive – In order to survive, culture must adapt to changes in society.
In this regard, culture can be regarded as relative as it evolves to suit the changing needs
of a constantly evolving society.
•
Culture is dynamic – It is variable over time and place. It is dynamic, rather than static.
The culture of your grandparents or parents is not identical with your own (a major
cause of the so-called generation gap). In the process of changing a culture, members
of a society often borrow from other cultures. When aspects of a dominant culture is
imposed on another culture, this process is referred to as ‘acculturation’.
•
Cultures are symbolic – Symbols are things or behaviours to which people give meaning,
such as the national flag and religious deities.
Functions of Culture
•
It enables us to communicate with others through language.
•
It makes it possible to anticipate how others in our society are likely to respond to our
actions.
•
Culture gives us standards for distinguishing between things that are right and wrong
(norms), beautiful and unpleasant (values), reasonable and unreasonable.
•
Culture provides methods for training children to behave in certain ways generally
considered appropriate in society (socialization).
•
Culture provides the knowledge and skills necessary for meeting sustenance needs.
90 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Structural and Cultural Universals
Structural universals refer to issues that must be addressed if a society is to survive and
evolve. They pertain to the basic problems of human existence. Cultural universals are values,
norms, or other cultural traits, items such as religion and language, that are found everywhere, in
every culture. They refer to possible similarities in the particular way a society (or social group)
chooses to solve structural problems of existence. These are learned behaviour patterns that
are shared collectively by all of humanity. No matter where people live in the world, they share
these universal traits. Examples of such ‘human cultural’ traits include:
1. communicating with a verbal language consisting of a limited set of sounds and
grammatical rules for constructing sentences;
2. using age and gender to classify people (for example, teenager, senior citizen,
woman,man;
3. classifying people based on marriage and descent relationships, and having kinship terms
to refer to them (for example, wife, mother, uncle, cousin);
4. raising children in some sort of family setting;
5. having a sexual division of labour (for example, men’s work versus women’s work);
6. having a concept of privacy;
7. having rules to regulate sexual behaviour;
8. distinguishing between good and bad behaviour;
9. having some sort of body ornamentation;
10. making jokes and playing games;
11. having art; and
12. having some sort of leadership roles for the implementation of community decisions.
While all cultures have these and possibly many other universal traits, different cultures have
developed their own specific ways of carrying them out or expressing them. For instance, people
in deaf communities frequently use their hands to communicate with sign language instead of
verbal language. However, sign languages have grammatical rules just as verbal ones do.
The problem we have, when looking at the idea of cultural universals is that of deciding how
specific something has to be, in order to count as a ‘universal’ feature of human social organization.
In effect, how widely or narrowly we draw the definition of universal affects the conclusion
reached about cultural patterns.
Culture and Identity | 91
Activity 3.2
a.
How would you define culture?
b . List four characteristics of culture.
c . Provide three unique aspects of the culture of any named Caribbean society.
CULTURAL VARIATIONS
It was stated earlier that culture is relative to time and place. The same act that is considered
normal and acceptable in one culture may be highly undesirable or even reprehensible in another
culture. Humans of different cultures react in different ways to various cultural traditions.
Dominant Culture
The dominant culture is the lifestyle of the elite or the most influential in society. It is the cultural
form that is held in the highest regard, receives the most support from major institutions and is
legitimized by the dominant belief system. The elite’s control of society’s institutions reinforce
their culture as the dominant form in society as their values and beliefs are transmitted through
these institutions. Importantly, it need not reflect the statistical majority; rather, it reflects those
with the most social status and power and is generally considered the norm in society. Cultural
forms in the Caribbean today no doubt reflect the dominant culture left by colonial masters.
The dominant culture has a potential influence on facets of life such as education, media
and public policy.
Decisions about school curriculum and funding for arts programmes are often guided by the
dominant culture.
Ideal Culture
Ideal culture refers to the values and standards of behaviour that people in a society profess
to hold, and that are worthy of aspiring to. This is where norms are ideally adhered to, for
example, monogamy or the notions of ‘till death do us part’. Ideal culture thus speaks of perfect
and desirable morals; however, this ideal is not always achieved.
92 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Real Culture
Real culture refers to the values and standards of behaviour that people actually follow in society.
What people actually do usually falls short of the cultural ideal. For example, although marriage
is the ideal, if things do not work out between spouses it is acceptable for them to separate or
to divorce.
Ideal culture, therefore, refers to the norms and values that members of a society profess to hold,
while real culture refers to those that are followed in practice.
Culture Shock
Over time, people develop a sense of what to expect in their familiar surroundings. Culture
becomes the lens through which people perceive and evaluate what is going on in the society.
These assumptions are not generally questioned by people. However, when one travels into a
completely different culture, different assumptions are encountered.
Culture shock is the disorientation that people experience when they come into contact with a
fundamentally different culture. Culture shock is precipitated by the anxiety that results from
losing all familiar signs and symbols of social intercourse. These signs are the thousand and
one ways in which people orient themselves to the situations of daily life: when to shake hands
and what to say when they meet people; when and how to give tips; how to give orders
to servants; how to make purchases; when to accept and when to refuse invitations; when to
take statements seriously and when not to. These cues, which may be words, gestures, facial
expressions, customs, or norms, are acquired by people in the course of growing up, and are
as much a part of culture as the language spoken or the acceptable beliefs. People generally
depend on hundreds of these cues in their lives, most of which are unconsciously learned.
When an individual enters a strange culture, all or most of these familiar cues are removed.
The world now seems unfamiliar. Without doubt, a series of props have been knocked from
under this person, followed by feelings of frustration and anxiety. Most people react to the
frustration in much the same way. First, they reject the environment that causes the discomfort:
‘The ways of the host country are bad because they make us feel bad.’
Another phase of culture shock is regression. The home environment suddenly assumes a
tremendous importance; everything becomes irrationally glorified. All difficulties and problems
are forgotten and only the good things back home are remembered. It usually takes a trip
home to bring one back to reality.
Culture and Identity | 93
Ethnocentrism
Ethnocentrism can be broadly defined as an attitude whereby other societies are judged by the
standards that apply in one’s own society. Ethnocentrism refers to the tendency to view one’s
own culture as the norm. There is a tendency to assume that one’s culture is superior to others.
‘Our’ truths and values are so central to who ‘we’ are, that it is difficult to accept the possibility
that our culture represents only one of many. A particular culture does not represent universal
‘TRUTH’. This is not to say that to be proud of one’s heritage is inappropriate. On the contrary,
a little ethnocentrism (in the sense of pride in one’s cultural identity) is beneficial because of
its bonding effect. Ethnocentrism becomes a problem, however, when people expect others
to become like them.
Additionally, ethnocentrism can also refer to the way the lifestyles, experiences, values and
norms of one group in a society are assumed to be common to everyone in society. An example of
this might be classifying people who live in non-industrial societies as ‘primitive’. This refers
to the use of one’s own culture as a yardstick for judging the ways of other individuals or
societies, which generally leads to a negative evaluation of their values, norms, and behaviours.
For example, the assumption that everyone lives in a loving, two-parent family home, or that
everyone should eat with knives and forks, demonstrates ethnocentrism.
All cultures come with a sense of in-group feelings that encourage people to see themselves as
the ‘centre of the universe’. Ethnocentrism occurs when this sense of in-group feelings involves
three tendencies:
1. To evaluate other cultures from the perspectives of your own (for example, the New World,
the Far East)
2.
To view your own culture as ‘morally correct’ while raising moral questions about the
people and practices in other cultures.
3.
To become so deeply engrossed in your culture that other cultures, and the people in
them, become unimportant.
It is hoped that the study of sociology will enable the student to look at how the elements of a
culture fit together without judging those elements as superior or inferior to one’s way of
life. The level of cultural diversity that seems to exist amongst human societies means that it is
important to avoid the trap of ethnocentrism when trying to understand the nature and scope
of human cultures.
94 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Ethnocentric attitudes are not uncommon but, sociologically, we need to be as objective as
possible. Sociology is not about making moral judgments (disguised as some kind of ‘objective
truth’), about the relative worth of people’s lifestyles. Rather, it is about the attempt to understand
and analyse the reasons for the development of cultural diversity.
Cultural Relativism
This is an attempt to appreciate other ways of life rather than just saying ‘our way is right’.
Cultural relativism understands a culture on its own terms. To study unfamiliar cultures accurately,
sociologists have to avoid culturally-based biases. Also, the sociologist should eliminate bias and
prejudice as much as possible. One needs to encourage the practice of understanding a unique
culture from the standpoint of others. Cultural relativism understands a culture on its own
terms. In essence, ‘you have to be able to stand in the other person’s shoes.’ When you can ‘see’
from the perspective of another, you can then understand that culture. For most of us, this is not
an easy thing to do. Adopting cultural relativism does not mean that we like or endorse every
custom and practice. It is about understanding, not approval. Cultural relativity is an attempt
to understand the cultural development of societies and social groups on their own terms;
that is, without trying to impose absolute ideas of moral value, or trying to measure different
cultural variations in terms of some form of absolute cultural standard.
We should guard against viewing all cultural practices as being equally valid and worthy of
respect. Customs may be more beneficial to one group than to another and thereby give advantages
to, say, men over women, or to the rich and powerful over the poor and humble. For example,
most people consider the tradition of female genital mutilation a form of horrible violence
against women, and child abuse. Those who believe that the practice is correct say that it
causes an enhancement of women’s natural beauty, modesty, chasteness, health and fertility. So
although females are caused a lot of health and emotional problems by this surgery, many females
themselves support the tradition. Similarly, cosmetic surgeries such as breast enhancement,
liposuction and lip enhancement, are seen by some to be appropriate and desirable, based
on their values and social circumstances. In this sense, under specific circumstances, any form
of human behaviour can appear to be good or bad. A good example here is our attitude to
the killing of another human being. In times of peace this may be considered to be murder or
manslaughter, whereas during war this may be considered a duty. As these examples suggest,
what is significant is not the act itself but the social context of the act.
The concept of cultural relativity does present problems, however. On one hand, there is the
idea of judging others by one’s own cultural standards. On the other hand, in some instances,
such as murder, cannibalism or child abuse, we have a right or even a responsibility to make
a value judgement. Just because someone believes strongly in his or her values, it does not
Culture and Identity | 95
mean that our relativistic stance allows us simply to overlook what is actually happening, and
condone any act whatsoever. The classic position of social science is both that observers must be
context-sensitive and that they ought not to make moral judgements in the course of conducting
social science. While the first of these positions is strongly held today, the latter remains hotly
debated, and in no way follows from the former.
It may well be necessary to understand others’ values in order to make sense of their behaviour,
but one need not condone those values nor excuse that behaviour, no matter how sincerely the
actors may believe in them. The fact that people differ in their conceptions of what is right
does not by itself mean that every view is equally correct. It means that there is no empirical
support or absolute standard to which one can refer for guidance. We have to accept any form
of behaviour as acceptable, as long as it conforms to the cultural expectations of the society in
which it takes place.
Subcultures and Countercultures
The discussion, thus far, has focused on the larger, dominant culture to which members of a
society belong. The dominant culture is where group members share common meanings
and experiences. However, there are variations in most cultures, especially in those societies
characterized by a high degree of heterogeneity, where group members maintain a distinctive
set of values, norms, lifestyles and even languages.
These unique segments of society are our subcultures and countercultures. When particular
groups in a population develop and maintain a unique way of life, we refer to them as subcultures.
When that way of life is deliberately oppositional to the dominant culture, some sociologists
refer to them as countercultures.
Subcultures
The term ‘subculture’ refers to cultural patterns that set apart some segment of a society’s
population. Young people who have certain traits in common may display subcultural patterns.
Ethnicity and religion set people apart from one another, sometimes contributing to serious
conflicts. Clearly, subcultures are a source not only of diversity and variety but also of tension
and outright violence. Subcultures involve not just difference but hierarchy. Too often, what we
view as ‘dominant’ or ‘mainstream’ culture is a set of patterns favoured by powerful segments of
the population, and we view the lives of disadvantaged people as ‘subculture’.
According to Doob (2000), a subculture is defined as ‘the culture of a specific segment of people
within a society, differing from the dominant culture in some significant respects, such as in
96 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
certain norms and values or in language’. The subculture has features in common with the larger
culture and develops whenever a group of people share some situation or experience that is
different from that of others in society.
Subcultures are a world within the larger world of the dominant culture. Although subcultures
have goals, values, and norms that are different from those of the dominant culture, they do
not usually oppose the dominant culture. Importantly, subcultures share some elements of the
dominant culture and coexist within it, although the subculture may become quite separated from
the dominant culture. Subcultures may arise out of a shared interest, or may reflect one’s earlier
culture – such as an immigrant culture. Members of subcultures are usually content to avoid the
dominant culture and remain relatively isolated from the dominant culture.
Subcultures have a set of distinctive characteristics, behaviours, practical and symbolic objects,
and vocabulary, to distinguish them from others; these are cultural variations – the identification
with a group and with others in that group. Subcultures provide members with meanings and
answers to life’s problems that the larger culture may not be able to provide. Where you live can
put you into a subculture. Belonging to a church, a professional organization or an ethnic group
also constitutes membership in a subculture. Certain religious groups such as Kumina in Jamaica,
or the Orisha in Trinidad with their distinctive norms and lifestyle, are also considered subcultures.
Regarding ethnic subcultures in the Caribbean, the situation is slightly different, because initially
we are talking about people who have arrived in a new country. Immigrants arriving in the
Caribbean brought with them their distinctive cultural traditions, values and norms from their
home society. In this case, particularly during the earlier period after arrival, any immigrant group
(such as East Indians, Chinese, and Portuguese) would have generally formed a subculture in
the host society.
Thus, when we use the term ‘subculture’ sociologically, we are referring to a group of people whose
behaviour is such that it sets the group apart from the wider (or dominant) culture of the society
in which it develops. Such groups are considered to be subcultures, rather than cultures in their
own right, because they retain links to, and possess features of, the wider culture.
Countercultures
Cultural diversity also includes outright rejection of conventional ideas or behaviour.
Counterculture consists of cultural patterns that strongly oppose the established norms of the
dominant culture within a society. Countercultures are groups that have values, interests, beliefs,
and lifestyles that are contrary to those of the dominant culture. These are groups that develop
as a reaction against the values of the dominant culture. These forms of subculture are also fairly
commonplace amongst ethnic minority groups, mainly because of discrimination. Thus, groups
Culture and Identity | 97
who believe they are unjustly persecuted develop subcultural responses to the situation. They
are distinct from a subculture, in that they often are actively rejecting the dominant cultural
values, often for political or moral reasons, and develop cultural practices that explicitly defy
the norms and values of the dominant group. They openly oppose the dominant culture and
actively seek to change the dominant culture. Conflict exists between the counterculture and
the larger culture. Thus, it acts as a signifier of a society’s present values, and a benchmark of
social change and unrest. The Rastafarian Movement and Voodoo, especially during the earlier
period, could be viewed as examples of countercultures in the Caribbean. These religious
movements developed in response to the unacceptable conditions under which the people
involved were made to exist.
The most important difference between subcultures and countercultures is that subcultures
want to coexist peacefully with the dominant culture, whereas countercultures do not wish to
coexist with the larger culture.
Activity 3.3
1. State whether the following statements are true or false:
a.
Non-material culture is more resistant to change than the material culture.
b.
Material culture includes knowledge, beliefs, attitudes, norms, values, and ideologies
c.
A major distinction between elements of material and non-material culture is that
material culture is practised by the wealthy and non-material by the working class.
d. Culture is subjective to time and place.
e.
Little of human behaviour is instinctive.
2. Distinguish between the following pairs of terms:
•
acculturation and interculturation
•
material culture and non-material culture
•
subculture and counterculture
•
ethnocentrism and cultural relativism
98 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Multiculturalism
Multiculturalism is a sharp turn away from the past, for example, when Caribbean society
downplayed cultural diversity and defined itself primarily in terms of European standards and
culture. From the outset, however, the many cultures were still negotiating their relationship
with one another and took time to evolve into the stratified system that emerged. At the top
were the Europeans, being the dominant group, established their language as the nation’s official
language. Further down, people of other backgrounds were advised to model themselves
on ‘their superiors’.
In practice, then, ‘melting’ was really a process of adopting European ways. As multiculturalists
see it, early in Caribbean history, European culture was established as the ideal to which all
should aspire and by which all should be judged.
In this early period, historians have reported events from the point of view of the English and
other people of European ancestry, paying little attention to the perspectives and accomplishments
of natives and people of African and Asian descent. Multiculturalists call this view Eurocentrism,
the dominance of European (especially English) cultural patterns.
Proponents also portray multiculturalism as a way of coming to terms with Caribbean society’s
increasing social diversity. Although multiculturalism has found favour in recent years, it has
provoked criticism as well. Opponents say it encourages divisiveness rather than unity, urging
people to identify with their own category rather than with the nation as a whole. According to
its critics, multiculturalism, instead of recognizing any common standards of truth, maintains
that we should evaluate ideas according to the race and culture of those who present them. Our
common humanity thus dissolves into an ‘African experience’, an ‘Asian experience’, and so on.
Globalization and Culture
In the not too distant past, there existed greater cultural variations among peoples of different
societies. But today, similar cultural practices are found in markedly different geographical regions
the world over.
Individuals in different countries worship similarly, wear the same clothes (we find jeans
everywhere), listen to the same music, and consume many of the same types of food, and
English is rapidly emerging as the universal language in most countries of the world. Are we
witnessing the birth of a single global culture?
It is true that societies around the world have more contact with one another than ever before,
involving the flow of goods, information, and people:
Culture and Identity | 99
1. The global economy: the flow of goods. There has never been more international trade.
The global economy has spread many of the same consumer goods (from cars and TV
shows to music and fashion) throughout the world.
2. Global communication: the flow of information. Satellite-based communication enables
people to experience the sights and sounds of events taking place thousands of miles away,
often, as they are happening.
3. Global migration: the flow of people. Knowing about the rest of the world motivates
people to move where they imagine life will be better. Moreover, today’s transportation
technology, especially air travel, makes relocating easier than ever before. As a result, in
most countries, significant numbers of people were born elsewhere (including some 30
million people who are now in the United States, 11 per cent of the population).
These global links make the cultures of the world more similar. But there are three important
limitations to the global culture thesis:
1. The global flow of goods, information, and people is uneven. Generally speaking, urban
areas (centres of commerce, communication, and people) have stronger ties to one another,
and rural villages remain isolated. Furthermore, the greater economic and military power
of North America and Western Europe means that these regions influence the rest of the
world more than the other way around.
2. The global culture thesis assumes that people everywhere are able to afford various new
goods and services. In developing countries, where many people experience extreme
poverty, many are deprived of even the basic necessities of a safe and secure life.
3. Although many cultural practices are found throughout the world, people everywhere do
not attach the same meanings to them. In short, people everywhere look at the world
through their own cultural lenses.
CULTURE AND CHANGE
Cultural Lag
Some elements of culture change faster than others. William Ogburn (1964) observed that
technology moves quickly, generating new elements of material culture (such as test-tube babies)
faster than non-material culture (such as ideas about parenthood) can keep up with them.
Ogburn (1964) called this inconsistency cultural lag – the fact that some cultural elements
change more quickly than others, which may disrupt a cultural system.
100 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
How are we to apply traditional notions about motherhood and fatherhood when one woman
can give birth to a child using another woman’s egg, which has been fertilized in a laboratory
with the sperm of a total stranger?
All societies experience change. All we can say with certainty is that, given our reliance on
culture, for as long as we survive, the human record will show continuous change. Change in
one dimension of a culture usually sparks changes in others. For example, women’s increased
participation in the labour force parallels changing family patterns, including first marriages
at a later age and a rising divorce rate. When a society experiences change, it undergoes a shift
in its core values. Our previous discussion on subcultures and countercultures demonstrated
that there are groups in society that often have different values than those of the dominant
culture. Because of contact with other cultures, the values of a society are constantly exposed
to the pressures of change.
Each culture embraces values, which it considers vital to its survival. But societies are not always
successful in living up to their core values. In addition, societies face the problem of value
contradictions. How do values in a society change? Values change for a number of reasons.
Causes of Cultural Change
Value contradictions
These are values that conflict with one another or are mutually exclusive (achieving one makes it
difficult to achieve another). To follow one, means you will come into conflict with another.
Value contradictions usually serve as a force for social change. For example, the conflicting values
of racism and democracy make it difficult for all members of society to experience equality.
Cultural diffusion
This is the spread of cultural characteristics from one group to another, or the spread of cultural
traits from one society to another. Because new information technology sends information around
the globe in seconds, cultural diffusion has never been greater than it is today. This borrowing of
cultural traits from another culture can be direct or indirect, forced or voluntary, through factors
such as trade, intermarriage or warfare. For example, there are people all over the world who
listen to American music, watch American television shows, and adopt American business methods.
American ideas of work, leisure, and democracy have spread across the globe. Not everyone in a
society is happy about the importation of another culture’s values. Some people believe that too
much cultural diffusion takes away the distinctive qualities of the native culture. The term
Culture in the Caribbean |
114
Caribbean Culture: Past and Contemporary
Culture in the Caribbean | 115
communities. In Hispaniola, these ‘maroons’ even intermarried with the Arawaks. There
were maroon communities in all the territories, but they were hunted down and destroyed. The
only communities that survived were in Jamaica, Hispaniola, Cuba and Suriname (Greenwood
and Swamber 2003).
The Maroons in Jamaica, Saint Kitts, and Barbados, for example, waged 50 years of resistance
against plantation owners, and formed their own communities with their own leadership. In
addition to the relentless pressure on the sugar plantations from the Maroons, there were numerous
other rebellions. Toussaint L’Ouverture led Haiti to independence in a war against the French.
In Jamaica, Sam Sharpe led a plantation uprising in 1831, protesting the harsh treatment
under slavery. Paul Bogle led the Morant Bay Rebellion in Jamaica in 1865. All these individuals
were protesting dehumanization and acculturation brought about by the European Slave Trade.
Even after the Africans were freed, they continued their resistance movement, refusing to work
for former slave owners, in an attempt to destroy the plantation economy.
While there were several other bloody uprisings throughout the Caribbean, Africans also waged
their resistance to slavery and cultural domination on other fronts. They fought back through
music, to express anger and frustration. The blaring of the abeng (cow horn) was a call to take
up arms. Drumming was used to dispel the forces perpetrating self-hatred and a rejection of
Africa. And though the drumming was forbidden, Africans resisted vehemently. They adapted
European music to suit their own needs, being forced to participate in it. Several forms of folk
music in the Caribbean reflect the fusion of African and European musical forms: the beguine
in Saint Lucia, mento in Jamaica, salsa in Cuba, and bossa nova in Brazil, are all examples
of this fusion.
Several other musical forms have emerged. Calypso, which originated in Trinidad and Tobago,
provided, and continues to provide, an excellent vehicle for social commentary. Jamaican reggae
music has its roots in the plight of the underclass, and is by far the most internationally known
form of Caribbean music. Artistes like Bob Marley, Bunny Wailer, Rita Marley, Judy Mowatt
and Steel Pulse have all been international ambassadors of reggae music. Reggae music is also
at the root of protest culture in Jamaica, as well as in some other parts of the Caribbean,
England, and North America. It is largely the Jamaican populace in those countries that help
to maintain the use of reggae in protesting racism and other forms of social injustice in
England, Canada, and the United States.
Afro-Trinidadians in the urban areas of Trinidad invented steel pan music, which was
initially dismissed by the upper class as noise. The instrument made from the steel drum has
its roots in the stick-fighting tradition. Stick-fighting was a way for Africans to demonstrate and
maintain their skill and prowess. When they participated in Carnival processions, Africans
performed stick-fighting rituals. The Africans also used their sticks to provide rhythmic sound.
116 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
To the slave-owners this was unsettling, as the sticks were effective weapons. This was soon
banned, and the Africans had to find other forms of rhythm. By hammering the surfaces of
drums and dividing the sections to produce different sounds, the steel pan was created. To the
Afro-Trinidadian, the steel drum made a powerful political statement – it symbolized African
creativity, power, and ownership.
The Rastafarian movement in Jamaica is another popular form of protest culture. Rastafarians
drew their inspiration from the teachings of Marcus Garvey. Garvey preached that black people
should return to Africa (Ethiopia) to reunite with their ancestors. Garvey also prophesied
that a black king would one day be crowned in Africa. This prophecy was fulfilled in the
1930s with the crowning of Ras Tafari (crowned Emperor Haile Selassie of Ethiopia). The
two most basic beliefs of Rastafarians (or Rastas) are first that Ras Tafari (Haile Selassie) is
the Messiah and second that Africa (Ethiopia in particular) is the Promised Land. Though
his movement was extremely popular with the working class, Europeans and those Africans who
had by then become assimilated into European cultural values despised it.
Africans in the Caribbean fought to maintain their cultural traditions by forming clubs called
Nations in all the islands. Each nation had to pledge to preserve African language, culture,
religion, and music. As in the case of North America, much of the African resistance movement
was steeped in religion. Despite the attempts at Christianization, Africans were determined
to have their religions survive. The Orisha in Trinidad, Voodun in Haiti, Santeria in Cuba,
Puerto Rico, Brazil and the Dominican Republic, Kumina in Jamaica, and Umbanda and
Candomble in Brazil, are still surviving today as a result of this resistance. It is still possible to
find a midnight ceremony in progress in parts of Cuba and Haiti against the backdrop of
African drumming.
The church played a strong role in many uprisings. Sam Sharpe, Paul Bogle and George William
Gordon, were all Baptist preachers. The Africans formed their own churches in resistance to the
mainstream churches. In addition, churches provided an effective meeting place for Africans.
African-Caribbean resistance culture further manifests itself in educational issues. Today, there
is a major drive towards the reclamation of history and vocabulary. In post-emancipation Haiti,
a group of African writers formed what they called the Griots (Storytellers) society. They
were determined to erase the negative images of the African painted by Europeans.
A number of languages and dialects evolved in the Caribbean as a result of the imposition of the
slave-owner’s language on the African. Kweyol, which represents a fusion of African and French
(not broken French as many style it), is spoken in the French Antilles (Haiti, Martinique,
Guadeloupe, and French Guiana in South America). In the English colonies, a fusion of African,
and English (or French in some cases) led to other Creoles being developed, sometimes referred
Culture in the Caribbean | 117
to as patois. In the Dutch Antilles, the fusion of African, Spanish, Portuguese and Dutch is
called Papiamento. Papiamento, Patois and Kweyol were all perceived as inferior, as they represented
to the European elite the bastardization of their language. Class-seeking Africans and the mixed
African-Europeans also despised those languages. Nonetheless, the Africans recognized the
power in them. Kweyol, for example, played a very important role in the Haitian revolution.
These languages now form the vernacular of these islands because of the persistence of the
people who spoke them. Today, these languages enjoy prominence, and in some places, such
as in the French Antilles, and the Dutch Antilles, there are government-sponsored attempts
to document the language, and to create dictionaries. In that regard, the Dutch Antilles are
further ahead.
Today, resistance culture continues to describe a major part of the lives of Africans in the Diaspora.
Many of the injustices faced by our African ancestors in the Caribbean and in North America
are still being dealt with today. The use of churches, the formation of societies, the pens
of our writers (Griots), the use of vernacular poetry, calypso, and reggae music are all elements
of the contemporary resistance movement. This bears striking resemblance to the resistance
movement during the enslavement period. Though some aspects of early resistance culture
have crossed over to popular culture (namely, carnival, calypso, and reggae), these vehicles often
reflect a duality. They are in fact still used to defy much of the colonial baggage Caribbean
people still carry.
Activity 4.1
1. Match the following names with the statements below:
•
M.G. Smith
•
J.S. Furnivall
•
Toussaint L’Ouverture
•
E.K. Brathwaite
•
Paul Bogle
•
George Beckford
a.
was the first to develop the concept of a plural society.
b. introduced the plural society theory to the English-speaking Caribbean.
c.
associated with the Creole society theory.
d. associated with the plantation society theory.
118 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
e.
led Haiti to independence in a war against the French.
f.
led the Morant Bay Rebellion in Jamaica in 1865.
2. Discuss the ways in which the culture of a named Caribbean territory has been influenced
by any two groups brought to the region during the period of colonialism.
East Indian Culture
East Indians were introduced mainly into Trinidad and Tobago, Guyana and Suriname. A few
were introduced into other territories such as Jamaica, Grenada, Guadeloupe and Saint Lucia.
The Indians were to replace the labour that was previously provided by the enslaved Africans. The
majority of Indians came from North India, more specifically from the Gangetic Plains region of
Uttar Pradesh, Bihar and Oudh. They came under what was known as the ‘Indentureship’ system.
Under their contracts, the Indians were free to leave when their contracts ended; however, the
majority chose to stay in the Caribbean.
The Indians were located on settlements surrounding the plantations and they were allowed to
continue many of their ancestral traditions. These included East Indian family patterns, Indian
culinary practices, Indian fashions and patterns of worship. They were also allowed to establish
both temples and mosques shortly after their arrival in the West Indies. East Indians were allowed
more opportunities than the African slaves to retain their ancestral culture. However, with time,
their culture has inevitably undergone change and adaptation.
The most significant change among Indians occurred through the efforts of Christian missionaries,
especially the Canadian Mission. Churches and schools were established in Indian areas, leading
to substantial conversion to Presbyterianism. In Trinidad and Tobago, many Indians attained
social mobility through educational attainment at the schools of this mission.
East Indians were marginalized in Caribbean society, but contact with their ancestral homeland
was maintained through music, movies and missionaries. Indians have contributed to the rich
cultural landscape of the Caribbean in several ways: through Indian movies, Indian music, food,
clothing, and religious festivals.
Caribbean Popular Culture
Popular culture includes a range of expressions of creativity that are accessible to, produced
by, and enjoyed by the majority of a society. Popular culture has been one important means by
which, even during colonialism and slavery, people were able to express their identity. Popular
Culture in the Caribbean | 119
culture helped to preserve parts of the heritage of the various ethnic groups that were brought
into the region. Caribbean popular culture in recent years is being marketed all over the world.
Calypso, carnival, cricket, reggae, literature and the steel pan, have not gone unnoticed
across the globe. Most aspects of Caribbean popular culture originated among the grassroots in
society; but within recent times, a greater appreciation of Caribbean popular culture has
developed among all strata of society.
Carnival
Carnival, as celebrated in the Caribbean, originated in Trinidad and Tobago, and has been
exported to other territories. However, though always a celebration of joy, abandonment and
‘freeing up’ oneself, the format for the festival is somewhat different in specific territories, based
on their people’s specific interests and experiences. Carnival has also been promoted overseas by
West Indians in cities such as Montreal, New York, Toronto, and London.
As stated earlier, Carnival originated among the French planters. The word carnival comes from
the words carne and vale, meaning farewell to flesh. Carnival is celebrated on the Monday and
Tuesday before Ash Wednesday, which is the beginning of the Lenten season. The French and
Spanish played the major part in Carnival until 1838 when slavery was abolished. It is believed
that after the abolition of slavery, the slaves began to organize their own celebrations. Today, the
celebrations include very elaborate masquerade bands; people spend exhorbitant sums of money
to acquire costumes. This is a far cry from the origins of the celebrations, when it was the formerly
enslaved who were engaged in the festivities in the streets. In the past, the steel bands also played
the major role on the actual day when they played in the streets. Today, the steel bands have lost
some ground to the sound systems of disc jockeys who blast music from large trucks in the streets.
The Trinidad and Tobago Carnival is characterized by several competitions, which begin weeks
before the actual two days of celebrations. Competitions include Parade of the Bands, Calypso
competitions, Steel band competitions and many other events. Many tourists come to participate
in the celebrations, which have become a major source of revenue for many Caribbean territories.
Music
Music in the Caribbean has been following different trends. It is one of the most popular
forms of expression and is used by artistes to voice their opinions on the contentions in
local politics, on other current issues in their countries, or on global issues. Trinidad and
Tobago is well-known for its calypso, while Jamaica is famous for reggae, and Martinique
and Guadeloupe for zouk.
120 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Trinidad and Tobago’s calypso has developed out of the rhythm of African songs that the enslaved
sang on the plantations as they worked. It is believed that the origin of the word ‘calypso’
was the African word ‘caiso’ which means ‘bravo’, a word that was used to praise a good
singer. Since the slaves were not allowed to talk as they worked, calypso was used as a form
of communication. The calypsoes were sung in French creole dialect, which is also known as
patois. After slavery, the tradition continued and grew into an attraction for tourists. The
musical accompaniment for calypso traditionally came from bamboo and rattles, but today it
includes drums, guitars, brass, steel pans and other instruments. Today, calypsoes are sung in
calypso tents that have become very popular around carnival time. In these tents, calypsonians
sing about current events, politics, and other issues of national and international concern.
Calypso has played an important part in the life of the African slaves and their descendants.
It has always been a source of expression – both political and social. Today it is the subject
of much debate. It is the subject of seminars in Trinidad and Tobago and is now being studied
at the university level. Famous calypsonians in Trinidad and Tobago include the Mighty Sparrow,
Lord Kitchener, and David Rudder.
Calypso, like most art forms, has been subject to evolution. Today, different forms of calypso also
incorporate other musical sounds such as American Soul and Disco, reggae and pop music. These
influences are evident in many calypsos. Other musical art forms that have evolved from the
calypso are soca, chutney, soca-chutney and other variations. These are relatively new art
forms and are really versions of calypso in which new influences have been incorporated.
The Mighty Sparrow or Slinger Francisco, also known as ‘the Birdie’, is sometimes referred to
as the ‘Calypso King of the World’. He was born on July 9, 1935, in Grenada, and his family
migrated to Trinidad and Tobago when he was just a little over one year old. He has won many
competitions and the University of the West Indies has also awarded him an honorary doctorate.
Reggae and Rastafarianism
Rastafarianism is rooted in the principles of black self-reliance and self-empowerment, combined
with a ‘back to Africa’ doctrine. Although Rastafarianism has inspired people since the 1930s, it
became more widely known internationally in the 1970s with the reggae music of Bob Marley.
Marley is credited with capturing the essence of Rastafarianism in his lyrics and introducing
these principles to the world.
Today, reggae is very popular throughout the world and its beat has been incorporated into
many American and British songs. Bob Marley, an ardent follower of Rastafarianism, contributed
significantly to the popularity of reggae.
Culture in the Caribbean | 121
Rastafarianism soon became an official religion in Jamaica and is now recognized throughout the
Caribbean and the rest of the world. Haile Selassie I, Emperor of Ethiopia, was acknowledged
as ‘God incarnate’, the ‘Black Messiah’ who would lead the peoples of Africa and the diaspora to
freedom. He was given the official titles, King of kings, Lord of lords, Conquering Lion of the
Tribe of Judah and Root of David. These are believed to be the titles of the returned Messiah
in The New Testament Book of Revelation. Today, Rastafarianism is a cultural force and has
spread to other parts of the Caribbean and the rest of the world, including Britain and
the United States.
Literature
Many writers from the Caribbean have made a name for themselves in the wider literary world.
Among these renowned novelists and writers are the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Erna Brodber of Jamaica
George Lamming of Barbados
Wilson Harris of Guyana
V.S. Naipaul of Trinidad and Tobago
Derek Walcott of St Lucia
Caryl Phillips of St Kitts
Many Caribbean writers focus on the folklore of the Caribbean, which is rooted strongly in
African folklore. The literature that emanates from the Caribbean is largely a reflection of life
in Caribbean society.
Each society of the Caribbean has its own folklore. Although the folklore of each territory
is quite different and diverse, its common thread is the allusion to African culture. In much of
the literature, the focus is on the lifestyles and relationships between the various groups in the
islands. La Diablesse or the Devil Woman, Anansi the trickster, Spiderman, the Soucouyant, Old
Higue, Douennes and Papa Bois are well-known characters in Caribbean folklore.
Activity 4.2
State whether the following statements are TRUE or FALSE
a.
Derek Walcott of Saint Lucia is an important literary figure.
b. Lloyd Best of Trinidad and Tobago is associated with the plantation society theory.
c.
The British introduced Carnival to the Caribbean.
122 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
d. Rastafarianism originated in Africa.
e.
African culture had little influence on Caribbean folklore.
f.
The ‘zouk’ musical form is associated with Martinique and Guadeloupe.
g. Voodoo, Orisha and Santeria are examples of African-derived religions.
Vodun or Voodoo
Many of the slaves in Haiti came from the Dahomey area in Africa. These slaves brought their
ancestral religious practices with them, but were forced to practise their rituals secretly under
the restrictions of slavery. Voodoo believers worshipped several gods, one of whom was very
powerful and known as Vodun. Voodoo followers attribute powers to their different gods, and
they call on them for help and protection. The cult includes religious practices, dances, music,
medicine, art and rituals. Voodoo practices have often been viewed as evil, and have been met
with opposition from the traditional Christian religions. Santeria, a syncretic religion of
Caribbean origin, also has roots in Africa. It is a nature religion based on stones, seashells,
water and herbs. Yoruba slaves brought their deities, called Orishas, with them. Today, this
religion appears to have similarities to the Catholic religion. In the New World, Catholic
saints were identified as the Orishas in order to preserve the tradition. It incorporates the
worship of the Orisha (literally ‘head guardian’) and beliefs of the Yoruba and Bantu people in
Southern Nigeria, Senegal, and Guinea Coast. These are combined with elements of worship
from Roman Catholicism.
Cricket
Cricket has been a significant institution in the expression of the culture and identity of the
English-speaking Caribbean. Cricket was introduced by the British to control and ‘civilize’ the
people of the Caribbean. However, the sport has become a major form of Caribbean resistance to
the internal and external forces of control. Over the decades, especially from the mid-twentieth
century, the West Indies cricket team has had a tremendous impact on the international
game, with their own u n i q u e style, which has been dubbed ‘calypso’ cricket. Some of the
best players the world has ever seen have originated in the Caribbean: George Headley, Learie
Constantine, Frank Worrell, Malcolm Marshall, Vivian Richards, and Brian Lara among others.
According to C.L.R. James (1963), cricket goes ‘beyond a boundary’, as it explains the life of
the people of the region. The cricket arena is like a carnival stage where the culture of the
region is expressed through music, dance, and food.
Culture in the Caribbean | 123
Caribbean Culture and Globalization
Globalization and its attendant forces such as trade, technology and travel, made accessible
a wide range of attractive foreign cultural products. These have the potential to supersede what
already exists in the Caribbean if allowed to do so. These products are introduced by the internet,
television programmes, mostly from the United States, the growth of American fast-food outlets
such as Kentucky Fried Chicken (KFC), Burger King (BK), and Subway throughout the region,
and exposure to the way of life of the metropolitan cities, through ease of travel. In other words,
the region, through the new forces of globalization, is further challenged to maintain its
cultural identity.
Conclusion
Caribbean culture is rich and diverse. The culture is steeped in the history of the region
and involves aspects originating from the different people (Spanish, French, Dutch, British,
Chinese, Syrians, Portuguese, East Indians and others) who occupied the Caribbean at one time
or another. Each country’s culture arises out of a common heritage, that of slavery, yet the culture
of each territory is unique in many ways.
There is no gainsaying that the peoples of the Caribbean have fought hard to maintain their
cultural heritage despite the forces of colonialism. However, the peoples of the Caribbean
are now faced with a new cultural challenge in the form of globalization.
Activity 4.3
Attempt any two of the following essays.
1. To what extent can the cultural diversity of the Caribbean be explained by the history
of the region?
2. Discuss the relative impact of indentureship and slavery i n t h e C a r i b b e a n upon
culture change among East Indians and Africans respectively.
3. Critically discuss major issues underlying the racial and ethnic antagonism in Caribbean
society today.
| Sociology for Caribbean Students
•
•
•
primary socialization
The Family | 129
Types of Families
Family types include those that involve polygamous or monogamous unions. Polygamous
families are those in which the husband or wife has more than one spouse simultaneously. There
are two forms of polygamy:
•
Polygyny – where a man has multiple partners or spouses
•
Polyandry – where a woman has multiple partners or spouses
Polygamy is more readily found in traditional societies, as opposed to modern industrial society. It
is also important to note that polygyny has been found to be much more common than polyandry.
Examples of polygynous and polyandrous societies respectively are Mardudjara of Australia and
The Tibetan, Toda, Sherpa, and Marquesan.
In contrast, a monogamous marriage is one in which two partners commit to each other, either
through religious and/or legal means. It is a union in which an individual has only one spouse
during his/her lifetime. Monogamy, however, is not limited to marriage and also refers to being
committed to one partner during the course of a relationship.
Monogamous marriages are often regarded as the ‘norm’ in modern industrial society; however,
polyamorous unions where there are multiple partners at times living within the same household
are becoming a focus of contemporary research on family types in modern society.
The Nuclear Family
The nuclear family, also known as the traditional family, or the ‘cereal packet’ family, consists of
two adults (a mother and a father) and their unmarried offspring. This is often regarded as the
most basic unit of social organization. The members of a nuclear family may be related to
one another by blood, marriage, or adoption and share a common residence.
In previous times, nuclear families were larger than those of today, which are small in size. Some
factors which have brought about the change in the size of the nuclear family are: urbanization,
the changing role of women, and economic conditions within the family and/or society.
The Extended Family
In addition to a nuclear family, the extended family includes additional generations and relations.
It may consist of two or more adults from different generations of a family, who share a common
household.
130 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
In addition to parents and children, the extended family may include other relatives such as
cousins, aunts, uncles, and grandparents. The extended family may live together for various
reasons. In many instances it provides financial and emotional support to help to raise children,
or it may be a convenient arrangement to support an ill or elderly relative.
Sometimes children may be raised by their grandparents when their biological parents have
died, migrated or are unable to take care of them financially or otherwise. In these domestic
situations, the grandparents may be primarily responsible for the care of the children.
There are two types of extended families: the vertically extended (consanguine) and the
horizontally extended (joint). The vertically extended family or consanguine family may be
one-, two- or even three-generation families. The possibility of the three-generation family has
increased with greater life expectancy. More than likely, extended families evolve from nuclear
families.
Horizontally extended families or joint families are those that are extended as a result of the
siblings introducing their spouses into the households. The household is eventually extended
to include their children as well. This type of family is more prevalent in North India or among
members of the Indian Diaspora.
Murdock’s (1949) definition of the family suggests that the nuclear family is the most ‘usual’
and functional form of family arrangement. However, Giddens (2008) extends the concept
of family to include kinship. Kinship is a social bond which is based on blood, marriage or
adoption and which joins individuals into families. These connections may be the result
of biological relationships or marital links. Kinship units normally play a more significant role
in non-industrial societies. In the Caribbean, the concept of ‘family’ often includes the wider
kinship network. The most important characteristic of both the nuclear family and the extended
family, is the shared financial arrangements and support.
The Reconstituted Family
This family type, also known as the blended family, is formed through the union of people who
were previously married to others. This may occur through death of a spouse or divorce between
previous partners. In many cases, each partner comes into the n e w marriage o r u n i o n
with children from their former marriage. This may present additional challenges such as
the allocation of roles and responsibilities within the family. There will be a need for defining
the role of the ‘new daddy’ and ‘new mommy,’ while at the same time giving consideration to
the child’s/children’s other parent, who is not part of the new family. There may also be clashes
of personalities as children may now be living with other children with whom they only had
brief encounters prior to their parents’ marriage.
The Family | 131
Problems of Definition
Murdock’s claim regarding the universal ‘nuclear type’ family has been widely criticized.
The definition of the family as advanced by Murdock has been widely challenged, not only by
theorists but also by the mere existence of the diverse family forms today. Although Murdock
assumes the norm to be a nuclear family type, many exceptions have been identified. These
include the following:
1. Single-Parent Households
In many industrialized societies such as the United States and Europe, there is a growing
proportion of single-parent families. This is also the case in many Caribbean societies where
there is a predominance of the matrifocal (female headed) households. This type of family
structure has raised questions about the universality of the nuclear family. The traditional family
(as defined by Murdock) may be under threat of dissolution. Single-parent families may
originate through divorce, separation, desertion, abandonment or from the death of a spouse. In
some instances, they are due to the tendency among some women today to be career-oriented,
and may choose to parent a child outside of marriage.
2. Sibling Families
Another uncommon family type that Murdock did not take into consideration is the sibling
family. This type of family, which is also found in the Caribbean, can be defined as a unit where
an older brother or sister is the head of the household. No parents are present in this family type.
Some of the reasons for the absence of parents may include migration of parents to a foreign
country, death, imprisonment, or desertion by parents.
3. The Nayar in Kerala
This is another type of family that did not fit Murdock’s definition. Among the Nayar in
Kerala, South India, a matrilineal situation existed, where the woman entered several short-term
relationships with different men. The mother and her relatives carried out family responsibilities,
and husbands/fathers contributed little to the maintenance and upbringing of children. Longterm sexual relationships did not exist, and the male and female did not constitute an economic
unit. This family type is no longer in existence.
4. Same-sex Marriages
With the legalization of same-sex marriages in some societies, such as some states in the United
States, some European countries, South Africa and more recently Argentina a new family type
132 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
has emerged. This family type may also include children, who may be from previous marriages,
adopted or conceived through surrogate mothers by artificial insemination.
Activity 5.1
1. Distinguish between the following pairs of terms:
a.
Polyandry and polygyny
b.
Endogamy and exogamy
c.
Patrilocal and matrilocal
d. Patriarchal and egalitarian family
e.
Patrilineal and matrilineal descent
f.
Extended and nuclear family
2. In no more than two lines each, briefly explain the following terms, using examples
where possible.
a.
Serial monogamy
b.
Polygyny
c.
Joint family
d. Matrifocal family
THEORETICAL PERSPECTIVES ON THE FAMILY
Sociologists have presented different perspectives on the family. Functionalists view the family
as performing functions which are necessary for the survival of society as a whole as well as its
members. Conflict theorists, on the other hand, perceive the family as an oppressive mechanism
for some members of society, namely the working class or proletariat. Feminism offers a view of
the family in which women hold a disadvantaged position; this has traditionally been the position
of women although the extent to which this still exists is highly debatable. Interactionists focus
on the interaction among family members, and unlike the macro-theorists, give deeper insights
into the inner workings of families. Social Pathology is a model which emerged in the 1930s in
order to explain features of Caribbean families which were seen as dysfunctional to the colonial
powers. These perspectives and theories will now be discussed.
The Family | 133
Functionalism
For Functionalists or Consensus theorists, the family like all other social institutions has prescribed
functions which are necessary for the society as a whole to operate smoothly and with little or no
conflict. Early Structural Functionalists such as Herbert Spencer used the analogy of an organism
to explain the operation of the society. An organism consists of different parts, each of which
contributes to the equilibrium and well-being of the organism. For Functionalists, society is
made up of a series of interrelated parts that contribute to the smooth operation of the social
system. Each part functions to meet the needs or ‘functional prerequisites’ of the total structure.
The integration among the various parts assists in maintaining the order and stability of the
whole. This is provided by value consensus and patterned relationships. The Functionalist
approach looks at the effectiveness of the family in relation to its ability to carry out functions
essential for stability and continuity in society.
According to the Functionalist perspective, the family is a social institution which is vital to
maintaining order and stability in society. They see the family as contributing to order through
the functions that it performs.
For Murdock, in traditional societies, the family performs four central functions that are necessary
for the survival of society. The family facilitates the following:
•
Companionship and sexual gratification
•
Reproductive functions
•
Economic functions
•
Educational or Socialization functions.
Companionship and Sexual Gratification
The family provides members with opportunities to develop regular face-to-face communication
and intimate relationships. All societies have norms and values with regard to marital relationships
and patterns of sexual behaviour. In many societies, heterosexuality is regarded as the ‘normal way
of life.’ Consequently, a system of norms, values and practices develop in order to foster ‘safe’,
‘acceptable’ unions between males and females. This may lead to arranged marriages in some
cultures, such as rural India and dating in others, such as the United States of America.
Many traditional cultures support heterosexual unions, and sexual relations within the
framework of marriage. They also have some form of ceremony to formalize marital relationships.
The purpose of these unions is to provide security for both partners. Traditionally, this aspect
was especially important for women as their role was believed to be in the domestic sphere.
134 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Marriage or committed unions also provide a sense of comfort to both partners; companionship
leads to contentment and thus, in Functionalist terms they are both better able to cope with
everyday stresses and perform their roles in society.
Exogamy is the cultural norm in which people marry outside a particular group, while endogamy
allows people to marry within the same lineage, group, class, village, or race. Family and societal
norms therefore control sexuality and provide emotional and psychological stability for adults.
Reproductive Functions
As previously discussed, Murdock saw the family as comprising adults of both sexes who engage
in a socially approved sexual relationship. The family provides a space within which desires
can be fulfilled in a manner which is not harmful to the wider society. Sex is part of marriage
and is the acceptable means by which reproduction takes place. The family provides a stable
framework for procreation, thereby providing new members of society with the expectation
of care and compassion associated with parenting. This function ensures the continuity of
society through the replacement of passing generations.
Economic Function
A key function of the family, according to Murdock, is the provision of economic needs for its
members. These are the means of subsistence which are necessary both for human survival and
comfort. The family provides for the economic needs of its members, especially the younger
members, the elderly, the ill and the incapacitated. These members are usually unable to care
for themselves.
Societal norms will also define the economic roles of adult members. Murdock examined the
division of labour in the nuclear family along the lines of sex. Men, due to their physical strength,
have the responsibility of provider, that is, they are responsible for working outside of the home
and providing an income for their family. Women, on the other hand, are characterized as the
caregiver due to their biological abilities to give birth, and feed babies. As a result, Murdock’s
historical analysis of the nuclear family showed that women had been assigned the role of taking
care of the home and children.
Educational or Socialization Functions
The family is the agent of primary socialization. Being the first institution responsible for
primary socialization, it prepares the child for his/her role in society. The family provides the
The Family | 135
child’s first contact with society. Through the creation of a safe, nurturing environment, the
family provides the structure within which norms and values can be transmitted to the young.
This is particularly the case where there is an extended family or where kinship networks play an
important part in the upbringing of the child. The notion that ‘it takes a village to raise a child’
may be mentioned here as the family operates within the wider society. The family is supposed
to link the individual to the society. Norms, values, beliefs, mores and folkways should be in
tandem with the larger society or culture. In this way, through the family the child learns about
society and what is expected of him/her in the public space. Thus, the family equips the child
with all the knowledge and skills necessary for functioning as a useful and productive member
of society (primary socialization).
In modern societies, some institutions such as the school are also responsible for socializing
young children. Many norms and values which are important to their functioning in society
as young adults are conveyed by nurseries, pre-school facilities and day care centres. These
agencies are today performing many of the functions that were previously performed by
the family in traditional societies.
The Modern Family
The family is constantly evolving to meet the changing needs of its members. It is not seen as
an institution leading to social change, but instead, one that adapts to social change. According
to Parsons, as society becomes modernized, institutions specialize in fewer functions. He sees
the modern family as one example of this, as it has been reduced to just two basic functions:
•
the socialization of children, and
•
the stabilization of adult personalities.
Historically the family was a traditional unit of production. In modern industrialized societies,
specialist organizations such as factories, schools and health services are now performing some
of the functions previously performed by the family. Nowadays the family can become more
specialized in its functions. Since it is isolated from the wider kin, closer and warmer ties develop
between husband and wife. This is good for the harmony of family, institutions and society.
This view presents a conservative stance and suggests that the contemporary Western family, the
nuclear family, is the best possible organization of a family. This family form lives in isolation
from the wider kinship network.
Figure 5.1 shows some of the changes taking place in the American family from 1970–2000.
136 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Figure 5.1: Households by Type in the US, 1970–2000
Household by Type: Selected Years, 1970–2000
(Percent distribution)
Nonfamily households
1.7
3.6
4.6
5.7
14
14.9
14.8
Other nonfamily households
11.5
5.6
10.6
8.6
9.7
10.7
12.9
14.8
Women living alone
Men living alone
Family households
16
30.3
Other Family households
29.9
29.8
28.7
Married couples without
own children
40.3
30.9
1970
1980
26.3
24.1
1990
2000
Married couples with
own children
Source: U.S. Census Bureau, Current Population Survey, March Supplements: 1970–2000
Conflict Perspective
The conflict or Marxist perspective often offers a critical and radical view of the family. For
the Marxists, the family is not necessarily a haven of love and protection from the social world
as the Functionalists advocate. Rather, Marxists purport that this unit acts as an institution of
exploitation that is designed solely to meet the needs of the capitalist economic system. The
institution of the family, therefore, is a system of power relations that reinforces and reflects the
inequalities in society.
Marxists believe that the family has four major roles. The family is:
1. An agent of reproduction – To Frederich Engels, the family initially emerged from the need
to ensure paternity amongst the Bourgeoisie. Secondly, with the rise of capitalism, Marxists
The Family | 137
contend that a large Proletarian or working class family is essential to the reproduction of
the labour force.
2. An agent of economic production – Pre-capitalist society necessitated subsistence production
(i.e., the production of basic needs). Hence, individuals chose to have numerous children as
more children meant a larger workforce.
3. An agent of female subjugation – Engels contends that the family unit oppresses women
since women provide unpaid services, particularly in the area of household chores and
childcare.
4. A prop to the capitalist system – Marxists also believe that the capitalist system benefits
from the family because of a variety of reasons. Firstly, the family provides unpaid labour
rendered by women and children. Further, the worker is refreshed daily from the rest and
comfort he receives from his/her home and can face the stresses of the workplace. Finally,
the family is a major consumer of capitalist products.
In general, conflict theorists posit that the family is an institution of subjugation and exploitation
and is subject to the same conflicts and tensions that characterize the rest of society. Families are
not isolated from the problems facing society as a whole.
The Feminist Perspective
In recent decades, Feminism has probably had more influence on the study of the family than
any other sociological approach. In addition to the Marxist perspective, the Feminist theory also
provides a revolutionary view of the family. Feminists’ main concern, however, is the negative
effects of family life on women. Feminist theory sees the family as contributing to the exploitation
of women in society. Such exploitation is seen either as a consequence of the woman’s subordinate
position in the family or as a result of the impact of the capitalist system.
Radical Feminism
According to Ann Oakley (1974) in The Sociology of Housework, women are exploited in
contemporary society. The main assertion is that the family is the foremost means of maintaining
male dominance over women. She points out that:
1 . Gender roles are culturally and not biologically determined;
2 . There is no evidence to show that there are some tasks more suited for men or women in
societies, for example, that women are better suited to do housework and to take care of
children;
138 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
3 . Although women are now in the workforce, they are still expected to maintain their role
as housewife; thus women are asked to do two jobs, yet seen as unimportant;
4 . Women’s role as housewife ensures that they remain subordinate to men; the role of
men is seen as more important since it is outside of the home and they earn the income
for the family;
5 . The housewife’s role, which is allocated to women, has no status, is unpaid but takes
precedence over all other roles;
6 . The patriarchal nature of the family exploits women and keeps them oppressed in society.
According to Oakley, women will gain their freedom in society only if the division of labour,
based on sex, the roles of housewife, and the present family structures, change drastically.
Margaret Benston (1969), a Marxist feminist, in ‘The Political Economy of Woman’s Liberation’
argues that the capitalist system leads to the exploitation of women. According to Benston,
1 . capitalism leads to exploitation of women in the home; women perform housework but
are unpaid;
2 . the family acts in the interest of men and employers, and is disadvantageous to women;
3 . the family socializes its members into the dominant value system of the ruling class.
Criticisms
The following criticisms have been made about feminist theories:
1. feminist theory focuses too much on the role of women at the expense of other
family members;
2. the concept of a patriarchal structure is too generalized;
3. the implication that all women are exploited in the family is overstated.
The Feminist perspective presents an alternative to the traditional perspective of the family,
where women are seen as providing the expressive functions, and are in a subordinate role to
the income-earning husband.
The Family | 139
Social Pathology
This thesis, developed in the Caribbean, considers the family within the context of certain social
problems. The approach was followed by the West Indian Royal Commission of 1937, which
concluded that the man in West Indian society was not viewed as the head of the household.
It also identified the woman as the supporter of the home and claimed that promiscuity and
illegitimacy were prevalent. As a result of this report, a team from the Colonial office was sent
to investigate the problem.
The main objectives of the Colonial Officials were:
1 . to identify the problems of family life among the poor in the Caribbean; and
2 . to devise a programme to deal with the social problems of Caribbean society.
The problems they identified were as follows:
1 . Family life was seen as loose and unstable, and relationships appeared to be casual.
2 . Conjugal ties were occasionally faithful and enduring but were more often ‘promiscuous’
and ‘transitory.’
3 . The father’s contact with children was irregular, and because of poverty he was usually
unable to provide economic support.
4 . Children were illegitimate, effectively fatherless, unschooled and subject to severe parental
discipline.
5 . The crisis in Caribbean family life brought with it a range of social problems. The
problems of society are attributable to the inadequacies and weaknesses of the family.
The reader is advised to consult Christine Barrow’s book, Family in the Caribbean for
further details.
Solutions were attempted as follows:
1 . The central concern was to persuade people to adopt what was deemed the ‘superior’
co-residential, nuclear family sanctioned by marriage and producing legitimate offspring.
2 . Policies were implemented to try to alter the structure of lower-class African families. It
was felt that this would improve and develop the ‘moral’ and ‘social well-being’ of Caribbean
societies. There was, for example, an island-wide campaign to encourage marriages in
Jamaica.
140 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Criticisms of the Colonial Officers’ report include the following:
1. Social pathology was seen as ethnocentric: the Caribbean family was seen as a failure since
it did not meet Western Christian standards.
2. Data collection, though superficial and biased, nevertheless provided the basis for an
assumed understanding of family forms in the Caribbean, and thereby misrepresented what
was perceived as shortcomings.
Table 5.1 shows the percentage distribution of woman aged 15–49 years by marital/
union status according to age group in Haiti and Jamaica.
Table 5.1: Marital Status of Women 15–49 years in Haiti (1994–95, 2000) and
Jamaica (1993, 2000)
The Family | 141
Table 5.2 shows the percentage distribution of woman aged 15–49 years by marital/
union status according to age group in the Dominican Republic and Mexico.
Table 5.2: Marital Status of Women 15–49 years in the Dominican Republic (1991, 1996) and Mexico (1986)
142 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Activity 5.2
Choose the most appropriate response to the following:
1. According to the Functionalists, which of the following is best suited to modern industrial
society?
a.
extended family
b . nuclear family
c.
joint family
d. symmetrical family
2. Which of the following is made up of two or more adults from different generations in
the same household?
a.
extended family
b.
nuclear family
c.
joint family
d. symmetrical family
3. Which of the following theorists is not a Functionalist?
a.
Parsons
b.
Murdock
c.
Weber
d. Durkheim
4. According to the literature, which of the following is not viewed as a contributory factor
to the widespread occurrence of matrifocal family forms in the Caribbean?
a.
Plantation slavery
b.
The African heritage
c.
Economic factors/Culture of Poverty
d. Promiscuity
The Family | 143
5. According to the literature, which of the following is not viewed as a significant influence
on the family worldwide?
a.
Ageing
b.
Ethnic conflict
c.
Increased migration
d. HIV/AIDS
ETHNIC DIVERSIT Y AND CARIBBEAN KINSHIP
The evolution of family forms in the Caribbean has been influenced by the region’s unique history.
The variety of family forms is representative of both the region’s historical experience as well as its
contemporary life. The Caribbean has been referred to as an ‘artificially created’ region (Patterson
1973). This means that many aspects of its culture have not been indigenous, but instead have
been transplanted and adapted from other societies and cultures. This has resulted in a diversity
of ways of life in Caribbean societies, one example of which is the family. The cultural traditions
and heritage of the many groups of people which came to the Caribbean – including Europeans,
Africans, and East Indians – have contributed to the diversity of family forms in the region. In
addition, factors such as slavery, indentureship and colonialism have also contributed in some
way to the present day family forms. Diverse kinship patterns and forms of family organization
are to be found in Caribbean society.
The African Caribbean Family
Within the Afro-Caribbean population, women have been acknowledged as the backbone
of the family. Marriage is not considered necessary for procreation, and many women may
choose to have and raise children independently. Some of the resultant family formations are
adaptations to economic and social conditions. For this reason, there is a high prevalence of
family forms such as the matrifocal household, visiting unions and common-law union among
the Afro-Caribbean population.
In the lower classes, marriage usually occurs after the children have been born. European theorists
viewed the Caribbean family as ‘dysfunctional.’ Children are in many instances brought up by
relatives for the greater part of their lives. This may be because the relatives are childless, or
because these relatives may be able to offer the children better opportunities because of their
close proximity to educational facilities, or even to offer the children better living conditions. It
may also be as a result of the absence of one or both parents from the traditional family structure
144 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
for various reasons. In the latter instances, even though one or both parents are absent, they may
contribute financially to the child’s upbringing.
According to Herskovits (1964) and Frazier (1939), the lower-class Afro-Caribbean family was
‘maternal’ and frequently extended, and rates of illegitimacy were high. Herskovits (1964) argued
that the Africans brought with them cultural practices that they retained while enslaved on the
plantation system. One of these practices was polygamy. The affective bonding and structural
closeness was between a mother and her child or children. The husband or father was marginal
to the group. Herskovits maintained that this pattern of behaviour persisted in the Caribbean
family forms. It is for this reason that men are seen as having marginal roles within the family,
while mothers are seen as leaders and supporters of the household.
According to Oscar Lewis (1966) poverty impacts on the poor at three levels – the individual, the
family and the community – and becomes a cultural design for living. Males tend to abandon
their families when they are unable to fulfil their expected male function of financial provider for
the family. Hence, the responsibility of maintaining the family falls upon the female with regard
to both economics and nurturing.
Economics also plays a major role in family structure, and is by no means unimportant in the
Caribbean. Unemployment and poverty have in many instances been responsible for absentee
parents with one or both parents migrating to earn a living elsewhere, leaving the children behind
in the care of a relative, usually the grandparent. Some writers see this practice as having the
advantage of being part of a global network.
Edith Clarke (1957), in My Mother Who Fathered Me, stated that family structure in Jamaica was
dependent on economic conditions, social status and the stability of the relationship between
the couple. According to her, it was not considered proper for a man to propose marriage unless
he owned a house and was able to support a family. It was also considered derogatory for a wife
to ‘go out to work’. She indicated that men enjoyed talking about sexual prowess and it was a
status factor to have fathered children from different conquests. Generally, cohabitation prior to
marriage was not frowned upon as this was seen as providing evidence of stability between partners.
The East Indian Family in the Caribbean
In countries such as Trinidad and Tobago, and Guyana, where the East Indian population
is large, family patterns are very different from those of Africans. While the African family
structures are more matriarchal, East Indian families are patriarchal in nature. According to
Morton Klass (1961) this was because of their kinship ties. In Klass’ study of Central Trinidad,
an area with a predominantly East Indian population, he indicated that kinship relations were
of vital importance in the life of the East Indian. The first allegiance of the members of the
The Family | 145
East Indian family is to family, next of kin and those held in high esteem. As a result of strong
kinship ties, marriage is in accordance with the taboos involved in kinship. There are also strict
guidelines dictating marriage practices. For example, marriage is prohibited among any form
of kin to the family, such as a close relative, even first and second cousins.
In the traditional East Indian family, authority is in the hands of the older males in society, and
those who go against the wishes of elders will be ostracized from the community kin.
This ensures conformity. On account of kinship ties, the family structure is extended. Marriage
is strongly encouraged and is used to strengthen kinship ties.
Klass explained that the presence of the extended family is a feature of the East Indian heritage.
According to his study, women tend to marry young, and seldom engaged in visiting relationships,
as did African women, while in their father’s home. Family tended to have a strong patriarchal
influence. Klass attributed these patterns of behaviour to Hindu and Muslim cultures and
the fact that East Indians have retained or recreated them in the Caribbean, especially in
Trinidad and Tobago, Guyana and Suriname.
Changing Family Patterns
Family forms in the Caribbean have been undergoing changes. This has resulted in changing
family and kinship patterns that are emerging as a result of modernization and acculturation.
The Nuclear Family – This unit comprises husband, wife and child/children. It is more common
in the upper and middle classes of society. The traditional theorists have always viewed the
nuclear family as the ideal family structure. However, in the Caribbean there have been several
modifications to the nuclear family.
The Visiting Union – This is a relationship where the mother and her children live separately
from the male in the union. The male visits from time to time. R.T. Smith (1956) stated
that such relations are found in low-income African families. The woman, in order to support
herself and her children, may enter into a relationship with another man who provides her with
economic support. A large number of first-born children may be born to visiting relationships,
some of which may later lead to common-law unions.
Common-Law or Consensual Unions – Common-law relationships share many similarities
with the nuclear family, without being legally formalized. Spouses may be committed to each
other but because of personal, social and economic factors may not have been married legally.
This relationship is more common among the Afro-Caribbean communities. Among the early
East Indians it may have been common since, although they were married through their religious
ceremony, the respective laws of their territories did not legally recognize the marriage. In many
146 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
instances, these marriages may not have been registered in keeping with the law, although it may
have been socially sanctioned within their culture. As a result, many who were married according
to their ancestral religious traditions were not considered to be legally married.
Common-law relationships in many islands have implications for inheritance. In many Caribbean
countries, since these marriages were not formalized legally, individuals could not lay claim
to the estate of their deceased spouses. In some countries such as Trinidad and Tobago, Jamaica
and Barbados, the laws have now been amended to recognize the rights of individuals in such
unions. For instance, in Trinidad and Tobago, the Cohabitational Relationship Act was passed in
1998 which meant that, if certain conditions were met, the union was viewed as legal by the State.
The Caribbean Matrifocal Family – The household is female-headed and authority is in
the hands of the woman. There are no resident husbands, nor are there necessarily long-term
sexual relationships. These families are usually more affected by poverty than the nuclear
family and the extended family forms.
In the Caribbean, there is a kinship system that R.T. Smith (1973) described as bilateral. In
this system there is a separation of the domestic domain from the economic and political
domain. This leads to a division of labour by gender, in which women’s roles are in the domestic
domain where they focus on child-rearing and household chores. In this arena, the woman
is the focal point of the family and the role of the male, if he is present, is marginal. Power
and authority are in the hands of the female. This type of family structure is found mainly
among people of African origin and there are several explanations for its existence:
1. A consequence of African Retentions (Herskovits et al. 1947) – Africans brought with
them their cultural traits, one being the cultural pattern of polygamy. The father or
male has several wives and so his role in each home is marginal. According to Herskovits,
this has persisted in the Caribbean.
2. A consequence of the Plantation system of slavery (M.G. Smith 1965) – Matrifocality is
dominant in the Caribbean because of the legacy of slavery. Under slavery, stable family
life was impossible since males were sold in order to break the unions. As a result, males
tended to be marginal to the relationship and this trend has persisted after emancipation.
On the plantation, the men were often kept in separate living and sleeping quarters from
the women and children and this practice may have also influenced familial and kinship
patterns for the descendants of the enslaved population.
3. A consequence of Economic Factors (Oscar Lewis 1966) – Official statistics indicate that
over 35 per cent of families in the Caribbean are female-headed households. Matrifocality
is linked to the existence of poverty among lower-class Afro-Caribbean families.
The Family | 149
longer and the number of unmarried couples is also increasing. Some couples are also
choosing to remain childless.
The changing role of women affects the role of men in society. Women now also hold roles
previously held by males and they contribute financially to the household, so men no
longer have economic control in the home. This has resulted in men feeling alienated or
marginalized in the family. Some view the woman as neglecting her family responsibilities to pursue
careers. Because of the dominance of matrifocal families, women have long been acknowledged
as the backbone of Caribbean families. In the dominant culture of the region, marriage is not
considered necessary for procreation, so women may choose to raise children independently.
Today, the female-headed household, which was common in the Caribbean, is also incrris(i)8(b)aCg
150 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
•
Household size has fallen to an average of 3.7 persons in East Asia, 4.9 in Southeast
Asia, to 4.1 in the Caribbean, 5.7 in North Africa and to 2.8 in developed regions.
•
Age at first marriage has risen to the mid- to late twenties in all regions of the world,
often because of better educational and employment opportunities for women, as
well as increased life expectancy.
•
Women now have fewer children later in life.
•
Current fertility rates are 1.57 children per woman in developed regions, 3.1 in
less developed countries and 5.47 in t h e least developed countries.
Demographic Ageing
•
Lower fertility rates and higher life expectancy contribute to a larger share of older
people in the overall population.
•
Globally, the number of older people (60 years and over) will more than triple from
606 million to two billion by 2050.
•
In developed regions, 20 per cent of the population is older than 60 — by 2050 it
will have reached 33 per cent. In developing regions the share will increase from
eight per cent to 20 per cent.
•
Support ratios (number of working people in relation to retired people) have
been declining.
•
Ageing impacts on inter-generational solidarity, housing, social security systems,
care giving and health costs.
Increase in Migration
•
175 million people (three per cent of world population) reside outside their country
of birth; there were 20 million refugees in 2001.
•
Violence, discrimination, natural disasters and the hope of better economic opportunities
have been the main reasons driving migration.
•
Migration can cause major stress on family life because of cultural, ethnic, racial
and religious differences and a lack of integration.
•
Seasonal and internal migration of men contributes to a higher number of female-headed
households around the world.
•
Trafficking in and sexual exploitation of women and children have increased and
have become a major part of organized crime.
The Family | 151
The HIV/AIDS Pandemic
•
Thirty four million people live with HIV/AIDS today (www.cdc.org)
•
HIV/AIDS affects the most productive members of society, who have often just
started their own families.
•
Care for infected relatives, coping with the loss of numerous family members, and
the increase in the number of orphans, cause major stress on families and societies.
•
Family structures have changed to include increasing numbers of adolescent
and grandparent-headed households in some regions of Africa.
Effects of the Four Trends
These trends challenge the ability of the family to fulfill the basic functions of production,
reproduction, and socialization, as well as to satisfy the needs of family members regarding
health, nutrition, shelter, physical and emotional care, and personal development.
Policy Considerations
•
Any social policy should have in mind the above-mentioned trends and the changing
needs of families.
•
Best national practices should be studied when designing a new approach to family
policies.
•
Families should be at the centre of any future social policy development.
Source: http://www.un.org/esa/socdev/family/majortrends.htm
Some Issues Facing the Contemporary Caribbean Family
Domestic Violence
Statistics show that the rate of domestic violence has been increasing in most Caribbean
territories. Although all ethnic groups and social classes are affected, it appears that the lower
socio-economic groups are the most vulnerable. Also, women and children are most often
the victims, due to their dependence on the male adult breadwinners. Women with less skills
and education are usually less independent, have fewer options, and therefore tend to remain in
abusive relationships longer. Also, teenagers growing up in homes where they lack adequate
love, care and attention may be lured into early sexual encounters, thereby leading to teenage
pregnancies. Such youngsters may subsequently end up in abusive relationships themselves.
152 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Rhoda Reddock, cited in the Jamaica Observer December 4, 2006, states some reasons for the
pervasive problem of domestic violence. These include:
1 . the increasing violence in the society in general;
2 . the result of the normalization of violence in the US dominated media;
3 . the increase in drug trafficking and the accompanying gun violence;
4 . the high demands for conspicuous consumption, characteristic of the current neo-liberal
economic context; and
5 . alcohol and drug addiction with inadequate facilities for prevention or treatment.
In Jamaica in 2004, domestic fights leading to homicides ran a close second among the list
of top motives for murder with 29 per cent or some 1,401 of the total number of murders for
the given period.
Elsie le Franc of the University of the West Indies, speaking in October 2006 stated that HIV/
AIDS and interpersonal violence are currently the biggest killers of those under 19 years of age.
Jamaica Observer Monday, December 4, 2006
According to Diana Mahabir-Wyatt, Chairperson of the Trinidad and Tobago Coalition against
Domestic Violence, one out of every four women in Trinidad and Tobago was a victim of
some sort of physical, sexual, psychological or financial abuse. She has labelled the country as
the domestic violence capital of the Caribbean.
Trinidad Guardian October 4, 2004 http://www.guardian.co.tt/
Similarly, statistics provided by the Barbados Police Research and Development Department
show that, in 2004, ‘the number of crimes reported, investigated and determined to be cases of
domestic violence’ was 489, which was a decrease from the 1,406 counted in 2002. However,
Country Reports on Human Rights Practices for 2005 notes that even though Barbados has laws
and programmes designed to protect women, abuse and violence against women remain ‘significant
social problems’ in the country. And according to the Guyana Government Information Agency
(2008), domestic violence is the most pervasive form of interpersonal violence in Guyana
Child Abuse
This refers to ‘intentional acts that result in physical or emotional harm to children’ and includes
a wide range of activities. Abuse may range from acts of physical aggression towards the child by
parents or other adults, to the neglect of the child’s basic needs.
The Family | 153
As is the case with domestic violence generally, all ethnic groups and social classes are affected by
child abuse, but the lower socio-economic categories tend to be the most vulnerable.
The Types of Child Abuse
1. Physical abuse includes deliberate acts of violence, including whipping, scolding or use of
force generally so as to inflict temporary or long-term hurt or discomfort on the child.
2. Sexual abuse includes a wide range of activities. It could range from exposing children to
pornography, using them for pornographic ends, and getting them involved in sexual activity.
Sexual activity ranges in seriousness from unacceptable touching and fondling to actual sexual
acts committed against minors.
3. Emotional abuse including verbal abuse, confinement, and isolation
4. Neglect is another common form of abuse. Physical neglect is the inadequate provision for
the child’s basic physical needs, whereas emotional neglect occurs when a parent or caretaker
fails to meet a child’s need for affection and comfort. Another form of neglect involves failure
to meet a child’s basic education needs, such as denying access to educational opportunity.
According to the National Child Abuse and Neglect Data System, more than 900,000 children
in the United States were victims of child abuse or neglect in 2006. Among these cases, 64
per cent involved neglect, 16 per cent involved physical abuse, 9 per cent involved sexual
abuse, 7 per cent involved emotional or psychological maltreatment, and 15 per cent involved
other maltreatment, such as abandonment.
See: http://www.ndacan.cornell.edu/
Causes of Child Abuse
According to the Pan American Health Organization (PAHO), child abuse results from a complex
combination of personal, social, and cultural factors. These include:
1. History of child abuse
2. Substance abuse
3. Witnessing abuse
4. Education level
154 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
5. Low socio-economic level
6. Lack of social support.
Source: http://www.paho.org/English/AD/DPC/NC/child-abuse-lac.htm
At this website, there is also a very useful PowerPoint presentation on child abuse entitled
Child and Youth Health: Action, Research and Advocacy based on a presentation at the eighth
Canadian Conference on International Health, in November 2001. This presentation has
many useful recommendations to deal with the problem.
In Guyana, according to the ‘Voices of Children’ Report (2005), 86 per cent of 14–17-year-old
girls, 50 per cent of 10–13-year-old girls and 6 per cent of 6–9-year-old girls have been sexually
harassed. In Jamaica in 2006, out of a total of 1,389 reported sexual offences, close to a
third were committed on children younger than 16. Women and girls remain silent victims of
most major crimes in Jamaica as only 20 per cent of rapes get reported to the police. In the
Eastern Caribbean a nine-country survey of Caribbean school age children found that about 11
per cent girls and 9 per cent of boys reported that they had been sexually abused including
through incest. In the same survey, 40 per cent of the girls reported they had their first sexual
experience forced upon them. Twenty per cent of adolescent girls in Jamaica reported the same.
Source: www.unicef.org/jamaica/press_release_abuse.doc
The increasing violence in the Caribbean takes a high toll on its children. In Jamaica for example,
over the last two years close to 100 children were murdered each year. Data from the Belize
report, ‘The Impact of Crime and Violence of Children and Adolescents (2005),’ indicate that
children and adolescents continue to be a major target for crime and violence where 37 per
cent of boys and 43 per cent of girls felt unsafe in their communities.
UNICEF calls upon:
•
Policymakers and legislators to review legislation put in place to protect children with
an aim to stiffen penalties and strengthen enforcement and monitoring mechanisms.
•
Educators to make a difference by ensuring that children know about their rights and
how to protect themselves from abuse through appropriate child-friendly materials
and by reporting suspected cases of abuse.
•
Health providers to ensure that services are made more youth-friendly and provide
necessary confidentiality and comfort to help young victims of abuse.
The Family | 155
•
Parents to learn alternative ways to discipline their children without resorting to
and teaching them violence.
•
Community leaders to act as watchdogs and provide unequivocal leadership against
child abuse in their communities.
UNICEF also very strongly and specifically reiterates previous calls on gang leaders to leave
children out of their cycle of killings and reprisals, and to cease from recruiting children into
criminal activities.
See http://www.unicef.org/lac/media_10551.htm
Teenage Pregnancy
In most instances, teenage pregnancies are unplanned and occur out of wedlock or some other
socially acceptable arrangement. A 1993 study in Jamaica found that nearly 45 per cent of
young women aged 15–24 had at least once been pregnant. Seventy-seven per cent of those
pregnancies were mistimed or unwanted (Morris et al. 1995).
Persons below the poverty line usually have a history of inadequate health care, poor nutrition,
and lower levels of education. And since teenage pregnancy is more common among the lower
socio-economic groups in society, such teenagers usually get inadequate prenatal care, thereby
exposing them to a higher risk of pregnancy-related complications. It is also more likely for the
baby to be born prematurely and have a low birth weight. Teenage pregnancies therefore present
many health risks both to the mother and the child and could even become life-threatening.
Younger mothers face an increased risk of maternal mortality because their bodies are not yet
mature enough to bear children.
In many countries, teenage pregnancy carries a social stigma when it occurs outside of marriage,
especially if the girl is still at school. Such stigmatization and labelling present additional
challenges for the teenager and her parents. In many countries, the problem is further exacerbated,
as the girl does not return to school, thereby reducing her chances of a proper formal education.
As a result, she will continue to face a low standard of living. In Colombia, 46 per cent of young
women with less than seven years of schooling have their first child by age 20, compared to
19 per cent of women with seven or more years of education (Guttmacher, 1996).
Rates of teenage pregnancy vary significantly. Rates as high as 143 per 1,000 can be found
in some sub-Saharan African countries. In the western industrialized countries, the United
States has the highest rate of teenage pregnancy. The teen birth rate in the United States
increased in 26 of the 50 states in 2006, representing almost every region of the country,
according to one government report. According to Medline Plus, the US Centers for
160 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
its role and significance. They seek to understand and explain the impact of religious beliefs at
both the micro and macro levels of society. At the micro level, sociologists examine the impact
of religious beliefs on individuals and at the macro level, they examine the effects of religion on
society and the effects of society on religion.
According to Tischler (2002), religion may be defined as a ‘system of beliefs, practices, and
philosophical values shared by a group of people; it defines the sacred, helps explain life, and
offers salvation from the problems of human existence’ (380).
A similar view is shared by Giddens (2001); who states that religion involves ‘a set of symbols,
invoking feelings of reverence or awe, and is linked to rituals or ceremonials (such as church
services) engaged in by a community of believers’ (531).
Features of Religion
According to Tischler (2002, 380), all religions share common sets of elements such as prayer
and ritual, belief and organization.
Prayer and Ritual
Religious rituals consist of repeated formalized social behaviours that communicate sacred
symbolic meaning to its members (Scupin 2006). Examples of religious rituals are the Catholic
Mass, and the Hindu cremation. Religious symbols are communicated both verbally and
behaviourally. Religious rituals convey unique meanings to its members and they may be
interpreted differently by members of society.
Religious rituals may also consist of private acts such as prayer. Since religions include beliefs
concerning the supernatural and forces that are outside of the explanation of human beings,
prayer serves as medium of communication with these unknown forces and the supernatural.
Prayer may be performed quietly or aloud and may include formalized bodily postures and
gestures.
Both rituals and prayers are reflective of the values and beliefs of the particular religion.
Additionally, these rituals and prayers develop according to the culture of the society. For
example, some Muslims in Trinidad and Tobago practice the ritual of a 40 day ceremony
following the death of a relative; however, in other cultures such as in the Middle East where
Islam is also practised, this ritual is not customary. This shows that the same religion can be
expressed differently in terms of its rituals and prayers depending on the society and culture
in which it is practised.
Religion | 161
Belief
Another feature of all religions is a belief system about the supernatural. An important function
of religion is to provide explanations for different aspects of life such as birth, growth, success,
failure and death. These beliefs inform the official religious doctrines which translate into
rituals. Beliefs vary across all religious persuasions. In some religions, it is believed that the powers
of healing can be transmitted from God through certain individuals, for instance, Pentecostal
pastors lay their hands on the forehead of their followers whereby divinity would be channelled
to the afflicted persons to heal them.
Organization
Many religions are arranged along the line of organizational structures. These organizational
structures tend to be hierarchical with religious leaders at the helm. The organization serves
to foster and solidify the relationship between members of the religion. The organization
of the religion also serves as a means of promoting the religion to the wider community.
Types of Religion
Religion is often classified into four types (Tischer 2002). These are:
•
Supernaturalism
•
Animism
•
Theism
•
Abstract ideals
Supernaturalism
Supernaturalism implies the existence of supernatural forces that have the potential to influence
human behaviour. These supernatural forces can influence both animate and inanimate objects.
These may include people, trees, animals and places. These forces tend to function on their own
will.
The belief in the supernatural is common in Melanesia, which comprises areas of the South Pacific
such as Papau New Guinea. Melanesians believe in mana, a sacred impersonal force existing in
the universe. Mana can inhabit both animate and inanimate objects.
162 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Animism
Animism is the belief in spirits or ghosts that are believed to coexist with humans in the world.
Like the belief in the supernatural, the spirits associated with animism can inhabit both animate
beings such as humans and animals and inanimate things such as water, and the wind.
The spirits are usually associated with either good or evil. Animistic beliefs are not limited
to ‘primitive’ cultures but are also found in varying degrees in many mainstream religions. In
medieval Europe, witches and sorcerers were deemed to be possessed by evil spirits.
Theism
Theism is the belief in the existence of gods and goddesses who shape human behaviour. Gods
are viewed as being omnipotent and worthy of human reverence in the form of worship. Theism
can be either polytheistic or monotheistic.
Polytheism is the belief in many gods. Each god commands strength or force over a particular
aspect of life in the universe such as birth, death or success. Generally, overriding control and
influence reside with one god or goddess over the rest.
Ancient Greeks practised polytheism, with Gods and Goddesses such as Ares, Posiedon and
Aphrodite controlling war, the sea, and love, respectively.
Monotheism is the belief in the existence of one god. There are only three monotheistic religions
in the world (Giddens 2001; Tischler 2002). These are Judaism, Christianity and Islam, and are
sometimes referred to as the Abrahamic faiths since their leaders are biological descendants of
Abraham. They all believe in the supremacy of one powerful being.
Abstract Ideals
Unlike religions that focus on the belief in the supernatural, spirits or divine being, some religions
stress the importance of abstract ideals. Abstract ideals focus upon correct thinking and behaviour
that facilitate the achievement of personal goals. The followers of religions that focus on abstract
ideals do not subscribe to the manipulation of spirits and worship of god or gods. Buddhism
is an example of a religion that is based on abstract ideals as it places emphasis on meditation as
opposed to worship of any god or belief in spirits.
Religion | 163
Forms of Religious Organization
Church
Churches are religious organizations that have become institutionalized. They are supported
by society’s norms and values and have become an active part of the affairs of society. Their
engagement in society does not necessarily mean that they have compromised their core
values and beliefs. A prime example of a church is Roman Catholicism. Characteristics of a
church include:
•
it tends to be large, with inclusive membership;
•
it usually supports the status quo, and is in low tension with the norms of the society
in which it is found;
•
it is well-established, with a bureaucratic structure and a hierarchical ordering of
positions; and
•
has its affairs managed by trained clergy and other paid officials.
Denomination
A denomination is an organization that bears several features of a church. Denominations
tend to exhibit features of adjustment to the wider society. They support and are supported
by the institutional structures of society and they endorse and embrace the basic values and
beliefs of the society. Examples of denominations are the Lutherans and Methodists. Some of
the characteristics of denominations are:
•
formal bureaucratic structures
•
hierarchical structure
•
official creeds specifying religious beliefs
•
large in size
•
established facilities
•
predominantly middle-class membership.
Sect
These are religious organizations that reject the social environment in which they reside. Examples
of these are the Shakers, who reject sexual relations, and nineteenth-century Mormonism, which
rejected monogamy. Some of the characteristics of a sect are:
164 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
•
has a small, exclusive membership;
•
is usually in high tension with society;
•
is usually formed as a result of a split from a church;
•
has a negative relationship with the other institutions in society;
•
claims religious legitimacy;
•
has members who are normally converted, rather than born into the faith;
•
is dogmatic and fundamentalist, believing in literal interpretations of scriptures;
•
has no formal organization;
•
is usually intolerant of other groups;
•
is usually short-lived but may grow in size and eventually become a denomination.
Cult
A cult is a religious organization that is independent of the religious traditions of a society. Cult
movements tend to arise in times of distress and rapid change where established religions are
unable to satisfy the questions of individuals and members of society as a whole. Examples
of cults are Scientology, and the Hare Krishna Movement.
Some of the characteristics of a cult are:
•
introduces a new, different religious tradition in the society and is usually led by a
charismatic leader;
•
is very innovative, with new ideas, new beliefs, and combinations of beliefs;
•
if successful, can over time become a new church or sect within the mainstream
tradition;
•
is loosely organized and usually short-lived;
•
rejects the norms and institutions of larger society for a purer form;
•
has few coherent doctrines, makes little demand for moral purity, and rather, focuses
on the personal benefits;
•
usually appeals to the lower socio-economic groups;
•
may make use of astrology, black magic, or transcendental meditation.
Religion | 165
Activity 6.1
1 . a. Give two differences between a church and a sect.
b . Give two differences between a church and a cult.
c.
Give two examples of churches in the Caribbean.
d. Give two examples of cults in the Caribbean.
2. State whether the following statements are true or false
a.
A church is a large group organized for religious purposes, with a hierarchy of
officials.
b.
A sect is usually larger than a church.
c.
Polytheism is the worship of one god.
d. Monotheism does not exist in the Caribbean.
e.
Most cults have belief systems that seem exotic and unconventional.
SOCIOLOGICAL EXPLANATIONS OF RELIGION
Sociologists study religion and its relationship to society. Functionalists examine the functional
aspects of religion as it relates to social life whilst Conflict theorists examine religion as a
means of controlling the working class and reinforcing the interest of the ruling class. The
views of various theorists will be outlined below.
The Functionalist Approach
This approach examines religion in terms of fulfilling several important needs of society.
Functionalists are concerned with the contribution of religion towards establishing social
solidarity and stability in society.
Emile Durkheim
In the Elementary Forms of Religious Life (1912), Durkheim states that the defining components
of all religions are the separation of human experiences into the profane and sacred. The profane
refers to all the taken for granted day to day routines and activities. The profane tends to be
known, controllable and malleable. In contrast, the sacred are objects and events that are held
in awe and high veneration. The sacred is not known or controlled.
166 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Functions of Religion
Durkheim believed that religion was functional to both individuals and society as a whole.
Individuals benefited from the rituals and beliefs that surrounded religious activities, which
provided a means of comfort and solace especially in times of need and hardship. For example, in
times of bereavement, individuals derive solace and peace from engaging in the rituals associated
with acts of burials and/or cremation. The performance of the various religious rituals helps
to nullify the impact of the loss of the deceased. In other situations, participation in religious
activities offers a sense of belonging to individuals in the form of moral cohesion.
At the societal level, Durkheim argued that religion provided the foundation for the promotion
and reinforcement of the main values and norms of the society. These values and norms
rise above just being usual ways of doing things to becoming the moral code of behaviour in
the society. These values and norms become sacred. Therefore, he sees religion as part of the
way of life of a society that helps to maintain cultural traditions. Society will only continue
to survive if its people share common beliefs. Therefore, for Durkheim, the worship of God
is a disguise for the worship of society.
Malinowski’s Theory
Like Durkheim, Bronislaw Malinowski (1948) sees religion as reinforcing social norms and values
and promoting social solidarity.
He differs from Durkheim in that
i.
he does not see religion as reflecting society as a whole; and
ii. he does not see religious rituals as the worship of society.
Malinowski believed that there are specific areas of social life where religion is important. These
are usually situations of emotional stress that threaten social solidarity. Anxiety and tension
tend to disrupt social life. Situations such as birth, marriage and death cause great anxiety.
It is religion that helps individuals to deal with these problems. At a funeral ceremony, for
example, the social group unites to support the bereaved family. Rituals reduce anxiety by
providing confidence and a feeling of control, especially in situations that are unpredictable.
Religion also offers explanations for the occurrence of traumatic events and therefore, serves as
a coping mechanism for adherents.
Religion | 167
Criticisms
Malinowski has exaggerated the importance of religious rituals in helping people to cope with
situations of stress and uncertainty. The rituals are related to the maintenance of prestige in that
society, and have little to do with cementing solidarity or dealing with uncertainty and danger.
Talcott Parsons
Parsons believed that religion through its belief system provides the foundation upon which
social order and stability can be achieved in society. In other words, religion contributes to
the functional prerequisites of society.
Like Durkheim, Parsons believes that religion can provide solace and comfort to members in
society when they are befallen by unexpected sudden events such as death. Parsons believed that
religion through its belief system can provide a means by which people can adjust and adapt
to such events. Additionally, Parsons states that religion provides a mechanism for coming to
terms with events of ‘uncertainty’, for example, the questions that would appear on a sociology
examination paper.
Parsons also believed that religion helps to provide meaning to life. Religion serves as a social
antidote to some of the social inequalities in society. It helps to provide ‘rational answers’
to some of the concerns people may have about their social condition.
Religion, therefore, contributes to the acceptance of people’s situations and ensures social
order and stability.
Conflict Perspective
Karl Marx
Marx saw religion as a social drug that nullified the negative effects of the exploitative relationship
between the owners of the means of production (capitalists/ bourgeoisie) and the owners of labour
(working class/ proletariat). For Marx, religion serves to reinforce and legitimize the position of
the capitalists by negating proactive actions on the part of the afflicted working class. Religion
is therefore seen as an illusion.
Marx believed that religion serves the social function of masking the foundation of power and
exploitation in a class-based society. This masking of ‘reality’ precludes the development of class
consciousness that would reveal that the world is produced and shaped by human effort, rather
than by divine forces. Religion also serves as a means of self-alienation, although it is a comfort
168 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
valve for the oppression experienced through the conflict of economic interests. Therefore, the
exploited find comfort in what is promised in the hereafter for enduring material deprivation.
As Marx noted, religion is the ‘opiate of the masses’; it numbs the pain experienced from life in
a capitalist society, making it less likely for class consciousness to be developed and by extension,
minimizes the possibility of revolt on the part of the working class.
Feminist Theories of Religion
Feminist theories, like Marxist theory, view religion as an instrument of domination and oppression.
However, they see religion as a product of patriarchy – rather than of capitalism – where men
oppress women.
1. Women were not always subordinate in most religions. In the Middle East, Asia and parts
of Europe, archaeologists have uncovered symbols of the Great Mother Goddess. There
were few early symbols of gods as men. However, the status of women in religion declined
with time.
2. Jean Holm argued that, although many religions stress equality between men and women,
in practice, women have been given subordinate roles. Women’s second-class status is
often related to women’s sexuality. For example, menstruation and childbirth are universally
regarded as ‘polluting’.
3. Religion can be used by the oppressors (men) to control the oppressed (women) and it
also serves as a way of compensating women for their second-class status by a s s u r i n g
t h e m o f equality in heaven. This helps to maintain a status quo in which women are
unequal.
4. Religion became patriarchal through the misinterpretation of religious beliefs by men. As
monotheism became prominent, religion became oppressive to women. Therefore, the
only way women can improve their position is by seeking their own liberation.
Max Weber
In The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism (1905), Weber argued that the Protestant
Reformation paved the way for the development of industrial capitalism in Western Europe.
He identified three aspects of Protestantism as being important features: predestination, the
concept of a calling and rationalism. Predestination relates to individuals searching for the
signs of being saved or damned by God. The concept of calling emphasizes the need for
hard work to please God. The final aspect of Protestantism is rationalism, which is a means
of salvation.
Religion | 169
Activity 6.2
Religion | 171
Additionally, if there is agreement on a definition of religious beliefs, does the secularization
thesis argue that religion is weaker today than in the past?
Activity 6.3
1. Examine the view that secularization is not taking place in the Caribbean today.
2. Assess Weber’s claim that scientific rationality will replace religious ideology in modern
industrialized societies.
3. Carry out a study of church attendance figures over time at any church, temple, or mosque
in your area to determine whether attendance is on the decline. Suggest reasons for this.
RELIGION IN THE CARIBBEAN
Religion has been used as a tool in the conquest and colonization of the Americas, Asia, Africa
and Australia (Hylton 2002). The conquerors used religion as a means to reinforce their military
prowess by ‘debasing and vulgarizing the culture of the subject peoples’ (Hylton 2002).
Christianity through Roman Catholicism and Protestantism was used by the Europeans to
promote their culture over those who were conquered and exploited such as the Amerindians
and African slaves.
According to Hylton (2002), religion is deep-seated in the psyche and social behaviour of
Caribbean people. Religion is manifested in both material and non-material cultural aspects
such as talking, dancing, singing, eating, and drinking. Religion also plays an important role
in the political arena. The
...historical role played by religion in the struggles of the people has been
so influential that any socio-political analysis or any contemporary political
movement that fails to take this into account will undoubtedly be committing
a grave error (Hylton 2002).
The heterogeneous nature of Caribbean societies and the inevitable interaction among the
constituent groups have resulted in many instances of syncretism. Religion in the Caribbean
therefore changed and adapted to allow various groups to survive under what was described
as ‘acculturative conditions’. Borrowing from other religions, and other instances of
interculturation, seem to indicate that relationships among religions were sometimes cordial.
Religion | 175
and Indians constitute 40 per cent of the population (CSO National Census Report 2000,
Trinidad and Tobago). The Hindu communities built places of worship (mandirs) where
they came together to worship and re-established their religious festivals a n d c e r e m o n i e s
such as Divali, Kartik Nahan and Phagwa. In Trinidad and Tobago, Divali is a public holiday.
Any discussion of the Hindu faith, whether in India or in the Caribbean must consider the
tremendous variety of practices and beliefs that are included under the umbrella of Hinduism.
There are different sects of Hindus, the major group being the Sanatanist Hindus (Sanatan
Dharma Maha Sabha) but other groups include the Arya Samaj, the Kabir Panth and the Seunarini
Panth. These sects have certain important variations in rituals such as funerals, weddings, Divali
and other ceremonies.
Islam in the Caribbean
The early Muslims that would have entered the Caribbean as early as in the sixteenth and
seventeenth centuries were then enslaved (Mustapha 2004; Buckridan 1996). These Muslims
came mainly from the Mandingo, Fulani and Hausa tribes. The survival and transmission of
the faith was precluded by the harsh conditions of the plantation system, which viewed any
alien practices as ‘heathen’.
The end of slavery coincided with the second major arrival of Muslims in the Caribbean through
Indentureship labour system. According to Mustapha (2004), approximately 15 per cent of the
indentured labourers were Muslims. The conditions under Indentureship and the efforts of
conversion of the missionary movements resulted in the Muslim Indians developing great
tenacity, resistance and resolve towards their culture and religious practices. This resolve
and resistance was manifested according to Mustapha (2004) in an attitude that was ‘very
defensive and introverted, with an emotional attachment to many traditions.’
Some of the traditions of the Trinidad Muslim have been influenced by contact with Hindus
on the voyage to the New World and the villages in which they lived.
In terms of the wider Caribbean it is noted by Buckridan (1996) that ‘the Muslim community in
the Caribbean today consists not only of descendants of indentured Indians but also of enslaved
Africans who have retained their roots. In addition, there are a few Middle East immigrants who
came, motivated by commercial and other interests.’ Muslims can be found throughout the
Anglophone Caribbean such as Jamaica (which now has five mosques), Barbados, Guyana, St
Vincent, and Saint Lucia.
176 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Orisha/Shangoism in Trinidad and Tobago
During slavery, the practice of all ancestral African rituals was forbidden. From the 1830s
until 1867, there was a significant influx of Yoruba from Nigeria into Trinidad. This, together
with the complete emancipation of slaves in Trinidad in 1838, provided the context for the early
evolution of this syncretized religious form. During this time, former slaves combined traditional
African religious beliefs with elements of Christianity. The faith that emerged was referred
to as the Orisha religion (also called Shango by some). It is therefore a combination of elements
of Yoruba traditional religion, Catholicism and the Baptist faith. Ceremonies were conducted
in secret and the Orisha statues were camouflaged in their altars by putting Catholic saints
in front of them.
Over the years the cover up became an integrated part of the faith (syncretism). The Orisha
religion in Trinidad and Tobago is therefore an African-derived religion that incorporates the
beliefs, rituals and culture of several religions in its worship.
Vodun (Vodoo) in Haiti
Vodun is a religious syncretism involving traditional African religion and Catholicism.
When the slaves were brought to the plantation, the Code Noir prescribed baptism and
instruction in the Roman Catholic religion. The slaves did not understand this new religion
and so continued to rely upon old tribal beliefs for spiritual needs.
The Dahomean religion, which formed the basis for Vodun, is rich in subtleties and refinements.
However, much was lost or changed in transition, and as such, Vodun developed as a synthesis
of older beliefs, modified and adapted to New World conditions.
Vodun includes a wide range of ritual practices and attitudes, which regulate, for most of the
people of Haiti, the crucial intercourse with a supernatural world of ancestor spirits and personified
forces. The harsh conditions of slavery and the suppression of the slaves’ culture provided
the context in which Vodun evolved.
Kumina/Cumina/Pocomania in Jamaica
Of all religious movements in Jamaica, Kumina is probably the most African. This is evident
in the dancing, drumming, spirit possession and in some respects, the belief. This is a more
syncretic possession cult that has developed in Jamaica from the surviving forms of African
religions filtered through the Great Revival of 1860–62. ‘Pocomania’ (a little madness) is merely
the outsider’s misunderstanding of the forms of possession and of their value.
Religion | 177
The Kumina cult has been in decline since the advent of the Rastafarian movement and the new
Pentecostal churches from the USA. However, observances continue in the interior of the island,
and have been taken up both as tourist attractions and by those seeking to discover and foster
authentic Jamaican cultural forms. Kumina has also provided material for the National Dance
Theatre Company (NDTC).
Activity 6.4
1. What is meant by religious syncretism?
2. Give two examples of syncretism in the Caribbean.
3. To what extent does religious syncretism demonstrate the process of creolization?
Rastafarianism in Jamaica
Through the Universal Negro Improvement Association (UNIA) and African Communities
League (ACL) led by Marcus Garvey, the stage was set for the Rastafarian movement to evolve.
Garvey’s goal was to raise the pan-African consciousness by apprising blacks of their African
past. Garvey preached that black people should return to Africa (Ethiopia) to reunite with their
ancestors. Garvey also prophesied that a black king would one day be crowned in Africa.
This prophecy was fulfilled in the 1930s with the crowning of Ras Tafari (crowned Emperor
Haile Selassie of Ethiopia).
The Rastafarian movement therefore began to take shape around 1930 amidst the negative
mental psyche that had developed amongst the African community ( Chevannes 1998).
Today, Rastafari is found in many countries. It is no longer confined to the grassroots members
of society. Persons of all strata in society now follow its belief system and body of rituals.
Rastafarians have promoted an interest in African culture and history and communication with
African people everywhere.
To this end, Chevannes (1998) notes the following features of Rastafari:
•
the religion must be included as part of African-derived religions in Jamaica and
the wider Caribbean;
•
Rasta is a world view movement that emphasizes a belief system and
consciousness; and
•
the religion is more of a cultural movement than a millenarian one that exhibits a
political character.
178 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Religious prejudice, discrimination and intolerance in the
Caribbean
Although religion is often seen as a source of good and unity, there are many negative associations
with the concept of religion. Some of the ways in which religion can cause problems is by leading
people to become intolerant, prejudiced and discriminatory. First, it is important to define these
terms:
•
Religious prejudice is a preconceived notion or view regarding a religion that is not
based on reason or experience.
•
Religious discrimination is the unjust treatment of a person or group based on their
religious persuasion.
•
Religious intolerance is unwillingness to accept religious views, practices or beliefs that
vary from one’s own religion.
The unique history of the Caribbean has led to a diverse population where men and women of
different cultures, religions and backgrounds live together in one region. However, because of
the multi-cultural and multi-ethnic nature of Caribbean societies, it is evident that differences
in opinions and beliefs can sometimes lead to animosity and antagonism. Although religious
tolerance is embedded as a cornerstone of the diverse Caribbean societies, more mainstream
religions tend to cast aspersions on other unconventional religious groups, which vary from their
religious dogma. For example, monotheistic religions may denounce or condemn polytheistic
religions because it goes against their central belief of one God.
During the colonial period, non-Christian religions (such as Hinduism, Islam, Orisha and Vodun)
were frowned upon and deemed as uncivilized and unrefined. Even today, there are many negative
stereotypes associated with some religions, such as Afro-Caribbean religions, because of a lack of
understanding or religious prejudice towards these practices. Oftentimes, individuals who belong
to non-Christian religions are often labelled as ‘outsiders’ in the overwhelmingly Christian region.
However, in more recent times, there have been many attempts to reduce religious persecution
and intolerance. For example, in 2008 in Trinidad and Tobago, the country’s highest award (the
Trinity Cross) was renamed, following a landmark judgment in the courts which deemed it as
discriminatory to other religions, as both the Cross and the Trinity are pre-eminent Christian
symbols worldwide. The new award (the Order of the Republic of Trinidad and Tobago) was
deemed to be a more inclusive award for a multi-religious society, such as Trinidad and Tobago.
There have also been other attempts at religious tolerance; for instance, some Caribbean states
have promoted discontinuation of Christian prayers at government schools in recognition that
students of many different religious backgrounds attend these schools. Even at national functions
Religion | 179
and ceremonies, different religious leaders are often called to offer prayers in an effort to endorse
religious tolerance.
Although attempts have been made to reduce religious intolerance, discriminatory practices still
continue today. For example, in the Caribbean, there have been instances of educational institutions
and even employers with policies that discourage or prohibit the dreadlocks hairstyle associated
with the Rastafarian religion. In some countries, there are also government institutions that overtly
oppose of the wearing of Muslim attire such as the hijab and burqa. Following the devastating
earthquake in Haiti in 2010, there have been accusations against several Christian charities who
have denied Vodun followers access to the donations solely because of their religious affiliation;
all of these are stark examples of religious discrimination and prejudice. These practices will have
negative effects on these groups who will feel isolated and discriminated against simply because
of their religious persuasion.
Conclusion
In this section, a brief outline of some religions found in the Caribbean was presented. One may
gather that the various immigrant cultures that formed part of Caribbean society introduced
their religions to the region. These faiths have inevitably undergone all the transformational
processes experienced by other aspects of culture to produce the multiplicity of religious
forms that exists today. In the contemporary Caribbean, most of the religions of the world are
to be found, but they have undergone some creolization and adaptation.
Activity 6.5
1. For any named religion found in the Caribbean, examine
i.
its emergence;
ii. its basic belief system;
iii. its most important rituals.
2. Compare the dynamics and beliefs of an ‘imported’ religion with those of one which
‘emerged’in the Caribbean.
3. Account for the religious diversity that exists in the Caribbean today.
4. Demonstrate the processes of acculturation and interculturation among the religions
of the Caribbean.
CHAPTER 7
EDUCATION
OBJECTIVES
Upon completion of this chapter, students should be able to:
1 . explain the characteristics, functions and transformations of educational systems in the
Caribbean;
2 . evaluate different theoretical perspectives commonly used for the analysis of education;
3 . discuss the issues associated with educational systems in the Caribbean.
CONTENT
i.
Theoretical Perspectives: Consensus, Conflict and Interactionist.
ii. The development of education in the Caribbean:
a.
Establishment and expansion (post-emancipation, post-independence);
b. Decolonization and indigenization;
c.
Globalization.
iii. Problems in Caribbean education, for example, student delinquency and dropout rates,
male academic under-achievement, and lack of human and material resources.
INTRODUCTION
Education is the social institution guiding a society’s transmission of knowledge – including
basic facts, job skills, and also cultural norms and values – to its members (Macionis 2003).
Sometimes knowledge may be transmitted in an unplanned and unstructured manner, without
any fixed programme of study or evaluation. This constitutes informal education. Such learning
may take place in family settings, religious services, and visits to places of interest, recreational
Education | 181
activities or even by watching television. The transfer of knowledge often takes place through
observation or social interaction.
In traditional societies, most forms of education took place through informal mechanisms involving
the family, tribe or clan. As these societies increased in size and became more complex,
the family was no longer capable of providing the specialized knowledge required to prepare
youngsters to function as adult members of society. In industrial societies, education transmits
the knowledge necessary for adult life and specialized careers.
Educational systems have had to respond to the changes and developments in society, particularly
in the economic sphere. As societies have evolved from traditional to modern, educational systems
have had to change accordingly. Institutions such as schools provide formal education.
The formal system of education comprising schools, colleges and other institutions created and
legally sanctioned for the process of deliberate instruction, is governed by a standardized
curriculum and is delivered by trained professionals – teachers, lecturers, and professors.
In contemporary society, which is highly technologically-driven, in addition to basic literacy
and numerical skills, individuals are also being exposed to technical skills that have been brought
about by developments in information technology (IT). This highlights the fact that, as with
all social institutions, the education system as a vehicle for transmission of skills and knowledge,
must adapt to the changing needs of society and its members. Education is also responsible for
providing individuals with what they need in order to function in society. Thus, in addition to
providing job-related skills, the educational system is also responsible for inculcating life
skills in members of society. To meet this need, some educational institutions are now providing
technical and vocational training in addition to the academic subjects. Opportunities are also
provided to enable individuals to match their knowledge with specific career objectives. To
this end, many educational institutions both public and private have been forging close
linkages with public and private sector corporate bodies.
Formal education is a key institution in modern society, as it reflects and transmits the values,
norms and culture of society. Individuals are prepared, through this educational process, for
assuming different roles in society.
With time, a society’s educational system becomes increasingly sophisticated and differentiated.
Most institutions of learning are targeted at particular levels (often identified by chronological
age), such as primary, secondary and tertiary levels. Some institutions also specialize in specific
fields of learning. In the English-speaking Caribbean, the primary school normally caters
for students between the ages of 5 and 11 years. At this stage, students are exposed to reading,
mathematics, language, arts, science, social studies, among other subjects. This level serves
as the foundation of the further stages of the learning process. The secondary level caters for
182 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
students between the ages of 12 and 17. This stage involves the development of specialized
knowledge in certain subjects. This level prepares students for higher learning at the tertiary
level. The tertiary level prepares students for specialization in certain fields of study such as
foreign languages, biology, literature, or economics.
THEORETICAL PERSPECTIVES
In this section, the functionalist, conflict and interactionist theories of education will be discussed.
Each perspective adopts a different view of the role of education in society.
The Functionalist Perspective on Education
The Functionalist asks two main questions:
a.
How does the educational system promote order and stability in society?
b.
What functions does education fulfil for the individual members of society?
Emile Durkheim
1. The process of education helps to provide an important link between the individual and
society. According to Durkheim (1961), education is ‘the methodical socialization of the young
generation’. In order for society to survive there must be homogeneity. Education achieves
this homogeneity by instilling the values of a society into its younger members.
2. The educational system also helps in creating a skilled labour force by reacting to the
economic needs of society. As societies become more complex and modernized, education
prepares the individual to assume specialized occupational roles and to subscribe to modern
values, and thereby to promote value consensus in society.
3. Education also has the social function of providing a space within which interaction can
take place. Students meet and interact with others who may be of varied ethnic, religious
and socio-economic backgrounds thus giving them the opportunity to learn about different
ways of life. Additionally, through classroom and out-of-classroom activities students learn
important life skills such as cooperation, tolerance and leadership skills.
Education | 183
Talcott Parsons – The Positive Role of the School
1. According to Parsons, education performs the function of ‘secondary socialization.’ The
school provides individuals with appropriate ideas on how to live and contribute to society.
The school is a vital source of socialization. In the family, individuals are socialized into
‘particularistic values’, where they are special to the family and have family loyalty. Formal
educational systems instil in children the idea that they are one in many; they are socialized
into ‘universalistic values’. They learn that, in order to succeed, it is important to work and
achieve on the basis of merit.
2. The school prepares students for their adult roles in the wider world, whereby the best
performers, regardless of sex, race or social class, are able to rise to the top of the social
hierarchy.
Criticisms
1. Like Durkheim, Parsons fails to consider adequately that the values and norms transmitted
by the educational system may be those of the ruling elite or ruling class, and not those
of the whole society.
2. The meritocratic nature of many school systems has often been questioned.
Davis and Moore
Building on the work of both Emile Durkheim and Talcott Parsons, Kingsley Davis and Wilbert
Moore (1945) looked at the education system as being based on three main principles:
•
Role allocation
•
Sorting and placement
•
Functional importance
For these theorists, education is intricately linked with stratification. As Functionalists, they view
society as meritocratic, that is, they see everyone as having an equal chance to attain mobility
and hold any position they desire. The education system is part of this meritocratic social
system, and provides the means through which individuals acquire the skills and knowledge
needed for their occupations.
By providing these skills and knowledge to all students, the school aids in what is referred to as
role allocation. In a meritocratic society, roles are allocated according to ability. Therefore, in
184 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
the school system as students are educ(t | Soes becomer)1pp10(e ednt which.m0s /Fm0 Do Q BT su 61_074) Tm -
Education | 185
3. Education and training do not always involve hardship and sacrifice. They provide
intrinsic benefits and are enjoyed by many. Thus, a person does not necessarily have to
receive lifelong compensation for undertaking education and training.
4. There are different values being taught to different groups within the educational
system. The so-called ‘prestigious schools’ in the Caribbean have different values from the
schools meant for the working class, including Junior and Senior Secondary schools.
This is reflected in the different curricula offered at these institutions.
5. The Conflict theorists also state that the educational system serves the interest of the
capitalists. The skills being taught are not those that are beneficial to society but rather
those that are beneficial to the ruling elite.
6. Stratification may lead to hostility and social instability.
Activity 7.1
In your society, indicate the extent to which the school system operates on the basis of meritocratic
principles, as claimed by the Functionalists. In answering the question, you should
•
state the basic premise of the Functionalist perspective of society and the role of education
in society;
•
summarize the views of Durkheim, Parsons, and Davis and Moore on the role of education
in society;
•
use the critique by conflict theorists (Tumin 1967), (Young 1961), and the interactionists
(Becker 1971), and argue whether or not the principles of meritocracy operate in the
school system;
•
use examples to help support your points.
The Neo-Marxist/Conflict Perspective
The Conflict theorists, like the Functionalists, base their analysis on the larger social
structure, but place more emphasis on the role of education in relation to the economic
system. The Conflict perspective views the education system as a means of transmitting
ruling-class values and ideologies.
186 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Bowles and Gintis
Bowles and Gintis (1976) in Schooling in Capitalist America, claim that the main purpose of
education is to produce a workforce that can be exploited without resistance by the ruling class.
They also claim the following:
1. Education serves to reproduce the existing social structure through the hidden
curriculum.
2. The curriculum in schools is fragmented into small packages of knowledge, for example,
mathematics, history and Spanish. There is little opportunity to reconcile the content of
one subject with that of another. This hampers the overall development of the student. In
existing economic systems, work is similarly fragmented and is therefore meaningless to
the worker.
3. Educational systems reflect the power of the ruling class and enable the elite to maintain
senior positions. The belief that the system is meritocratic serves to mask the inequality
and unfairness of the system.
4. Children are alienated in schools to prepare them for alienation in the workplace.
5. Pupils are organized in a competitive hierarchical structure, and this prevents them from
gaining much intrinsic value or satisfaction from their work. This prepares the student
for work, where the satisfaction comes from the salary and not the job itself.
6. Those who conform to authority and discipline in schools gain the highest reward.
This prepares students to be subservient and obedient employees to their employers.
Criticisms
1. Bowles and Gintis (1976) have been criticized because they made assumptions about the
hidden curriculum but had little empirical evidence to support their claims.
2. They have been criticized for underestimating the influence of the formal curriculum.
This curriculum focuses on academic subjects rather than subject matter related to work.
3. The hidden curriculum was supposed to result in subservient students. However, there
are numerous schools where students show little regard for school rules, teachers and
authority.
4. Bowles and Gintis (1976) also stated that education legitimates inequality by stating that
educational success and failure are based on merit. However, according to some studies,
Education | 187
most people believe that success is dependent on family background and economic factors.
Thus, education did not succeed in legitimating inequality.
The Interactionist Perspective
This perspective is based on the idea that social action arises out of interpretations and perceptions
derived during the course of social interaction. Interactionists concentrate on the relationships
observed in the classroom, that is, how perceptions of pupils’ by teachers and other pupils
may affect their chances of educational success. Interactionists focus on the social roles of
teachers and pupils. They are concerned with the manner in which pupils’ self-concepts are
shaped during the process of schooling. Some major issues of this perspective include typing,
labelling and the self-fulfilling prophecy, streaming and banding, pupil adaptation and
subculture. We will now examine each of these in some detail.
Typing – Hargreaves, Hester and Mellor (1975) interviewed teachers of two secondary schools
in the early 1970s to understand the different ways in which teachers come to understand
new pupils. Their work resembles that of the phenomenologists who say that people make
sense of the world by making ‘typifications’ (categorising social and natural phenomena based
on experience). Hargreaves et al. (1975) claim that teachers come to know their pupils by
engaging in three main processes: speculation, elaboration and stabilization. Speculation involves
examining pupils’ physical appearance, their abilities and aptitudes, their social characteristics
such as personality and interpersonal relationships, and the extent to which they conform to
school rules. Elaboration is a reflexive process in which the teacher looks for evidence to confirm,
refute or modify the speculation. Elaboration shows that teachers use ethnomethodological
principles in their interaction with pupils. Thirdly, the process of stabilization occurs when
the teacher has come to a sound understanding of the pupil. In a way, it becomes the teacher’s
‘permanent’ perception of the pupil under his/her charge. As Becker says, it becomes the
pupil’s master-status since all other actions will be evaluated in terms of the teacher’s definition.
Interactionists, in some instances, mimic Conflict theorists’ views of education since they see
education as reproducing social inequalities – in particular class inequalities. The end result of
typing is that pupils are categorized based on their social class background. The middle
class is typed as ‘conformist’, and the working class as ‘deviant’ or ‘delinquent’.
Labelling and the Self-Fulfilling Prophecy – Other researchers adopt a more direct approach
to their understanding of classroom relations. They argue that pupils are labelled by school
authorities (administration, teachers, and non-teaching officials) and their peers. Labels are
put on pupils because of the perceptions of others. However, labels usually are associated with
social class. Middle-class pupils are more likely to be positively labelled as ‘bright’, ‘smart’,
‘intelligent’, ‘able/capable’ and ‘having a promising future’. On the contrary, their lower
188 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
class counterparts are more likely to be negatively labelled as being ‘at risk’ (e.g., to drugs,
delinquency, dropout or failure), ‘slow’, ‘dull’, ‘a trouble-maker’ or ‘deviant’. The Interactionists
usually assume that, once labelled, a pupil will act in accordance with the label, making it a
self-fulfilling prophecy. While this may occur, there are sometimes unintended consequences.
M. Fuller (1984) proved the latter when she undertook a study of black girls in a London
Comprehensive School. She found that instead of fulfilling negative labels arising out of their
lower class, black and female status, they resolved to become successful in later life by putting
much emphasis on academics and doing well at school.
However, in the 1960s Rosenthal and Jacobson (1968) illustrated the success of teacher perception
by reporting on an experiment that tested the self-fulfilling prophecy. Their study is more popularly
known as ‘the Pygmalion in the Classroom’. It reports that once teachers hold positive views of
pupils, they are likely to have more positive interaction with them and so encourage them to
hold more positive self-images. We can thus conclude that a classroom climate that promotes
feelings of efficacy in pupils will produce more desirable academic performances. Teachers
may well be advised that the more effort they make to reduce threats to pupils’ emotional safety
and well-being, the fewer the problems to be overcome in the classroom.
Streaming
Streaming has been widely practised in the Caribbean. It involves putting all pupils of similar
ability in the same class, where the same knowledge and instructions are given. It is believed that
streaming will improve the quality of learning because all pupils in the same stream will benefit
from ‘equality of opportunity’. However, interactionists have studied this (streaming) in
comprehensive schools and have shown its deleterious effects on pupils. Nell Keddie (1973),
in a study of a London comprehensive school, found that pupils in higher streams were given
more ‘finely graded knowledge’ than those in lower streams, who were exposed to simpler,
more concrete and less sophisticated knowledge.
In the Caribbean some educators have vehemently opposed this practice. V. Jules for instance
has argued that it produces severe lifelong (negative) self-images among those in low streams.
This can lead to social problems later on, such as deviance by those who may wish to ‘hit-back’
at society for condemning them to a life as ‘second-rate’ citizens (poor employment prospects,
unemployment, marginality and dependence).
One related process is tracking/banding. Tracking is intended to select pupils for courses
of study based on their ability (or perceived ability). S.J. Ball’s (1981) classic study on Banding at
Beachside Comprehensive School demonstrates the principle of banding. He found that middle
class pupils were over-represented in Band I (for the most academically able). In addition,
Education | 189
those in Band II (mainly lower-class pupils) were allowed to ‘cool-out’ since this was for pupils
with behaviour problems. They were encouraged to pursue the more practical subjects for
Ordinary level examinations. Band III pupils, thought to be not as difficult to deal with, were
usually of lower-class origin. Thus, it is clear that, in schools designed to promote social-class
integration, teachers were helping to preserve the status quo by favouring the middle class for
‘better’ education.
Pupil-Adaptation and Subcultures
P.J. Woods (1979) deviates slightly from the prevailing proposition that pupils adapt to
school life based on teacher-perception. Instead, he views pupils as having greater autonomy and
direction over their lives. Woods suggests that there may be at least eight modes of adaptation
to the school. These modes of adaptation can be classified under the categories Conformity,
Middle Ground, and Non-conformity.
Conformity – Pupils act in accordance with rules for instrumental reasons (i.e., they wish
to succeed). This is the case with those who ingratiate, comply and act in opportunistic ways.
Middle-Ground Adaptation – This describes pupils who reject the goals of education (ritualism),
who reject goals and the legitimate channels for success (retreatism) and who are indifferent and
uncertain about their purpose.
Non-Conformity – Non-conformist pupils may act in intransigent or rebellious ways. They
may deliberately break class and school rules because ‘school is not the place for them’. They
may bide their time, then engage in activities counter to schooling. In Learning to Labour,
P. Willis (1977) discovered a group of 12 working-class boys who fitted this categorization.
Willis thought that they had come to view schools as a waste of their time because it could not
provide them with the knowledge, skills and experiences required for the reinforcing of the
working-class ethos.
Advantages of the Interactionist Perspective in Education
The Interactionist Perspective is based on much empirical evidence, using direct observation of
teachers and pupils in classrooms. It shows that educational success is based on a wide range of
factors such as parents, school, teachers and the pupils themselves.
190 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Disadvantages of the Interactionist Perspective on
Education
Many studies of labelling are outdated; e.g., Becker’s study of the ‘ideal pupils’ dates back to
the 1960s. (The perspective may be becoming less relevant to modern education systems).
Interactionists fail to take into consideration those out-of-school factors such as diet, parental
interest and housing conditions that are important in success. What takes place in school is
merely part of the process of education.
Activity 7.2
Self-Test 1
Instructions
•
Use a pencil to put a tick in the box following the selected option.
•
Do not consult your notes or any other readings.
•
Re-read the section if you get two or more incorrect.
1. Which set is correctly associated with the Functionalist perspective of education?
a.
role allocation, meritocracy, equality of opportunity
[ ]
b.
bias, maintenance of the status quo, hidden curriculum
[ ]
c.
labelling, streaming, banding[ ]
d. role allocation, self-fulfilling prophecy, apolitical values
[ ]
2. Which pair is correctly matched?
a.
Becker – Schooling in Capitalist America
[ ]
b.
Keddie – The counter School Culture
[ ]
c.
Willis – Learning to Labour[ ]
d. Parsons – Persistent Poverty[ ]
Education | 191
3. Which is not a process involved in typing students?
a.
Elaboration[ ]
b.
Stabilization[ ]
c.
Graduation[ ]
d. Speculation[ ]
4. What view do Marxists and Interactionists hold in common?
a.
Schools promote equality for all.
[ ]
b.
Girls are doing better than boys.
[ ]
c.
Minorities are labelled and placed in low streams.
[ ]
d. Schools ensure that middle- class privileges are maintained.
[ ]
5. Which is true of labelling?
a.
All labels ‘stick’ on pupils.
[ ]
b. Not all negatively labelled pupils fulfil the prophecy.
[ ]
c.
[ ]
A test of labelling was conducted by Bowles and Gintis in 1993.
d. Teachers today do not label pupils.
[ ]
Education in the Caribbean
The educational systems that evolved in the British West Indian societies were shaped in no
small way by the region’s history. Some of the more important historical events include conquest
and colonization by different powers, slavery, the European dominated power structure and a
single export crop, East Indian indentureship and the development of a stratification system
based largely on race and colour.
Historical Development – The development of education in the Caribbean can be discussed
in three phases: (a) Pre-emancipation (b) Post-emancipation (c) Political Independence.
Pre-Emancipation – During slavery, formal education was limited to the whites, and was not
available to the enslaved. It was not feasible for the colonial administrators to make education
available to the enslaved for two main reasons. Firstly, educating the slaves in reading and writing
may have resulted in revolts on the plantations. Secondly, offering education to the enslaved would
Education | 197
4. Which of the following statements about missionary groups is/are true?
a.
They were concerned with educating slaves so that they could find employment
in Europe.[ ]
b. They depended totally on the state for funding.
c.
They had more power than the state in education during colonial times.
[ ]
[ ]
d. All of the above.[ ]
5. Which of the following statements pertaining to education in the Caribbean is incorrect?
a.
Education was elitist during colonial times.
[ ]
b. The curriculum was Eurocentric in the earlier stages.
[ ]
CXC has facilitated the decolonization process in education.
[ ]
c.
d. Equality of opportunity in education has remained unchanged for the
past 50 years.[ ]
Education and Equality
If you hold the functionalist perspective in high esteem, you will be inclined to believe that
education leads to a more ‘open’ and meritocratic society, through the promotion of social mobility.
However, the evidence from conflict and other perspectives shows that education largely fails
to promote equality. This arises because the education system and the society generally, impose
barriers to the progress of ethnic minorities, females (in some societies), males (in the Caribbean),
the poor and the lower class.
An analysis of data from mobility studies will reveal that the rate of absolute mobility may not
be as large as one may think initially. This is so because mobility is short range – people do not
usually move very far (either upward or downward) from their original class position.
Education and Mobility
Education is one of the main vehicles for achieving social mobility. According to the Functionalists,
the educational system acts as a sieve; it identifies and selects the more talented individuals in
the interests of society as a whole. This is acceptable, since Functionalists (Parsons, Davis and
Moore) suggest that schools operate on meritocratic principles so as to achieve a more efficient
allocation of human resources. According to these theorists, pupils’ achievement levels are largely
a reflection of their innate ability and nothing else.
198 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
This view of meritocracy has come under severe attack from the neo-Marxists. Bowles and Gintis
(1976) have condemned such a perspective on education, as it largely ignores the class inequalities
in education. They do not view teachers as neutral to pupils. Teachers are rather partial to
pupils of middle-class backgrounds. Caribbean writers, Gordon (1963) and Beckford (1972)
have adopted a somewhat Marxist approach to education. Gordon, for instance, perceives
education as being largely influenced by colonialism. As such, she says that it maintains the
privilege of whites over other social strata.
Despite the strong anti-meritocratic philosophy of education inherent in schooling, it may be
correct to assert that education in the post-independent Caribbean, in many instances, has
assisted in promoting some degree of social mobility. Based upon a system of meritocracy, it
is argued that every student has equal educational chances of excelling in the educational
system and could thereby attain upward social mobility. However, it is argued, as was seen from
the Conflict and Interactionist perspectives, that educational life chances are not equitably
distributed across all classes.
In a study entitled ‘Education and Equality of Opportunity in Trinidad and Tobago’, Ishmael
J. Baksh (1986) focused his study on the social background of the students attending two types
of secondary schools, and the effects on the social mobility of the students.
The following are some of the findings highlighted in the study:
•
Colour is no longer a significant factor in determining social equality in the society.
•
Sufficient mobility from the lower classes is likely to take place to sustain the illusion
that equality of opportunity has been achieved.
•
Education is likely to function as a means of restricting or controlling social mobility
from the lower classes. This takes place as students from lower social and economic
status are usually assigned to those schools where the curriculum is geared toward
technical and vocational subjects and lower end occupational goals.
•
Despite its good intentions, Caribbean educational systems mirror that of industrialized
countries, which discriminates to some extent against members of the lower socioeconomic classes in the selection process. The educational system tends to direct the
young toward educational and social choices that are strongly linked to their socialclass background, and which would most likely result in the maintenance of the class
structure. The school system legitimizes social inequality by promoting the idea that
the stratification system is fair, since the education people have received was what
they preferred.
Education | 199
Activity 7.5
Self-Test 3
Instructions
•
Use a pencil to put a tick in the box following the selected option.
•
Do not consult your notes.
•
Re-read the section if you get two or more incorrect.
1. Which two Caribbean theorists have made claims similar to those of the Marxists?
a.
S. Gordon and E. Durkheim[ ]
b. G. Beckford and T. Parsons[ ]
c.
G. Beckford and S. Gordon[ ]
d. E. Durkheim and T. Parsons[ ]
2. Which is a good indicator of meritocracy in education?
Boys of a particular ethnic group doing badly in schools
[ ]
b. Low achieving girls performing poorly in examinations
[ ]
Awarding secondary school places based on students’ scores
[ ]
d. Placing pupils of rural districts in rural high schools only
[ ]
a.
c.
3. Which statement cannot be associated with Baksh’s study of education?
a.
The educational system can restrict mobility.
[ ]
b. Education in the Caribbean produces similar effects to those in developed
countries. [ ]
c.
Schooling legitimizes and reinforces social inequity. [ ]
d. Ethnicity and race are the most important issues in e d u c a t i o n . [ ]
200 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
4. Which statement about education and mobility is true?
a.
Functionalists show that schools can contribute to mobility.
[ ]
b. Marxists agree that schooling provides equality of opportunity.
[ ]
c.
In all Caribbean societies, schools are fair.
[ ]
d. Education systems today have reduced the privileges of whites.
[ ]
5. Which type of mobility is likely to occur because of education?
a.
A nephew replacing his uncle as a labourer.
[ ]
b. A mother taking a daughter’s place as a bus driver.
[ ]
c.
After 10 years, a manual worker practises law.
[ ]
d. After 10 years, a doctor is dismissed for malpractice.
[ ]
Education and Gender
In comparing gender issues in education, before and after the 1990s, researchers have found
that the disadvantages faced by girls in earlier times have been significantly reduced today.
Reasons for Girls’ Under-Achievement
1. Early socialization (parenting styles which guide boys and girls into different activities)
contributed towards girls’ preferences for the less prestigious subjects such as home economics,
cookery and needlework. Practices include play activities, using differential toys for the sexes
(e.g., boys get guns, trucks and bricks, whereas girls get dolls, tea-sets and soft-toys) and
participation in different domestic duties (e.g., yard-cleaning and dishwashing respectively).
2. Timetabling Restrictions – timetabling subjects so that traditional boys’ and girls’
subjects are taught at the same time (i.e., compelling girls to do subjects deemed ‘girls’
subjects).
3. Lowering the Self-Concept. This may include: underestimating girls’ abilities, allowing
boys to dominate classroom discussions, tolerating boys’ negative labelling of girls in and
out of the classroom, ignoring girls’ contributions and minimizing their presence in the
classroom.
Education | 201
Reasons for Girls’ Improved Performance in Schools
1. The impact of women’s liberation – girls are placing more priority on the pursuit of education
and career goals, and less emphasis on family, marriage and domestic roles.
2. Changes in the nature of work and employment – the growth of the service sector after the
Second World War meant that more occupations required less physical-labour power and
more mental-labour power. This allows for greater female employment.
3. Changes in fertility – many parents have fewer children and thus more resources to devote
to children’s (including daughters’) education.
4. Legislation – governments have passed anti-discrimination laws banning the restriction
of girls from subjects deemed ‘male-oriented’.
Activity 7.6
1. Explain why illiteracy rates in developed countries such as Canada and Britain are relatively
low.
2. Briefly explain why illiteracy rates are higher for women than for men in most developing
countries.
3. Describe three reasons why girls are doing better than boys in the Caribbean today.
4. Identify three ways in which girls in developed societies were disadvantaged in their
schooling in the past.
Male Underachievement
Unlike those for other societies in the world today, educational statistics in the Caribbean show
that boys, rather than girls, are at a disadvantage in school. This is one of the main differences
between education in the Caribbean and in most other societies. A number of authors have
suggested that both labelling and lower parental encouragement are pertinent to an understanding
of male underachievement in the Caribbean. In a small-scale study of male underachievement in
Trinidad and Tobago, Applewhaite (1998) suggested that male underachievement was the result of
inherent female biases in and out of school. Teachers, as well as parents, were more likely to
encourage girls to become academically successful. Errol Miller (1991) wrote that, in Jamaica,
early socialization of boys puts many of them at a severe disadvantage in schools. They were not
encouraged to identify high educational achievement with masculinity. Miller, in discussing
202 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
marginalization of the black male, has suggested that in the Caribbean (as well as elsewhere)
women have tended to dominate the teaching profession, which has increasingly become state
controlled. We can argue that with this feminization of teaching, particularly at the primary
level, many boys do not have male role models after whom they could pattern their lives.
Table 7.1: GDP Per Capita and Gross Enrolment in Tertiary Education
Countries
Antigua & Barbuda
Barbados
Belize
British Virgin
Islands
Cayman Islands
Cuba
Dominica
Dominican
Republic
G renada
Guyana
H aiti
Jamaica
St Kitts & Nevis
Saint L ucia
St V incent
Trinidad & Tobago
Turks & Caicos
Arg entina
Braz il
Chile
M exico
Size
(sq. km)
Population ‘000
(2001)
Per Capita Gross Enrollment
in Tertiary
GNI
Education
(2001)
9,070
10* *
9,250
38
3,110
6* *
2054*
6* *
440
430
23
58
68.0
268.0
240.0
19.2
260
110,860
750
48,730
35.0
11,222.0
73.0
8,505.0
28,900*
1560*
3,200
2,230
340
214,970
27,750
10,990
360
620
390
5,130
166
2,780,400
8,547,400
765,630
1,958,200
99.0
766.0
8114.0
2,668.0
41.0
158.0
116.0
1,310.0
16.9
37,478.0
172,564.0
15,397.0
99,415.0
3,720
840
480
2,720
6,880
3,970
2,690
5,540
7,700*
6,960
3,060
4,350
5,070
24
5* *
14
4* *
8* *
1
16
8* *
25
3* *
6.5
Sources: Caribbean Latin American Action, IMF Financial Statistics and Inter American Development Bank.
Adapted from: http://sta.uwi.edu/ACHEA/downloads/ACHEA 2004/Horace William
36
16
38
21
Education | 203
Activity 7.7
Instructions
Use the data in table 7.1 to complete the statements below:
1. ____________ has the highest rate of enrolment in tertiary education in the Anglophone
Caribbean.
2. ____________ is the poorest country in the entire Caribbean and has the lowest rate
of enrolment in tertiary education.
3. What implications do these figures have for Caribbean development? (Answer in
four paragraphs).
Activity 7.8
Essay Question:
For a named Caribbean society, outline the contribution of formal education to social and economic
development over the last 50 years.
Guidelines
•
Define the terms: formal education, social development, economic development.
•
Name and explain at least three educational reforms (educational initiatives) that
have contributed to social and economic development.
•
Your explanation should be accompanied by statistical evidence of both social
and economic development.
New Developments in Caribbean Education
Education and Technology
In this section, we will examine a number of issues that will help to elucidate the role of technology
in education: education, classroom organization, social change and equality; distance learning;
globalization and education.
204 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
In earlier times, technology took on a different role in education. It was confined chiefly to the
classroom. Today, the use of technology is more widespread and advanced. Information Technology
(IT) has established itself as a full-fledged subject with its own aims and subject matter. It teaches
a variety of skills. IT specialists are employed in schools and perform essential functions for
the transformation of curriculum delivery. Even at preschool, pupils are being exposed to the
use of computers. Governments are setting up departments of science and technology that
seek greater collaboration with other stakeholders in education (such as Ministries of Education,
schools and non-governmental organizations [NGOs]).
Correspondence courses have been almost completely phased out. We no longer depend on the
mail to supply us with course material from foreign countries. Modern technology affords us the
opportunity to use online facilities. In the United States, the University of Phoenix is renowned
for its excellence in distance-learning programmes.
The debate about the relevance of technology in education raises the issue of cultural reproduction
– the passing on of values, skills and knowledge critical for social progress.
Education, Classroom Organization, Social Change and Equality
One important issue to consider is the way schools and classrooms are structured or organized.
Sociologists will consider the types of interaction among administrators, teachers and students. We
are hence concerned with the influence of technology on school organization and relationships.
One possible point of view is that technology will enhance school efficiency and efficacy. On
the other hand, some argue that it will reduce the quality of social relationships necessary for
student success.
The issue of social change is most significant in contemporary times. Postmodernists claim that
we live in the ‘information age’. Hence, it is imperative that students comprehend the role of
technology in changing the way the curriculum is implemented (i.e., the way lessons are taught).
In other words, they need to come to terms with the changing role of teachers. Teachers must
move from being transmitters of knowledge to being facilitators of learning.
Once educational technology becomes more commonplace, sociologists of education will begin
to access its impact on levels of social equality. For instance, will greater exposure to technology
lead to greater educational prospects for women, minorities and the working class as a whole?
One position propounded by American research is that the use of educational technology has
provided more opportunity for female occupational mobility. Women and girls are benefiting
because women are able to take on traditional male roles such as managerial and supervisory
positions; and girls are afforded access to computers in schools. Despite this improvement,
Education | 205
significant gender differences in technology use are evident. Boys are inclined to play games
and engage in competitive activities whilst girls prefer word processing and collaborative work.
However, these differences do not appear to be so pronounced when women are significantly
disadvantaged at work.
In essence, technology can promote the acquisition of a wide variety of disciplines. Students
can comprehend its effect on organization, especially in terms of their efficiency. They can also
compare ideologies of past philosophers such as Marx with the prevailing ideologies of today;
for instance, the difference between Marx’s view of technology and that of the postmodernists
can be considered. The former was rather pessimistic believing that it would eventually polarize
society and bring about a proletarian revolution. The latter, however, claim that knowledge is
power and that modern technology (e.g., computers, mass media) is the key to the transmission
of knowledge – a rather optimistic view indeed.
Distance Learning
Distance learning is an educational approach which allows the student the flexibility to study
at his or her own pace to achieve the academic goals which are necessary in today’s world.
(www.instudy.com/articles/saww6a03.htm).
The University of the West Indies (UWI) Open Campus works with faculties of UWI at
locations on the three campuses of Barbados, Jamaica, and Trinidad and Tobago. There are
centres located in all the English-speaking countries that support UWI and it currently extends
its service to 16 countries.
In 1983, UWI formally began offering courses using an audio teleconferencing system. In addition
to the lectures, students also received supplementary print materials. The first programmes
offered were the Certificate in Business Administration and the Certificate in Education.
Programmes currently offered at UWI Open Campus include:
•
BEd Early Childhood Development and Family Studies
•
BEd Educational Leadership & Management
•
BEd Literacy Studies
•
BEd Primary (Language Arts Option)
•
BEd Secondary English
•
BEd Secondary Mathematics
•
BSc Banking and Finance
206 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
•
BSc Banking and Finance
•
BSc in Accounting
•
BSc in Management Studies
•
BSc in Youth Development Work
•
BSc Management Studies
•
Certificate & Diploma Early Childhood Development and Family Studies
•
Professional Diploma in Management Accounting
•
Diploma in Instructional Design
•
Diploma in Literacy Instruction
•
MEd in Literacy Instruction
•
Masters in Adult and Continuing Education
•
Post Graduate Diploma Adult and Continuing Education
•
MA in English Language
Once you have access to the internet you will discover the wide range of courses offered by many
foreign universities. The universities of Leicester, Sheffield, London and Greenwich are just a
few examples. It costs almost nothing to obtain information about faculty, fees and content.
Caribbean nationals have great choices in education. We do not necessarily have to go overseas
to pursue foreign education unless we choose to do so.
Globalization and Education
One issue concerning globalization is its role in democratization throughout the world. Schools
prepare people for participation in the economy and polity, giving them the knowledge to make
responsible judgements, the motivation to make appropriate contributions to the well-being of
society, and a consciousness about the consequences of their behaviour.
Along with the mass provision of schools, technological advances have permitted distance education
to convey Western concepts to almost any part of society. In this way, new regions are exposed
to knowledge generated by culturally dominant groups. The net effect of this is absorption
into Western consumer society. In traditional societies, globalization has a revolutionary effect
on the way knowledge is obtained and used. In fact, it is usually a means of acculturation in
which tradition is challenged and changed. This occurs with much success, because schools
have some degree of autonomy in the socialization of the youth.
Education | 207
Despite this position (schools as agents of change), there is limited success in terms of their
effectiveness in the transmission of Western political and cultural ideologies. In societies farthest
away from Western civilization, schools may operate more independently. Thus, they can permit
the perpetuation of some knowledge associated with their culture (www.answers.com/topic/
globalisation-of-education).
An important initiative supported by proponents of globalization is Education for All (EFA).
The Education for All movement is a global commitment to provide quality basic education
for all children, youth and adults. The EFA movement was launched at the World Conference
on Education for All in 1990 at Jomtien, Thailand. The chief aim of this conference was the
making of education widely available, so that rates of illiteracy could be drastically reduced
within 10 years.
In 2000, a follow up conference took place at Dakar, Senegal. Representatives agreed on six key
goals aimed at meeting the learning needs of children, youth and adults. The main aim was
the further enhancement of literacy rates by 2015. The six specific goals were:
•
to expand early childhood care and education;
•
to provide free and compulsory primary education for all;
•
to promote learning and life skills for young people and adults;
•
to increase adult literacy by 50 per cent;
•
to achieve gender parity by 2005, gender equality by 2015;
•
to improve the quality of education.
http://www.unesco.org/new/en/education/resources/
While these goals are commendable, one cannot realistically expect that all countries would
achieve them simultaneously (if at all). Factors such as the availability of additional economic
resources, human resources and schools will undoubtedly impact upon the success of their
initiatives. For instance, countries with poor infrastructure (roads, transport and communication
systems) will be hard pressed to pump massive sums of their national income into education.
The relationship between globalization, distance education and technology is obvious. Technology
is the key factor that makes everything else possible. The Caribbean has to take this
path (technological advancement) if it is to keep pace with developments in post-industrial
societies of the North.
208 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Activity 7.9
Instructions
Read the passage below, and then answer the questions that follow:
Schools can become more effective and efficient if technology is used to enhance the delivery
of the curricula. Teachers will not become redundant but will have to change their traditional
perceptions of their roles as educators. They must be called upon to become ‘facilitators’ of
learning.
1. State two benefits of the use of technology in schools.
2. State three ways in which globalization has transformed education in the Caribbean.
3. State two changes teachers must make to their ‘culture’ if they are to become ‘facilitators
of learning’.
4. Identify three reforms in Caribbean education systems necessary for further gains to
be achieved from the use of technology in classrooms.
Activity 7.10
Instructions
Match the theorist on the left with the theories on the right.
1. Bowles and Gintis
______
A. (Typing)
2. Davis and Moore
B. (Human Capital)
3. Hargreaves et al.
C. (Education and Inequality)
4. I.J. Baksh
D. (Role Allocation)
5. McClelland and Schultz
E. (Schooling in Capitalist America)
Education | 209
Activity 7.11
Fill in the Blanks. Use each term once.
LABELLING, STREAMING, TRACKING, DISTANCE LEARNING, ROLE ALLOCATION
1. The principle of teaching students of similar ability in the same class is referred to
as _____________.
2. An educational initiative in which teachers and students can interact without being in
the same classroom is known as _____________.
3. The principle of assigning people to occupations based on their academic qualifications
is called _____________.
4. Teachers are accused of _____________ when they type pupils according to their
perceived ability, social class, sex or ethnic background.
5. The educational policy of_____________ involves allowing students to study some
subjects and not others.
Activity 7.12
Instructions
Write a plan for each essay. Your plan should include the following:
INTRODUCTION
•
The key term/s to be defined.
•
A thesis statement outlining what you intend to do in the rest of the essay.
BODY
•
Two or three main issues to be examined.
•
The sub-points to support each issue above.
CONCLUSION
•
A sociological theory/issue/research study that aptly justifies the thesis statement. Use
the plan to write at least two essays.
210 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
TOPICS
1. Compare and contrast the functionalist and conflict perspectives of education.
2. Evaluate the main factors that have shaped education in the Caribbean over the last 50
years.
3. Assess the proposition that gender differences in education are inevitable.
4. To what extent do education systems reproduce social inequalities? (Cite examples
from research studies as evidence).
5. Outline and assess the benefits of technology in Caribbean education.
6. Suggest and explain two reasons why schools may appear to be more ‘meritocratic’ than
they really are.
7. What measures can governments of the Caribbean adopt to ensure that schools
function on the principle of ‘equality for all’?
8. Discuss the view that students’ interaction with teachers influences their
educational performance at school.
9. Critically examine the contribution of either Davis and Moore or Bowles and Gintis to
our understanding of education in the Caribbean.
10. For any Caribbean territory, state whether you agree that the educational system
reinforces the status quo in society.
UNIT 1 - MODULE 3
SOCIAL STRATIFICATION AND
SOCIAL MOBILITY
CHAPTER 8
SOCIAL STRATIFICATION:
CONCEPTS AND THEORIES
OBJECTIVES
At the end of this chapter, students should be able to:
1. explain the concepts of stratification;
2. identify types of stratification systems;
3. compare and contrast social equality and social mobility in open and closed stratification
systems;
4. assess the theoretical perspectives on stratification in the Caribbean; and
5. analyse the impact of stratification systems on Caribbean societies.
CONTENT
1. Concepts of Stratification in a Comparative Perspective
i.
Class
ii. Colour
iii. Race
iv. Ethnicity
v.
Caste
vi. Gender
vii. Status
viii. Mobility
2. Types of Stratification Systems: Open, Closed
214 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
3. Theoretical Perspectives
i.
Functionalist
ii. Conflict
iii. Interactionist
iv. Feminist
v.
Caribbean
4. Education, Equality and Social Mobility
Introduction
As you grow older, you will observe that some of your friends and former classmates would
occupy different socio-economic positions in adult life. After secondary school, some colleagues
may pursue tertiary education at institutions of higher learning either in the Caribbean such as
the University of the West Indies (UWI) or at foreign universities and colleges such as those in
the United States, Canada or the United Kingdom. Those who acquire tertiary education become
qualified professionals, such as doctors and lawyers which are positions of high socio-economic
standing in society. For those persons who did not pursue higher learning and acquire requisite
skills and academic accreditation, they may become taxi-drivers, sales clerks or street vendors,
while others may be unemployed, with many children and living on social security. It is quite
evident that the life chances of persons in society are not equal.
Understanding why the life chances of persons in a society may differ requires answering several
pertinent interrelated questions. What determines the path that people travel through their
life, and their ultimate fortunes? Are the people who attend universities and colleges necessarily
smarter than those who are taxi-drivers or street vendors? Do they work harder, or is it that the
luck of the draw favours them? Did their parents have much more money and influence? Consider
what the future holds for those who attend university compared to those who drop out of the
school system or fail to achieve the necessary qualifications to advance their skills and training.
It is almost inevitable that the life chances of those who acquire tertiary education will be much
more favourable.
Most people dream of an egalitarian society, a society in which all members are equal and no
one is categorized as being poor or rich. It is a society where concepts such as class, exploitation,
oppression, privilege and status would be reserved for the pages of history. Unfortunately, an
egalitarian society continues to be elusive, and occupies only the dreams of people, since human
societies, traditional or modern, have been characterized by some form of social inequality.
Social Stratification: Concepts and Theories | 215
Social inequality may take the form of the unequal distribution of wealth, power, prestige,
opportunities and influence, among individuals and groups (Tischler 2002). When social
inequality becomes patterned and institutionalized, and forms part of the social structure, social
stratification is said to exist.
For Haralambos and Holborn (2008), stratification ‘refers to the presence of distinct social groups
which are ranked one above the other with regard to factors such as prestige and wealth’.
According to this definition, it is clear that social stratification is structured social inequality,
whereby the patterns of inequality are intimately related to the social structure and persists over
a relatively long time. Stratification may occur on the basis of access to scarce resources, assets or
property, but it can also occur on the basis of other attributes such as age, gender, race, caste, and
religion. In other words, social stratification is said to exist where persons are all born equal but
some are more privileged as they have greater access to socio-economic and political resources,
status and power.
In this hierarchical ordering of groups, the most privileged occupy the top strata and the least
privileged occupy the lowest strata. The groups are ranked according to criteria viewed as
important by members of society. Such criteria include differences based on gender, class, age, race
or ethnicity. It may appear that status ranking is based solely on economic differences between
groups. However, it is important to appreciate the fact that groups may be ranked on other factors,
such as status and prestige, as Weber argued.
Examples include the following:
•
The ruling class in any society possesses more wealth than the lower class and therefore
holds more economic power.
•
In patriarchal (including Western) societies, men are ranked above women in all
institutions.
For instance, in the family, men will make the decisions the spouses consider most important,
while their wives will make the less important decisions, such as interior decorating and the
purchasing of children’s clothes.
•
In white-dominated societies, less economically powerful groups (for example blacks,
Asians and Hispanics) may face discrimination in housing, education and employment.
•
In most Western societies, the very young and the very old tend to be ranked below
adults (usually aged 29–64). The young and the elderly are more likely to be financially
or physically dependent on others.
216 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
SOME BASIC CONCEPTS
An understanding of social stratification is fundamental to the analysis of any society. Social
stratification is a central theme in sociology, whether one is addressing crime and deviance,
education, family or religion. In approaching the study of social stratification, it is imperative
to first acquire an understanding of some key concepts. These terms include status, social
class, social mobility, elites, race and ethnicity, sex and gender.
Status
This refers to the amount of honour and prestige enjoyed by a person occupying a particular role
in society. Weber’s work on status is quite insightful. He was of the view that status was derived
from the amount of social honour or prestige an individual was accorded by other members
of the society. Status or social honour is usually expressed through lifestyle. People who share a
similar socio-economic status (which takes into account educational attainment, occupational
achievement and income level) form a community whereby they engage in similar recreational
and social activities. Status may vary both within and between strata. Weber believed that
the newly rich did not enjoy the same status as those who were born into wealth. For example,
a garbage collector, or a labourer who wins the lottery, would not be accorded the same degree
of social honour or prestige as those who were born into wealth.
Although social inequality exists in all societies, there may be differences in the manner in which
the inequality is structured. This may depend upon whether the unequal distribution of rewards
is based on ascribed or achieved status. Ascribed status is fixed at birth and unchangeable during
a person’s lifetime. One’s sex and race are examples of ascribed status. Achieved status refers
to that which a person can achieve during his or her lifetime. Becoming a lawyer and being street
vendor are examples of achieved statuses.
Parsons argued that traditional societies are characterized by ascribed status and modern societies
by achieved status. He believes that, in contemporary Western society, achieved status would
become dominant over ascribed status. This situation will arise, according to Parsons, because
he sees a ‘fit’ between the types of society and the dominant value system. In this light,
achieved status is a prerequisite for the efficient functioning of highly advanced societies.
Therefore, in modern societies the level of education and skills, as opposed to the colour of one’s
skin, or one’s sex would be the major criterion for determining the distribution of rewards.
Social Stratification: Concepts and Theories | 217
Social Class
Modern society is stratified by a relatively open class system that is based on economic rewards
(Popenoe 2000). The class system is characterized by demarcating boundaries between groups,
which are reinforced by practices such as endogamy. However, there is a greater degree of social
mobility in the class system when compared to other forms of stratification systems such as
the caste and estate systems. The class system is viewed as being fair as mobility is dependent
upon hard work and achievement rather than ascription. Therefore, the position of those who
occupy the upper or lower strata is reflective of their level of effort and achievements in society.
Although there are opportunities to achieve social mobility, the class system is characterized
by both hierarchy and social stability (Popenoe 2000).
The nature of social class systems is debated in the theories of Karl Marx and Max Weber. Marx
thought that classes came about when differences in income and wealth were so great that one
(small) dominant group exploited the labour of the other, a large mass of ‘propertyless’ individuals
(who owned nothing but their labour). Marx used historical analysis to trace the development
of European society. For him, society passes through four epochs before stabilizing into the
final epoch of communism/socialism. The initial stage, according to Marx, was primitive
communism in which there were no classes. It represented a stage of egalitarianism, and private
property (the forerunner to social inequality) was non-existent. In all the subsequent stages, a
dichotomous stratification system persisted for many centuries. In ancient slavery the unequal
relations between the slave-owners and the slaves characterized the stratified system. In feudal
society (the third epoch) stratification was between nobles and peasants. He believed that it was
in the womb of feudalism that capitalism (fourth epoch), was born, along with the exploitative
relations between the capitalist (the bourgeoisie) and the workers (the proletariat). Marx believed
that in capitalism, one’s class position was determined by one’s relationship with the means of
production. Those who controlled the means of production were the capitalists (the bourgeoisie)
who exploited the working class (the proletariat) by extracting the surplus value of the wealth
that was produced by labour. Later in this chapter, Marx’s theory of dialectical and historical
materialism will be explored. This will allow for a deeper understanding of the classes that have
evolved in Europe’s history.
Max Weber added to Marx’s notions of social class. Weber has elaborated upon Marx’s analysis,
using three hierarchically ranked strata as follows: one-dimensional economic deterministic
notion of social class by emphasizing the importance of prestige, social honour and status in
determining the differences that exist between social groups. Therefore, Weber’s definition
of social class is much more heterogeneous and dynamic in structure, unlike Marx’s, which sees
social classes as relatively homogeneous. The heterogeneous nature of social classes is borne
out in the work of Margaret Stacey (1960) who, in a study of Banbury, Scotland, offers support
218 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
for Weber’s position on social classes when she noted the importance of status differences to
social stratification. Stacey identified the following categories among the working class as:
1. the respectable working class;
2. the ordinary working class;
3. the rough working class.
Measuring Social Class
Social class can be measured in three main ways: Objective Measures, Subjective Measures
and Reputational measures.
a) Objective Measures
These are the most widely used measures of social class. One can assign people to various social
classes based on objective criteria such as wealth, power, and prestige. These objective indicators
include occupation, educational level, number of dependents, type of residence, music, art,
literature, leisure and entertainment activities.
b) Subjective Measures
Subjective measures of social class involve asking respondents to identify their own class position.
For example, the winner of a million dollar lottery may believe that he/she is now a member
of the upper class.
c) Reputational Measures
The reputational method is limited to smaller communities, where people are familiar with one
another’s status. People at each class level see class differently. They, therefore, carry around
different personal pictures of society’s classes. People see finer divisions at their own class
level, but tend to place in the same category people who occupy other class levels.
Social Mobility
Social mobility is the movement, usually of individuals or groups, from one social position to
another within the social stratification system in a society. The extent of social mobility in
any society therefore depends largely on the type of stratification system that exists: whether
the society is ‘open’ or ‘closed’. An ‘open’ society, based upon achieved statuses, allows its
members to attain upward social mobility based on education and skills, regardless of race,
Social Stratification: Concepts and Theories | 219
ethnicity, religion and gender. A ‘closed’ society, based upon ascribed statuses, determines at birth
the life chances of its members.
Vertical mobility refers to movement up or down in the social hierarchy, which results in a
change in social class. Vertical mobility normally involves intergenerational mobility – a
change in social position that takes place over two or more generations. Many people who toiled
in the sugar cane fields in the Caribbean experienced this type of vertical mobility, as their sons,
daughters and grandchildren became teachers, doctors, lawyers and engineers. Another type of
vertical mobility is intra-generational mobility – a change in the social position of a person
that takes place during his or her lifetime.
When people experience changes in their jobs, but there is no corresponding change in
their social status, then they are said to be experiencing horizontal mobility. For example,
a person may make several horizontal career changes that do not significantly alter his or
her position in the social hierarchy. He/she may undergo a career change from an accountant
to a lawyer, which may be perceived as important, but this may result in little mobility, as there
would not be any significant change in privilege, power or wealth.
Activity 8.1
Define each of the following (giving o n e examples of each):
a)
Achieved status
b) Ascribed status
c)
Vertical mobility
d) Horizontal mobility
e)
Intra-generational mobility
f)
Inter-generational mobility.
Activity 8.2
Explain the importance of history to an understanding of social stratification in the Caribbean.
220 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Mobility and Social Stratification
The greater the degree of mobility that exists, the more likely a society is to be regarded as
relatively ‘open’. Functionalist writers, such as Parsons, believe that modern industrial societies
are more ‘open’ than the traditional pre-industrial ones. This is because in modern society,
achievement is more highly regarded than ascription. Individuals place greater emphasis on
hard work and sacrifice, in order to achieve their desired goals. Parsons theorized that as a
result of processes of social evolution, modern institutions (such as schools, families and the
mass media) have become achievement oriented. Students should examine the extent to which
Parsons’ theory is applicable to social mobility in the Caribbean.
Activity 8.3
1. Using as a reference Derek Gordon’s study of mobility in Jamaica (Gordon 1987), answer
the questions below:
a)
What were the main methods employed in collecting the data on social mobility?
b) List four problems facing researchers when they attempt to measure the actual
amount of mobility occurring in any society.
The Elite
Most sociologists refer to members of the ruling class in any society as the elite. Pareto
(1963) was of the belief that the elite would always maintain their hegemony. Marxist writers
such as John Scott (1982) discussed several reasons for elite rule. Scott thought that, through
the practice of endogamy (marriage restricted to one’s own social category) and attendance at
prestigious public schools such as Eton and Winchester in the UK, the elite would maintain
their privileges over all other classes.
As far as Westergaard and Resler (1976) are concerned, the elite comprise a small proportion of
the society. In Britain, they include managers of large companies, top civil servants, shareholders
of large firms and senior members of government. Together with other influential groups
and corporations, the elite own most of the wealth in British society.
Race and Ethnicity
A race is a human group that is believed to be distinct in some way from other humans, based on
real or imagined physical differences. Racial classifications are rooted in the idea of a biological
Social Stratification: Concepts and Theories | 221
classification of humans according to morphological features such as skin colour or facial
characteristics. The social construction of race is dependent upon the social meanings that have
been accorded by people to particular physical traits. Therefore, the shape of one’s nose,
the texture of one’s hair, and the colour of one’s eyes would carry different meanings, and
thereby affect the life chances of the different groups. For example, during slavery the colour of
one’s skin was a major determinant of one’s fortunes in society.
One legal definition of race attempts to define people who are not white. In other words, anyone
who is not white is considered black or coloured. Such a definition of race was enshrined in the
law books of some southern states of the United States, such as Missouri and Georgia, to ensure
that segregation of whites from blacks – with regard to the schools they attended, the buses
they travelled on and the jobs they held – was enforced (Tischler 2002). That legal definition
of race was also enforced during the Apartheid period in South Africa to ensure segregation
between whites and blacks and other groupings.
Ethnicity, while sometimes related to race, refers to the social and cultural traits that are shared
by a human group.
Some of the social traits often used for ethnic classification include:
•
Nationality – Barbadian as opposed to Jamaican;
•
Tribe – in Rwanda the two major tribes are the Hutus and the Tutsis;
•
Religion – in the Republic of Ireland the major ethnic groups are the Catholics and
the Protestants;
•
Language – in Canada, the ethnic classification is between French and English;
•
Culture – people of Indo- and Afro-Caribbean ancestry and heritage.
Unlike race, ethnicity is not usually externally assigned by other individuals. The term ‘ethnicity’
focuses more upon a group’s connection to a perceived shared past and culture. Although ethnic
groups may be stratified in a society based on access to resources and power, they are usually not
homogeneous groups. Ethnic groups also are stratified from within, and based on factors such
as economic resources, colour, sex and gender.
The Jamaican anthropologist M.G. Smith (1965) regarded most West Indian societies as plural
societies. This assumption was based on the premise that different cultural segments existed
side by side but did not share important primary and secondary social institutions such as
family and marriage, religion and property. Smith thought that the cultural segments were
colour stratified, with white at the top, brown in the middle and black at the base. In economic
and political terms, whites were more powerful than browns and blacks, since ascription (colour/
race/ethnicity) was well combined with differences in wealth and income.
222 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
The stratification system of some highly industrialized societies, such as Britain, is said to be
stratified according to colour differences, into two major cultural segments – whites and ethnic
minorities. The latter groups comprise West Indians, Africans, and South Asians. Jones (1993),
in an analysis of data compiled for the Labour Force Survey, concluded that ethnic minorities
in Britain were likely to face discrimination in employment. They received less pay than
whites with similar qualifications doing similar jobs, and were less likely to be promoted.
Sex and Gender
Sex refers to the biological characteristics that differentiate males from females, while gender
refers to the social, cultural, emotional and psychological construction of masculinity and
femininity. For instance, from an early age, girls are socialized (gendered) into being nurturers
and caregivers, through their interaction with their mothers and other females, whilst boys are
socialized to be tough and aggressive, by adults and fellow males. Therefore, gender is achieved
behaviour, while sex is ascribed. Gender roles differ from society to society.
Feminists have opposed Marx’s assertion that sociology is fundamentally the study of class
inequality. Acker (1992), for instance, bemoaned the male strewn bias of conventional sociology.
Feminists disagree that studies of class inequality will adequately explicate women’s circumstances
that place them at a disadvantage compared to men. One notable feminist, S. Firestone (1970),
showed that there is a sex–class system in which men belong to the dominant (exploiter) class
and women, regardless of their economic situation, occupy the subordinate class position.
Robert Stoller (1968) suggested that gender relations were culturally rather than biologically
based. Gender was purposively defined in sociology as masculine and feminine. Gender,
for some sociologists, was the major determinant of the domestic division of labour, and of
the subject choices boys and girls made at school.
Explaining Gender Stratification
According to the functionalists, role differentiation based on gender is functional to society.
Males play a more instrumental role, whereas females play a more expressive role. For instance,
Parsons justified the division of labour in the family by stating that women played an important
role in nurturing and providing important emotional support to men, in order for them to meet
the demands of the capitalist system. This role differentiation leads to more efficiency in society.
However, conflict theorists and feminists view gender role differentiation as unequal access to
opportunities between males and females.
Now that the main concepts involved in the study of stratification have been explained, the
types of stratification systems shall be discussed.
224 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
In a caste system of stratification, an example of which is traditional India, a person’s position
regarding occupation and social relationships is determined at birth by ascribed statuses such
as skin colour. People who are born into the caste system spend their entire lives within their
caste, with little or no chance of changing their position. In the caste system, each position
is defined in terms of purity or pollution relative to each other (Jayaram 1987). The most
pure
Social Stratification: Concepts and Theories | 225
Estate System
The estate system, also known as feudalism, existed in Medieval Europe. In this system, law and
inheritance determine one’s social position. The system consisted of a social hierarchy with
differing obligations and rights accorded to each stratum. During the Middle Ages, the major
estates, according to the obligations and rights, ranked the aristocracy and landed gentry at
the top, the clergy (abbots and bishops) in the middle, and the merchants, artisans, peasants
and serfs at the bottom of the social hierarchy. Within each major category, there were subdivisions; for example, within the clergy itself there existed a hierarchy of statuses.
Although the estate system is similar to the caste system it is not as rigid. Some social mobility
is possible but not to the same extent as in a class system.
Class System
In a class system of stratification, achieved statuses, as opposed to ascribed statuses, constitute
the basis for the unequal distribution of resources. A class system is categorized by large groups
of people who share similar economic and occupational opportunities, lifestyles, attitudes and
behaviours. In a class system of stratification, there is greater social mobility than in slavery, the
caste system and estates. Social mobility results from the acquisition of education and experience,
which allows for the achievement of higher levels and better paying jobs. The class system
of stratification is therefore based on merit or achievement. In a class system, boundaries are
primarily maintained by endogamy and limited social interaction with members from other
strata of society. The class system dominates the modern industrial world.
THEORIES OF STRATIFICATION
The theories of social stratification will now be addressed. Emphasis will be placed on the
contributions of Davis and Moore (1945), Melvin Tumin (1953), Karl Marx (1959) and
Max Weber (1946).
Functionalist Perspective
Kingsley Davis and Wilbert Moore
The functionalist perspective of society begins with the assumption that the needs of society
are greater than the needs of individuals; in other words, the good of society is greater than the
good of individuals. Hence, functionalists, when assessing the usefulness of social stratification,
begin by asking the question: Does the stratified social system contribute to the maintenance
of society?
226 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
The functionalist perspective of social stratification is captured in the work of Davis and Moore
(1945). They argue that social stratification is useful as it contributes to the maintenance
of society. These authors state that there are basic functional prerequisites that must be fulfilled
to ensure the survival and maintenance of society. These functional prerequisites are similar
to those enunciated by Parsons for the survival and maintenance of society, such as the provision
of shelter and food, and filling the manifold social positions in society, such as teachers, engineers,
doctors, janitors, police officers, construction workers, and lawyers.
For Davis and Moore, social stratification provides an effective mechanism for role allocation and
performance. Every society is faced with the double challenge of selecting the best individuals to
fill the social positions required for its survival and maintenance, and at the same time, motivating
them to execute their role expectations. Davis and Moore argue that, in order for society
to attract the right talent to fill the myriad of social positions, a differential system of rewards
must be offered and, based on meritocracy, must be implemented.
Davis and Moore argue that rewards offered must take into account three factors:
1. First is the functional importance of the job. Some social positions or jobs in society are
functionally more important than others. For example, the role of a doctor is believed to be
functionally more important to society than that of a janitorial worker. Therefore, according
to Davis and Moore, doctors must be offered higher rewards than janitorial workers.
2. Natural ability and talent may not be widespread in society. Hence, a system of stratification
offering high rewards is necessary to motivate those with the requisite talent to compete,
which theoretically would lead to the most skilled and talented filling the important roles
in society.
3. A stratification system with differential rewards depending on the functional importance
of the job is necessary, to reward people who have to undergo long periods of training and
personal sacrifices. It is critical that the differential package attached to each functional role
in society should have a built-in motivational inducement that would produce a minimum
acceptable degree of diligence and conscientiousness in the execution of performance.
In essence, therefore, Davis and Moore are of the view that social stratification is an effective
mechanism for ensuring that all the social positions in society, especially the functionally
important ones, are filled by the most skilled, talented and qualified members of society.
Let us apply the reasoning of Davis and Moore to two social positions in society: medical doctors
and garbage collectors. The social position of a medical doctor requires a minimum degree
of skill and intelligence beyond the average, long hours, and years of training, and sometimes
having to work in stressful circumstances. To motivate the people with this relatively
Social Stratification: Concepts and Theories | 227
scarce talent to fill such an important social position, Davis and Moore would argue that
high rewards in the form of prestige and income must be offered. Society, however, may deem
that little reward should be offered to those who fill the important role of keeping the society
clean of garbage and reducing the risk of disease outbreaks. Davis and Moore would argue
that although the role of the garbage collector is important, the potential to fill the position is
widespread, especially as little specialized training, skills and qualification are needed. Hence,
the position of garbage collector does not necessitate high rewards in the form of prestige
and income.
From the example above, it is evident that inequality is viewed as a rational response to a social
problem. The Functionalist perspective on society views inequality as a result of societal agreement
on the f unctional importance of social positions and the need to reward them accordingly.
Criticisms of Davis and Moore
The Functionalist perspective, particularly the work of Davis and Moore, has attracted many
criticisms. The major critique of this perspective has been the work of Melvin Tumin (1953).
1. The assumption that some social positions in a society are functionally more important
than others has been questioned by many theorists. According to Tumin (1953) there is
no unanimously accepted way of measuring the functional importance of social positions.
For Tumin, the concept of functional importance is highly subjective. Hence, he would
argue that garbage collectors and doctors are equally important in society.
2. Tumin views these propositions as challenging the idea that social inequality is uniformly
functional for guaranteeing that the most important tasks in a society will be performed
conscientiously by the most competent persons.
3. Davis and Moore, according to Tumin, did not fully appreciate the importance of
power in determining the unequal distribution of rewards. For Tumin, the differences
in prestige and pay between different groups have been as a result of power rather than
functional importance. For example, in Trinidad and Tobago the difference in salaries and
wages between workers in the oil industry and the cocoa industry may be a result of
the relative bargaining power of the two groups of workers. Social stratification systems
function to provide the elite with the political power necessary to procure the acceptance
and dominance of an ideology which rationalizes the status quo, whatever it may be, as
logical, natural, and morally right.
4. According to Davis and Moore, a limited number of individuals have the necessary talent
to acquire the skills needed to match the functionally important positions in society.
228 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Tumin disagrees with Davis and Moore by arguing that there exists no effective mechanism
for measuring talent and ability.
5. Tumin argues that the unequal opportunity structure of society fails to provide any guarantee
that the stratification system, as pronounced by Davis and Moore, would be able to adequately
fill the functionally social positions with the most talented. According to Tumin, those
individuals born in the lower strata of society would always be at a major disadvantage with
regard to the opportunity to realize their true potential, when compared to those born
in the upper strata.
6. Social stratification systems function to encourage hostility, suspicion, and distrust
among the various segments of a society, and thus limit the possibilities of extensive social
integration. Similarly, stratification lowers the loyalty and motivation of the lower classes
to participate in national efforts.
Conflict Perspective
Unlike functionalist theorists like Davis and Moore who see social stratification as useful for the
survival and existence of society, conflict theorists see social stratification as a struggle for dominance
in society. The main writings on class stratification from the conflict perspective are found in
the works of Karl Marx and later Max Weber, who further developed the ideas of Marx.
Karl Marx
Marx saw inequality as a means of exploitation in society, according to the opening paragraph
of the Communist Manifesto,
The history of all hitherto existing society is the history of class struggle. Free
man and slave, patrician and plebeian, lord and serf, guild master and journey,
in a word, oppressor and oppressed, stood in constant opposition to one another,
carried on an uninterrupted, now hidden, now open fight, a fight that
each time ended either in revolutionary reconstitution of society at large
or in the common ruin of the contending classes (Marx and Engels 2002,
originally published in 1848).
Those who own the means of production within society maintain their advantageous position
in society by controlling or influencing the institutions in society, such as the political system,
the educational system and the legal system. The values and ideology of the ruling class
become those of the society.
Social Stratification: Concepts and Theories | 229
For Marx, in capitalist society there exist two main classes, the bourgeoisie – the ruling class or
capitalists – and the proletariat – the working class or workers. The capitalists own the means of
production while the working class owns the labour, which produces the wealth. Marx believed
that the relationship between capitalists and workers was exploitative, as in all class societies.
Marx believed that history had been characterized by different forms of class conflict, with the
class conflict in capitalism being the culmination. The exploitative position of capitalism
is manifested when the capitalists pay labour a subsistence wage to produce wealth and then
expropriate the wealth for their own benefit. As the gap between the capitalists and the workers
widens, the members of the proletariat would become aware of their true class position in society
and would revolt for the overthrow of capitalism and the rise of communism.
In the communist system all the basic economic needs of all people would be satisfied and there
would be no need for stratification in society.
Criticisms
A number of criticisms have been levelled against Marx’s view of social stratification.
1. Marx has been criticized for viewing society in an overly economically deterministic manner.
As much as it is recognized that economics is important to understanding the operation
of society, his overemphasis on economics was at the expense of other equally important
variables such religion as enunciated by Weber in his work on the Protestant Ethic.
2. The process of change is much more complex than Marx has portrayed it. Change is an
unpredictable process that may proceed in any direction. Hence, the main catalyst for change
may not be economic factors but another powerful factor such as religion. For example,
Weber argued that although the economic conditions for the birth of capitalism were
favourable in India, the religious factor of the protestant ethic was not found there.
3. Marx’s analysis of society fails to incorporate the rise of the middle class. Access to education
and economic resources has facilitated social mobility which has resulted in a growing middle
class in western capitalist societies.
4. The institutionalization of conflict in the modern capitalist world has precluded the
violent overthrow of the capitalist by the working class. Furthermore, laws have been
passed to protect the rights of workers thereby reducing the possibility of violent protest
by workers.
5. Marx’s view that the replacement of capitalism by communism would lead to the end of
inequality has been seen as being utopian.
230 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
6. Marx’s theory is incapable of explaining patterns of stratification in the Caribbean, given
its overemphasis on economics. His theory devalues the importance of colonialism and its
social off springs: race, ethnicity and gender.
Max Weber
Weber expanded on Marx’s analysis of class to provide a multi-faceted view of social stratification.
Weber agreed with Marx on a number of issues relating to social stratification. Some of these
points of agreement are the following:
1 . Group conflict is the essence of conflict in society.
2 . People are driven by self-interest.
3 . Those people in society who own property are better positioned to defend themselves
than those who are propertyless.
4 . Institutions in society, especially in the economic sphere, are critical to shaping the
nature of society.
5 . The powerful in society use their ideas and values to maintain control over the powerless.
6 . Only in extreme and abject situations of exploitation would the exploited people object.
Beyond these points of congruence, Weber modified Marx’s basic premises of the operation of
society. In addition to giving weight to the importance of the economic sphere in the shaping
of society, Weber further emphasized the significance of status and power in the analysis of
stratification.
Weber agreed with Marx that the unequal distribution of resources in society results in economic
classes with varying degrees of economic power. Additionally, he maintained that status groups
are shaped by lifestyle, which in turn is influenced by income and education. For Weber, people
who share similar lifestyles display a proclivity to gravitate towards one another to establish
social bonds and thereby develop an attitude of social exclusivity. For example, members of the
same status group may be members of the same golf club and social group among other things.
Those who are outside of the status group are seen as ‘outsiders’.
Weber maintained that there is a relationship between economic based stratification and
social status stratification. Generally speaking, those who have a high social standing also have
high economic power in society.
Social Stratification: Concepts and Theories | 231
Weber observed that inequality in political power arises when groups in society are able to
influence activities to their benefit. For example, members of the business community may
lobby the state and political parties to have their interests represented in election campaigns.
Importers may woo the state to lower import taxes so that they can maximize their profits. In
return for the support of the business community, politicians are promised large financial support
for their campaigns. The smaller local manufacturers and consumers may be powerless and
therefore unable to engage in political arrangements like those of the more influential members
of the business community.
Although Weber observed that class, status and power are related, he asserted that they are not
the same. For him, one can exist without the other. For instance, someone may possess economic
power, but may lack the social status to be accepted in society.
Weber in his theory makes a distinction between class, status and power. For Weber, these
concepts were sources of stratification, which could ultimately impact upon the life chances of
individuals.
Unlike Marx, who was somewhat optimistic that the inequality and exploitation that characterized
the capitalist system would eventually give way to a more just and egalitarian society under
communism and socialism, Weber was pessimistic about the future of a just and humane world.
EDUCATION, EQUALITY AND MOBILITY
In ‘open’ stratified societies, education plays an important role in facilitating social mobility
and equality. Education serves as the vehicle for social mobility, as it provides the skills and
training that is required to fill the most important jobs. Education provides an avenue, for
those who have been historically disadvantaged by the nature of the stratification system, to
achieve social mobility. This view is supported by functionalist theorists such as Parsons, and
Davis and Moore, who see the education system as being an important mechanism for providing
the necessary training for the talented members to fill the functionally important jobs in
society. For filling the functionally important jobs, these members are rewarded for their hard
work and sacrifices, with high pay and status. Therefore, education provides an avenue for social
mobility and equality in society.
Education provides an opportunity for members of the lower strata to improve their life chances
and not be limited from social mobility because of ascriptive factors such as skin colour, sex or
racial background. Education allows for members of the society to share in the economic
wealth of the society.
232 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Table 8.1: The Functionalist and Conflict Views of Social Stratification: A Comparison
The Functionalist View
The Conflict View
1. Stratification is universal, necessary,
and inevitable
1. Stratification may be universal
without being necessary or
inevitable.
2. Social organization (the social
system) shapes the stratification
system.
3. Stratification arises from the
societal need for integration,
coordination, and cohesion.
4. Stratification facilitates the optimal
functioning of society and the
individual.
5. Stratification is an expression of
commonly shared social values.
6. Power usually is distributed
legitimately in society.
7. The economic dimension is
subordinate to other dimensions of
society.
2. The stratification system shapes
social organizations (the social
system).
3. Stratification arises from group
conquest, competition and
conflict.
4. Stratification impedes the optimal
functioning of society and the
individual.
5. Stratification is an expression of
the values of powerful groups.
6. Power usually is distributed
illegitimately in society.
7. The economic dimension is
paramount in society.
8. Tasks and rewards are allocated
equitably.
8. Tasks and rewards are allocated
inequitably.
9. Stratification systems generally
change through evolutionary
processes.
9. Stratification systems generally
change through revolutionary
processes.
Source: Henry L. Tischler, Introduction to Sociology (New York: The Harcourt Press, 2004), 201. (Originally
adapted from J.L. Roach et al., Social Stratification in the United States (Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall).
Social Stratification: Concepts and Theories | 233
Activity 8.4
Please attempt the following essay:
Compare and contrast the functionalist and conflict approaches to stratification. State which
perspective may be more applicable to the Caribbean, and why.
Consequences of Stratification
Whether or not a society is stratified on the basis of achieved or ascribed status, the population
can possibly experience several consequences. In rigidly stratified societies, where there is little
room for social mobility and equality in the distribution of resources, social problems of poverty
and crime are exacerbated. The poor get poorer and new categories of the poor are developed,
such as the ‘working poor’ – as was very evident during the 1980s in countries that implemented
the structural adjustment policies of the International Monetary Fund (IMF) and the International
Bank for Reconstruction and Development (IBRD) popularly known as the World Bank. Another
phenomenon that has recently been made visible by researchers is the feminization of poverty,
which is linked to the gender stratification of society. Poverty tends to impact much more heavily
upon women than upon men. This situation is further compounded where women have
to exercise the dual responsibility of being the head of the household and being the economic
provider for the family.
The goals of the privileged and the under-privileged, generally speaking, do not differ:
they both seek a high standard of living, which is reflected in the various symbols of material
consumption such as houses, cars, and the latest technology in various other items. In a stratified
society, especially in one that is largely ‘closed’, the evident social and economic inequality
in the distribution of resources may result in an upsurge in social deviance and crime. As Merton
indicated, when the social structure does not facilitate the equitable achievement of societal
goals, a ‘strain’ is placed on the less privileged, which may result in the practice of illegitimate
activities to share in the aspirations of the society. In addition, an exploitative social structure
may result in a sense of hopelessness and anomie, which may be manifested in acts of deviance
such as a lack of respect for rules and authority.
In societies that are stratified along racial and ethnic lines, social tension tends to be quite
evident. The nature of these societies tends to be conflict oriented. The various groups tend
to battle amongst themselves for control of both political and economic resources, to foster
the interest and concerns of its members. Such activities have not always been met with
agreement by all groups concerned, and have resulted in different forms of opposition. Some of
234 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
the opposition has taken place in the form of peaceful protest while other action has resulted in
fighting and bloodshed, as in the case of ‘ethnic cleansing’.
In attempting to correct the ills of stratification systems that have been historically ascribed,
new forms of social inequality are created. The use of affirmative action or positive discrimination
policies, despite their manifest functional expectations, may result in the furtherance of ascribed
status in the determination of the nature of the social structure. In other words, it fosters reverse
discrimination, as skin colour, sex and racial background become focal issues in correcting a
historical system that was founded on similar criteria. For instance, Cricket South Africa
(CSA) has implemented a quota policy for the selection of its national cricket team where at
least seven non-white players must be considered for selection to the national team. Such a
policy has sparked enormous controversy and resulted in some of the highly rated players leaving
South Africa to play in other countries. England has benefited from such a policy, as Kevin
Pietersen, in reaction to the policy, made himself available to the English cricket selectors. One
of the key questions that have to be asked when evaluating the effects of positive discrimination
is which is worse: being chosen because of certain ascribed factors, or not being chosen because
of certain ascribed factors?
Summary
•
Most societies are characterized by social inequality, which is indicated by the unequal
distribution of wealth, power, prestige and social status.
•
Social stratification results when social inequality becomes patterned and institutionalized.
•
It is the hierarchical ordering of groups in society.
•
There are numerous key concepts that help to explain the basis of stratification in society,
such as status, social class, social mobility, elites, race and ethnicity, and sex and gender.
•
Social mobility is the movement between classes. Mobility can be vertical, horizontal,
inter-generational or intra-generational.
•
Open stratified systems are characterized by mobility, and closed systems are characterized
by limited mobility.
•
There are different types of stratification systems: slavery, the caste system, the
estate system, and the class system.
•
The Functionalist perspective views social stratification as inevitable and necessary
for meeting the goals of society.
•
The Conflict perspective views social stratification as exploitative and disadvantageous
to the owners of labour.
Social Stratification: Concepts and Theories | 235
•
Weber viewed stratification as not based solely on economic resources, but also on status
and power.
•
Education provides an avenue for social mobility and equality in society.
•
Social stratification can result in increases in social problems such as poverty and crime.
It can also result in social conflict and the use of positive discrimination policies may worsen the
system it has set out to correct.
Activity 8.5
Distinguish between the following:
a) ascribed and achieved status
b ) caste and class
c) horizontal and vertical social mobility
d) inter-generational or intra-generational mobility
e) race and ethnicity
f ) sex and gender
Activity 8.6
Essay Questions
1 . Describe and explain one example of a closed stratification system and one example of an
open stratification system.
2 . What do you believe are the major factors affecting the rate of social mobility in a
named Caribbean society?
3 . Of what relevance to the Caribbean is Davis and Moore’s theory on social stratification?
4 . Discuss changes in the system of social stratification in a named Caribbean territory
over the past 50 years.
236 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
5 . ‘Colonialism is seen as the major contributory factor to the stratification system in the
Caribbean.’ Discuss.
6 . Discuss some of the consequences of inequality in the contemporary Caribbean.
7 . Distinguish between the concepts of race and ethnicity. Discuss the effects of these factors
in determining the life chances of young people in the Caribbean.
CHAPTER 9
STRATIFICATION IN THE CARIBBEAN
OBJECTIVES
At the end of this chapter, students should be able to:
1. discuss the evolution of Caribbean social stratification from slavery to present day;
2. analyse the impact of stratification systems on Caribbean societies.
CONTENT
1. Evolution of Caribbean Stratification
a.
Plantation Society (ascribed status, closed system).
b.
Post-Emancipation (very limited mobility).
c.
Post-Second World War (beginning of achieved status).
d. Post-Independence (achieved status, open system).
2. Impact of Stratification system on Caribbean Societies
a.
Social (marginalisation of the lower class; crime; gender).
b.
Economic (ethnicity; class; gender).
c.
Political (ethnicity; class).
INTRODUCTION
The social structure of the Caribbean has been shaped by its history, especially colonialism
and post-colonialism. During colonialism, ascribed factors such as race, and sex contributed
significantly to determining one’s life chances in society. These ascribed factors were very dominant
during slavery and after its abolition in 1838 and the end of the indentureship in 1917. The
post-colonial period is marked by the independence movement which started in Jamaica and
238 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Trinidad and Tobago in 1962. Political independence implied self-governance and an opportunity
for regional governments to embark upon social and economic programmes and public policy to
promote nationalism and improve the well-being of the population. One of the main objectives
of government programmes has been the provision of equal opportunities to the population
regardless of race, ethnicity, sex, and class to achieve social mobility. Education has been the
main tool used by governments to achieve social equity in the region. However, though there has
been considerable change in the social structure from the colonial period there are still vestiges
of ascription determining people’s life chances.
There are several significant scholarly contributions to the study of stratification in the Caribbean.
The most prominent of these works have been M.G. Smith’s Plural thesis and Lloyd Braithwaite’s
‘Social Stratification in Trinidad and Tobago’. Smith’s work focuses on cultural and racial diversity,
whereas Braithwaite’s focus is on an ascriptive – particularistic value system.
Caribbean Perspectives on Stratification
Race Stratification – M.G. Smith
M.G. Smith argues that most of the societies in the Caribbean are plural societies where
there exist significant cultural diversity and race antagonism. For Smith (1984), it is the cultural
and racial diversity that results in discord between the cultural groups. Smith insists that the
different ethnic or cultural groups in the Caribbean practised distinctive forms of the same
institutions in society.
For example, in Trinidad and Tobago, the Hindus have a distinctive marriage practice of
‘bamboo wedding’, the extended family, and a family system that was premised on a patriarchal
arrangement. Neither whites nor Africans observe these institutions in a similar manner.
For Smith, societies such as Trinidad and Tobago, Guyana and Jamaica had a closed system
of stratification. Such a system of stratification precluded any significant social mobility. As
a corollary, Smith observed three broad strata in these societies: whites, browns and blacks.
Smith’s model of the region’s social structure draws strength from the impact of colonialism.
The dominance of the whites in society was achieved through their control of the political
system and the economy. Their control of the strategic institutions of society was reinforced
by their attendance at elite schools and the practice of endogamy. Because of the structure of
the stratification system, those groups that were at the bottom of the system experienced
constant resentment and vilification by those at the top of the social structure. Given his view
of society, Smith believed that colonial society was held together by the use of force.
Stratification in the Caribbean | 239
The disturbances of the 1930s across the British West Indies and the 1970 Black Power Revolution
in Trinidad and Tobago are examples of groups in the society expressing their dissatisfaction
with the social structure and the lack of visibility in the promotion of social mobility, especially
for members of the lower strata. Such social upheavals rendered support for Smith’s thesis of
stratification premised upon the ascriptive factor of colour.
Criticisms of Smith
Smith’s theory of social stratification in the Caribbean has been the subject of many debates.
The main criticisms of Smith are summarized below:
1. Caribbean societies have evolved into class societies and not cultural sections as the Smith
model suggests. Many critics argue that education has been the main equalizer in society
and as a result has accounted for social mobility across race and ethnic boundary lines.
The rise of the local intelligentsia comprising members of both Africans and Indians in
countries such as Trinidad and Tobago and Guyana is testimony to the rapid spread of
education to all in these territories.
2. The extent and degree of conflict that Smith expected to come about as a result of cultural
diversity and racial antagonism have been exaggerated. In fact, in many of the islands
interculturation has resulted where cultural and racial diversity exists. For example, in
Trinidad and Tobago new genres of music have been produced as a result of the merging
of culturally disparate musical forms.
Social Stratification in Trinidad and Tobago
– Lloyd Braithwaite
Braithwaite (1960), following on the pioneering work of Talcott Parsons, focused his attention on
the values and norms necessary for the functioning of society. Hence, Braithwaite was concerned
with the problem of integration in society. As a result of the concern for integration, Braithwaite
was interested in the set of pattern variables – universalism versus particularism – that Parsons
associated with the integrative function of society.
He observed that the social structure in Trinidad and Tobago was founded on an ascriptiveparticularistic basis. It was based on the positive evaluation of the white groups in society and
the negative evaluation of the black group. The other groups, such as Chinese and Indians,
that entered society sought to separate themselves from the blacks as much as possible. Hence,
ethnic identification and ethnic purity became the premise upon which the social structure was
established.
240 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
The ascriptive value system that prevailed at the time of Braithwaite’s research manifested
itself in a number of spheres of social life. In schools, churches, carnival and sporting clubs,
differentiation was based upon an ascriptive-particularistic basis. For example, in the early days,
the carnival queen was always white.
Although ethnic affiliation and purification were the values upon which the social structure was
erected, the distinct groups were kept together by an assimilation of white values, which
was held up as being the ‘ideal’. This assimilation of the Anglo-Saxon value system allowed
for the functional prerequisites of the society to be achieved. So, for example, English was
accepted as the official language, and the title of doctor and lawyer became symbols of prestige
and status in society. Therefore, unlike Smith, Braithwaite argues that it was not only force
that held order in the societies but also an acceptance of the basic values emanating from
the metropolitan nexus.
Selwyn Ryan (1991), building on the earlier work of Braithwaite, asserts that the ascriptiveparticularistic value system that laid the basis for the social structure in the pre-1953 period in
Trinidad and Tobago has given way to an open class system based upon meritocracy. No longer
does the colour of one’s skin, one’s race or ethnicity play a significant role in determining one’s
life chances in society. For Ryan (1991), the social structure has undergone a transformation, and
the major vehicles of this transformation have been political independence, the transformation
of the economy, education and the creation of new wealth. However, he warns that vestiges of
ascriptive-particularism still exist today.
Therefore, it is evident that over time the social structure in Trinidad and Tobago has moved
from one that was ‘closed’ to one that is ‘open’.
Changes in Caribbean Social Structure
A number of factors have been responsible for the basis of the social structure of the Caribbean
changing from being predominantly ‘closed’ to becoming ‘open’. Most of the factors responsible
for these changes coincide with self-governance and making social mobility accessible to
everyone. These factors include political independence, transformation of the economy,
and the availability of education.
Self- governance resulted in policies and measures being adopted to ensure that the majority
of the population was presented with opportunities to experience social mobility and by extension
enjoy a higher standard of living than they were experiencing. As discussed in the functionalist
model of society, education was seen as the main vehicle for the achievement of social mobility.
Stratification in the Caribbean | 241
Stratification in the Developed World
and the Caribbean: A Comparison
In the following section the main similarities and differences between stratification systems
in the Caribbean and in industrialized societies will be discussed. You will observe that theorists
in both societies fail to agree about the nature of stratification in their particular societies.
Similarities
a.
Economic inequality is the main cause of the formation of different social strata.
b.
The ruling elites use primogeniture, endogamy and other forms of social exclusion as
a means of preserving the status quo.
c.
There is a strong correlation between class and colour: the lighter skinned are more
economically powerful and darker skinned people are more materially deprived.
d. Conflict is kept in check by a number of mechanisms employed by the state. For example,
legislation is enacted to promote opportunities for social mobility among the lower classes.
Differences
a.
Social strata in developed societies are more homogeneous than those in many Caribbean
states. The Caribbean’s stratification system has been shaped by a number of forces such
as slavery and indentureship, which have created relatively small and racially and ethnically
fragmented societies.
b. The concepts of race, colour, prestige and the accompanying perceptions are defined
differently in Caribbean and developed societies. Though some ethnic groups in Caribbean
societies exist in small numbers, they may not face prejudice and discrimination, and cannot
really be considered minorities in the sociological sense. For instance, in the Caribbean,
even though the proportion of whites is small, they occupy some elite positions in society
because of their economic prosperity.
c.
In the industrialized or developed societies, social mobility is based more on achievement
than on ascription. The reverse is usually true for many Caribbean (developing) societies,
although the trend is changing as these societies become more industrialized.
242 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Activity 9.1
What changes have occurred in the middle class in a named industrial society over the
last century?
The following should be helpful in writing your essay:
1. Are you able to interpret the question properly? (What do you think are the key words
being addressed?)
2. Ensure that you define the characteristics of the middle class.
3. Devise your own plan for the essay. Say what you intend to do in the introduction, body
and conclusion.
4. List, and discuss in detail, the main changes that the middle class has experienced over the
last century.
5. Ensure that you have adequate synthesis. (Convey ideas in your own way, and do not
merely re-tell what a textbook has said).
6. Provide evidence of evaluation in the conclusion.
Activity 9.2
With your teacher’s guidance, you may attempt the e s s a y questions below:
Instructions
•
Write only one essay at a time.
•
Use the argumentative style of writing. (Your answer should be between 600 and 700
words.)
•
Conduct research using different sources before beginning your answer.
•
List all the points you intend to use and determine the order of presentation.
Wait for feedback from your teacher before moving on to the next essay.
Stratification in the Caribbean | 243
Essay Questions
1. ‘M.G. Smith’s theory of the stratification of plural societies is suited to plantation societies
but not to contemporary West Indian societies.’ Explain and critically discuss this statement.
2. In what ways would you suggest that Caribbean societies are stratified? Your answer should
make reference to actual research findings in the region.
3. ‘The Marxist theory of stratification is more relevant than the functionalist theory, to
the system of stratification found in the Caribbean.’ How accurate is this claim?
Changing Patterns of Caribbean Stratification
The readings listed in Activity 9.3 below should lead you to a clear understanding of the
nature of Caribbean stratification. They point to a complex system in which there are at
least three bases of stratification in society. You will have realized, by now, that these are race,
class and gender. In contemporary British societies, debate arises about the changing pattern
of class stratification. Some theorists have agreed with Marx that society will become polarized
into contrasting strata with differing levels of wealth, power and prestige. However, it is not
quite evident what the two polarities (classes) are.
Likewise, with regard to the Caribbean context, we need to understand the changes that are
occurring within these societies. The theoretical assumption that governs these changes can
be adopted from the work of the Jamaican theorist Edward Kamau Brathwaite (1971). To what
extent do you agree with his proposition that West Indian societies (in this case Jamaica) are
being transformed by processes of creolization?
You should take special note of the two major means by which creolization occurs. These
are acculturation and interculturation. Decide for yourself the extent to which your society
has been and is currently being influenced by processes of creolization. The ensuing exercise
will assist in clarifying any misconceptions you may have about the processes of change that
may be taking place in the contemporary Caribbean. You should be able to decide for yourself
whether or not there has been modification to the stratification system of the region.
244 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Activity 9.3
Consult the readings below and then answer the questions that follow:
1. Smith, M.G., Culture, Race and Class in the Commonwealth Caribbean. Mona: Department
of Extra-Mural Studies, University of the West Indies, 1984.
2. Brathwaite, E . K., The Development of Creole Society in Jamaica 1770–1820. Oxford:
Clarendon Press, 1971; Reissued, Kingston: Ian Randle Publishers, 2005.
a.
Explain how Smith describes the stratification system of plural societies.
b . How accurate is his explanation of stratification of West Indian societies in your
opinion?
c.
Discuss the relevance of functionalism and conflict theory to Smith’s
conceptualization of society.
d. Explain the meaning of each term below (giving examples where necessary):
i.
Acculturation
ii. Interculturation
e.
Discuss the role of education, religion and the mass media on culture change in
your society.
f.
List five examples of interculturation in your society.
g. Suggest ways in which Brathwaite’s theory of ‘creolization’ serves as a critique of
Smith’s notion of plurality.
h. State the contribution of M.G. Smith and Kamau Brathwaite to the
understanding of the changing nature of West Indian societies.
The Evolution of Caribbean Social Stratification:
Slavery to Present Day
A number of processes forged by European expansionist policies in the West have contributed
immeasurably to the changing patterns of stratification in the Caribbean. In the days of Amerindian
society, it is evident that society was relatively closed. This was the case because, as historians
suggest, status was based largely on ascription, and there was little room for social mobility.
With the coming of the Spaniards, the closure that characterized West Indian society continued.
Spanish enslavement of the Amerindians caused the stratification system to become more
Stratification in the Caribbean | 245
heterogeneous in terms of race. There existed two main races, the Spaniards and the Amerindians.
What was significant, however, was the unavailability of opportunities for the Amerindians to
become similar in status to the Spaniards, regardless of their social and economic circumstances.
The establishment of sugar plantations represented a significant shift in the stratification system.
This era was well described by M.G. Smith in his plural society thesis. Smith believed that
plantation societies were caste-like in their stratification. There was a direct correlation between
race, colour and socio-economic status. The hierarchical structure consisted of whites, browns
and blacks, in that order.
Figure 9.1 depicts a complex stratification system. The three major strata, white, mixed
and black, were in themselves heterogeneous groups. Over time, a limited amount of upward
mobility was possible from the base stratum to the middle stratum. Those born of white
fathers and enslaved mothers were automatically ranked higher than the enslaved. Additionally,
many of the enslaved were able to purchase their freedom and enter the middle stratum. In
this case, their status was close to that of the mulatto (mixed descent).
The student who is familiar with Caribbean history should be able to differentiate between the
stratification systems of the older slave colonies (Leeward Islands) and those of Trinidad
and Tobago, Guyana, and Jamaica in the post-emancipation era.
Figure 9.1: Stratification in Plantation Society
Whites
Planters
Managers
Mixed/Mulattoes
& Freed Negroes
Blacks
Artisans
House Slaves
Field Slaves
246 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
The process of indentureship to a great extent compounded the stratification system in
Trinidad and Guyana. In Trinidad and Tobago, it is explicit that between 1845 and 1917
(the indentureship period) the society was divided further along lines of race, and fostered very
little mobility. Figure 9.2 suggests the way Trinidad and Tobago’s stratification system could
be illustrated.
The more important features you should note are that firstly, the society was race and colour
stratified, and secondly, the races were not homogenous entities but heterogeneous, since they
included different status groups. You should be able to observe the major factors that created
changes in the stratification system of some West Indian societies.
The post-colonial period, marked by Jamaica and Trinidad and Tobago achieving political
independence in 1962 from England, has seen significant changes in the social structure of
some West Indian societies. The social structure has undergone significant transformation as
the social mobility was now mainly due to changes in the economy, the creation of new wealth
and greater educational opportunities. Academic achievement has now become the main vehicle
for enabling social mobility.
Figure 9.2: The Stratification System of Trinidad and Tobago in the Period following Emancipation
(post-1845)
White
Coloured/Mixed
Black
East
Indian
Stratification in the Caribbean | 247
Figure 9.3: The Social Stratification of Trinidad and Tobago in the post-independence
1962 period
Upper Class
Middle Class
Lower Class
In figure 9.3 the social structure of Trinidad and Tobago since political independence shows a
change from one being based on race and colour to one stratified by social class. Each class is
not necessarily homogenous as it would include members from the various racial and ethnic
groups in the society. The heterogeneity of the class structure represents the impact of education
and the creation of new wealth as a means of facilitating social mobility regardless of ascribed
factors such race and sex.
The Impact of Stratification Systems on Caribbean Societies
Gender and Stratification
Gender changes have been taking place in the Caribbean over the last 50 years. Women have
entered and excelled in areas of activities in which they were previously restricted or discouraged
from participation, and at the same time, have slid men down the social ladder. According to
Miller (1991), women have been advancing their social position in fields of education at all
248 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
levels – primary, secondary and tertiary – and even in the workplace. At the same time,
men have demonstrated relatively lower levels of achievement, and in some cases are being
replaced by women in the workplace.
However, despite the advances that women have made in education and in achieving social
mobility, the patterns of employment reflect gender inequality. Women in the middle class
tend to dominate the lower-status (teaching) and lower-paid jobs, and within the teaching
professions, the better-paid positions of authority and decision-making remain in the domain
of males. Furthermore, although there have been increases in the number of employed women,
especially in the lower strata, their jobs (as maids, babysitters, fast-food attendants, sales clerks,
and typists) tend to reflect an extension of the role in the home – that of nurturer and food
provider. Therefore, although the ‘glass ceiling’ may reflect some superficial cracks, it seems
to be quite intact in terms of maintaining a legacy of patriarchy. It is evident, therefore,
that although there have been some advances towards achieving gender equality, there is a long
road to travel before the gender- based stratification system is corrected.
Comparative Male and Female Enrollment and Achievement
A number of factors have been posited for explaining gender differences in academic achievement
in the Caribbean (Brown 1993; Parry 2000; Evans 1999; Kutnick et al. 1997; Miller 1991).
Some of these factors include socio-economic and home background, biological differences, and
the gender of the teachers. The literature indicates that dropout rates are higher for males than
for females, and that females generally outperform their male counterparts at the primary
and secondary levels (Parry 2000; Kutnick et al. 1997). However, the ‘gendering’ of subjects
along traditional lines still exists, with females excelling better in the ‘soft’ subjects and males
in the ‘hard’ subjects.
According to Parry (2000), the recent trend in gender enrolment and achievement reflects a
reversal of historical trends whereby females were largely absent at the higher levels of the school
system. This change in gender enrolment reflects socio-economic changes in the Caribbean,
in which greater educational opportunities have been made available to females, and also
the debunking of the social and cultural myth that education was not desirable for females.
At the tertiary level, Miller (1991) notes that gender enrolment of Jamaican students at the
University of the West Indies has also shown increased female enrolment. However, closer
examination shows that the enrolment is stratified between the faculties. Males are dominant
in the science-oriented faculties and females are dominant in the faculties that offer subjects
in the humanities. A similar trend is also seen at the St Augustine campus in Trinidad and
Tobago.
Stratification in the Caribbean | 249
Feminization of the Teaching Profession
Like the gender enrolment for the primary, secondary and tertiary levels, the enrolment at the
teachers’ colleges reflects a reversal of the male dominance. According to Miller (1991), female
enrolment at Jamaica’s teachers’ colleges increased from 7.5 per cent in 1872 to 82.3 per cent
by1985 and for the corresponding period, male enrolment declined from 92.5 per cent to
17.7 per cent. A similar trend may be observed in other Caribbean territories. It can be said that
this trend has resulted in the feminization of the teaching profession.
Several factors are responsible for this growing trend within the teaching profession in the region.
The increases in educational opportunities for women over the years, along with their levels of
achievement, have allowed women to take advantage of opportunities in the teaching profession
and thereby experience social mobility. The position of women in the teaching profession has
also been aided by the overall slide of the male in education.
Occupation and Stratification
According to Yelvington (1993) the post emancipation period in Trinidad and Tobago was
characterized by obvious ethnic division of labour. The plantations were owned and operated
by the whites; the blacks and coloured were involved in professional and skilled occupations;
the Chinese and Portuguese were involved in trading activities; and the Indians were involved in
agriculture related activities. Therefore, occupations were racially and ethnically defined during
this period.
However, the post-independence period has seen a transformation of the occupational structure
with regard to race and ethnicity. The major racial and ethnic groups comprise the Public Sector
although there may be some imbalance. This can be explained by the process of seniority or
years of working experience being used as the major criterion for promotion. The professions
also reflect ethnic changes. This is largely due to the increasing importance of education as the
main vehicle for social mobility.
Summary
•
The stratification system in the Caribbean has moved from one that was primarily
based on ascriptive-particularistic factors to one based on achievement.
•
M.G. Smith’s plural thesis attempts to explain stratification in the Caribbean based
on distinctive cultural segments.
•
Lloyd Braithwaite, drawing upon the work of Parsons, explains stratification in Trinidad
and Tobago by focusing on values and norms necessary for the functioning of society.
250 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
•
Both the functionalist and conflict perspectives of stratification fail to account for
social stratification in the Caribbean using their original orientation.
•
Political independence, changes in the economy, and education have accounted for changes
in the Caribbean social structure.
•
The Caribbean’s stratification system shares both similarities to and differences
from that which obtains in other Western industrialized countries.
•
Gender changes have been taking place in the Caribbean where the traditional
gender stratification system has been challenged, but the gender system is intact, in a
modified form.
•
Females are performing better than males at all levels of the educational system.
They also have a lower drop-out rate than males.
•
Teacher enrolment reflects a reversal of historical trends where men dominated the
field. This has resulted in the ‘feminization’ of the teaching profession.
•
Occupation reflects academic achievement as opposed to ascribed factors.
Activity 9.4
1. Write short notes on each of the following:
a.
social closure
b. indentureship
c.
emancipation
2. Write an essay (of no more than 800 words) on each topic. Refer to the earlier section on
the guidelines for writing an essay. Re-read these guidelines before proceeding.
a.
What are the most significant processes that have effected change in the West
Indian stratification system over the last two centuries?
b.
Assess the proposition that West Indian society has historically been stratified on
the basis of ascription. (Your answer should be confined to studies of the British West
Indies).
3. Discuss changes in the system of social stratification in a named Caribbean territory
over the past 50 years.
Stratification in the Caribbean | 251
4. ‘Colonialism is seen as the major contributory factor to the stratification system in the
Caribbean.’ Discuss.
5. Discuss some of the consequences of inequality in the Caribbean.
6. Distinguish between the concepts of race and ethnicity. Discuss the effects of these
factors in determining the life chances of young people in the Caribbean.
Unit 2
Development and
Social Change
UNIT 2 - MODULE 1
POPULATION AND DEVELOPMENT
CHAPTER 10
INTRODUCTION TO POPULATION STUDIES
OBJECTIVES
On completion of this chapter, students should be able to:
1 . explain the concepts used in population studies;
2 . explain population trends using quantitative and qualitative measures; and
3 . examine population policies in developed and developing countries.
CONTENT
1. Concepts in Population and Development:
Population Concepts: crude birth rate; crude death rate, fertility rate, natural increase; life
expectancy; migration, population growth rate, dependency ratio, quality of life index, human
development index (HDI).
2. Population Trends
a.
Quantitative measures used for explaining trends in population for developed and
developing countries, for example, age, sex, ethnicity, religion, occupation.
Qualitative measures used for explaining trends in population for developed and
developing countries, for example, HDI.
INTRODUCTION
The study of population is critical to the appreciation of issues such as modernization, development,
underdevelopment and dependency in the Caribbean. While most advanced industrialized
societies such as the United States of America and the United Kingdom have, over the last 200
258 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
years, been able to maintain a manageable population size, most developing countries continue
to experience population growth beyond a capacity that can be adequately sustained.
A number of theories suggest that development should address two main concerns: the first is
economic and the second socio-cultural. While there is greater concern with the economic
implications of population growth, other issues such as culture, education and health, though
inextricably linked to population growth, are usually not adequately addressed. Experience has
shown that the study of population cannot be compartmentalized, since population size and
population growth are related to a number of economic, socio-cultural and political factors.
BASIC CONCEPTS IN POPULATION STUDIES
Demography is the scientific study of human population. The study includes the size, composition
and distribution of the population. Demographers search for explanations of demographic change
and the implications of such change for societies. They use censuses, birth and death records,
sample surveys of population, visa and other immigration records, even motor vehicle and school
registrations. They shape these data into manageable forms such as simple counts, rates or ratios.
Just as effective development depends on a reliable knowledge of natural and
other resources, so does effective development planning depend upon reliable
knowledge of the size, composition, growth and movement of population (Arthur
Haupt and Thomas T. Kane, Population Handbook, 5th Edition, 2004).
The paragraph above illustrates the dynamic nature of population studies. It explicitly links
the study of population to social problems and social change. Sociologists like C.W. Mills have
long dealt with the idea of the sociological imagination. In his discourse, Mills seeks to
distinguish a social problem from a personal problem. He postulated that social problems can be
appreciated only within the framework of the larger picture in which people experience life.
However, within the Caribbean, M. Cross (1970) makes a more practical distinction between a
social problem and a personal one. Cross argues that it is only when a problem becomes of concern
to an entire society, community or group that it becomes a social one. For many Caribbean states,
population concerns have emerged as a social problem primarily because favourable social and
economic factors have the potential to encourage the almost unchecked growth of population.
It is also important to analyse population in terms of its components. It is against this background
that we present a number of definitions of basic concepts relevant to an understanding of
population. The terms are as follows:
Introduction to Population Studies | 259
•
Crude Birth Rate (CBR)
•
Total Fertility Rate (TFR)
•
Crude Death Rate (CDR)
•
Natural Increase
•
Infant Mortality Rate
•
Life Expectancy
•
Internal and international migration (immigration and emigration)
•
Population growth rate
•
Dependency Ratio
Crude Birth Rate
The birth rate (also called crude birth rate) indicates the number of live births per 1,000
population in a given year (calculated at mid-year). The crude birth rate (CBR) is calculated
by the formula below.
CBR = Number of live births x 1,000
Total Population
For most countries today, it is considered acceptable to have birth rates below 10 per 1,000.
In the year 2000 in the United States, there were 4.1 million live births, a rate of 14.6 per
1,000. This is high indeed, however, the CBR does not take account of differences by age
group of women and is generally not used by demographers and social scientists for explanation
of fertility in a population.
Fertility Rate
People often confuse fertility with fecundity. We shall therefore define fecundity, fertility and
fertility rate, so that you may be able to differentiate the meanings of these terms.
•
•
Fecundity is a w o m a n’s maximum possible childbearing capacity. It is determined
by physiological factors but is sharply reduced by cultural norms, finances, and personal
choice (Macionis 2001).
Fertility, on the other hand, is the actual reproductive performance of an individual,
a couple, a group or a population. The Total Fertility Rate (TFR), sometimes referred
to as fertility rate or general fertility rate, represents the number of children that
260 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
would be born to a woman if she were to live to the end of her childbearing years and
bear children in accordance with current age-specific fertility rates. The rate is usually
calculated using live births per 1,000, of women aged 15–49 years in a given year
(or in some cases 15–44), which is regarded as the reproductive age group for women.
It is biologically practical in most cultures that between these years most women
will bear children.
•
The total fertility rate is a more sophisticated or refined measure than the crude
birthrate, since it identifies the specific ages of women who produce children in a society.
For instance, if we were to use the CBR as the only measure of fertility, we could make
the assumption that children under the age of 15 and women over the age of 50 are
bearing as many children as women aged 15–49, since the CBR provides an estimation
of the average birth rate of the entire population.
•
Demographers are usually concerned with the measurement of the age-specific fertility
rate (ASFR) because it might become clear that women in a specific age group, say
20–24 years, are more likely than women in other age groups to become pregnant and
produce live children.
We illustrate the above with two formulae. The first is for the t o t a l fertility rate, the second
for the age-specific fertility rate, using the age group 20– 24 years.
TFR =
Number of births
Number of women aged 15–49 years
x 1,000
ASFR =
Number of births
Number of women aged 20–24 years
x 1,000
One may compare the 20–24 age group with the 15–19, 20–24, 25–29, 30–44, 35–39 age
groups, depending on the group or groups of women being studied.
One important observation about fertility is the part played by teenage girls and young
women in increasing the birth rate. Teenage pregnancy is of greater concern to underdeveloped
countries than it is to developed countries because teenagers in underdeveloped countries are
more likely to increase the birth rate. This, demographers argue, is because underdeveloped
countries have a higher proportion of youth in their population. Thus, in these countries, a
high rate of teenage sexual activity and pregnancy will, more than anything else, exacerbate the
Introduction to Population Studies | 261
problem of an increase in the number of births. In Caribbean, Latin American and South-east
Asian countries, this is especially the case.
Crude Death Rate
The crude death rate (CDR) is the number of deaths per 1,000 population in a given year. Like
the CBR, it provides an approximation of social reality. For instance, it does not take note of
social and economic differences between people as contributory factors to higher or lower death
rates. For example, in any given country, the poor, older males, and ethnic minorities may have
a higher rate of mortality (death) than, say, the rich, elderly females and ethnic majorities. The
formula for calculation of the CDR is stated below:
CDR = Number of deaths x 1,000
Total Population
Statistics for 1990 reveal that Taiwan’s death rate was 5 per 1,000, whilst Guinea’s was 22 per
1,000. In a later discussion, the implications of the differences between the CDR of different
countries will be discussed.
In a similar way to ASFR, demographers have measured the age-specific death rate (ASDR).
This illustrates the relative chances of people in different age groups living to a particular age
in a society. For example, in 1987, in Australia, there were 1.7 deaths per 1,000 population for
people aged 40–44 years, whilst for those aged 70–74 years old, the death rate was significantly
higher, standing at 33.4 per 1,000 population.
Natural Increase
Natural increase (NI) also known as the rate of natural increase is the surplus of births over deaths
in a given country for a particular year. Conversely, natural decrease (ND) is the deficit of births
over deaths in a given country for a particular year.
Natural Increase is computed using the formula below:
NI = Number of births in a given year – Number of deaths in a given year.
Of course, the same formula can be used to compute natural decrease. A negative value indicates
a deficit of births over deaths.
262 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Infant Mortality Rate
Infant mortality rate (IMR) is the number of deaths of infants under one year of age per
1,000 live births in a given year.
The formula for computing IMR is stated as follows:
IMR = Number of deaths of infants under age 1 x 1,000
Total live births
The IMR, like the CDR, is a good indicator of health status in a given year. In 1990, Japan
recorded the lowest IMR in the world. The figure stood at 4.5 per 1,000, while for the
same year that of Afghanistan stood at 182 per 1,000.
Life Expectancy
Life expectancy (LE) is an estimate of the average number of additional years a person may expect
to live, based on the age-specific death rates for a given year. However, the most commonly cited
life expectancy figure is life expectancy at birth. Life expectancy at birth indicates the number of
years a newborn infant would live if prevailing patterns of mortality at the time of its birth were
to stay the same throughout its life.
Life expectancy is also a hypothetical measure and a good indicator of current health conditions
in a country. Life expectancies are known to differ according to factors such as socio-economic
status, gender and ethnicity. For instance, people of upper and middle classes are generally
expected to outlive those of the lower class. Similarly, women and whites in many societies live
longer than men and non-white minorities respectively. Some researchers have also shown that
life expectancy is associated with marital status, and married men and women tend to outlive
single men and women. Statistics for 1990 indicate that Sierra Leone and Japan had contrasting
life expectancies, at 42 and 79 respectively.
Migration
Migration is the movement of population across a specified boundary for the purpose of establishing
a new residence. However, temporary migration may take place through commuting and/or
tourism.
Introduction to Population Studies | 263
There are different types of migration:
•
internal migration refers to movement within a country; for example, someone in Jamaica
born in Port Antonio may move to Kingston to take up permanent residence there.
•
international migration (immigration and emigration) refers to movement between
countries; for example, someone born in Saint Lucia may move to Europe to take
up permanent residence there.
There are two types of international migration: immigration and emigration.
1 . Immigration refers to the number of people coming into a particular country in a given
year. The immigration rate (IR) measures the number of immigrants arriving at a
destination per 1,000 population in a given year; this is usually caused by pull factors,
such as jobs or better educational opportunities. The IR can be computed in this way:
IR =
Number of immigrants
x 1,000
Total population at destination
In 1989, the rate of immigration in Sweden was 7.8 new immigrants for every 1,000
residents. The higher the IR rate, the more likely it is that a country possesses a high
standard of living.
The opposite is also true.
2 . Emigration refers to the number of people leaving a country in a given year; this is
usually caused by push factors such as war, famine and disease. The emigration rate
(ER) refers to the number of emigrants departing an area of origin per 1,000 population
in a given year.
We can compute the ER using the following formula:
ER =
Number of emigrants
x 1,000
Total population at origin
In 1989, Sweden’s emigration rate was estimated to be 2.5 per 1,000. When the
immigration and emigration rates for Sweden (1989) are compared, it is clear that more
people were likely to enter Sweden a n d s t a y permanently than to leave. This suggests
that more people from other countries were willing to migrate there than were Swedes
willing to take up residence in other countries.
264 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Other types of migration include the following:
•
Regional Migration – this involves movement from one country to another in the
same geographical area; e.g., because of the Caribbean Single Market and Economy
(CSME), there may be greater movement within the region, e.g., from St Kitts to
Barbados or vice versa.
•
Domestic Migration – this could be regional migration or movement from one town,
city or village to another; for instance, someone who leaves Ocho Rios to settle in New
Kingston, also in Jamaica, because of greater employment opportunities.
•
Urbanization – this is a type of domestic migration in which people move from rural
to urban areas. This was the case in many Caribbean territories as a result of the
implementation of the strategy known as Industrialization by Invitation in the 1950s.
Massive numbers of rural dwellers flocked to the outskirts of capitals in search of a better
life. In Trinidad and Tobago, the Beetham Estate (formerly Shanty Town) is an excellent
example of this phenomenon.
However, urbanization can also mean the transformation of rural areas into towns and cities.
Urbanization had its genesis in the Industrial Revolution of the late nineteenth century
in Europe in general, and in England in particular.
•
Commuting – this is daily migration. Most people who commute to work have
to take some form of transportation. This has resulted in massive traffic jams in
Bridgetown, Castries, Kingston and Port of Spain, for instance. The brisk trade in
imported used cars means that the number of motor vehicles on Caribbean roads has
increased by leaps and bounds. The existing road networks seem incapable of carrying
such large volumes of vehicles.
•
Transhumance – is a semi-nomadic form of migration. It is characteristic of Europe
(Alpine) countries and involves the movement of people up and down the mountain
slopes during the different seasons. For example, they may move higher up in summer
in order to take advantage of vegetation for their animals. However, in wintertime
when it is colder, they may move downwards.
Population Growth (PG)
Population growth is an aspect of population change arising out of the interrelation between
births, deaths and migration.
Population growth rate (PGR) is the rate at which a population is increasing (or decreasing)
in a given year, due to natural increase and net migration, expressed as a percentage of the base
population.
Introduction to Population Studies | 265
The PGR can be computed using the formula:
PGR = (Births – deaths, for a given year) + (immigration – emigration, for a given year)
Total Population
An alternative formula may be used to compute population growth, once the rates of natural
increase and net migration have already been computed.
In this case, PGR = Rate of natural increase + net migration rate.
One should realize that it is possible to have negative figures for the rate of natural increase
and net migration rate. In the 1980s, it was reported that, in some advanced industrialized
societies (for example, Italy and Germany), a negative rate of natural increase occurred, primarily
because the number of deaths slightly exceeded the number of births. Also, push factors such
as war and famine may cause a negative net migration rate. In such circumstances, the number
of emigrants would exceed that of immigrants. In other words, negative social and economic
conditions dissuade people from staying in a country and inhibit others from entering.
In the late 1980s, the Sultanate of Brunei had the world’s highest growth rate (6 per
cent) whilst in 1988, Ireland recorded one of the lowest rates of growth at -0.03 per cent.
In 1991, the world’s population was growing at an estimated yearly rate of 1.7 per cent.
Dependency Ratio
The dependency ratio (DRO) is another important measure of a country’s development.
It compares the number of dependants with the number of economically able/productive
people. As the ratio increases there may be an increased burden on the productive members
of the population to maintain the economically dependent. This results in direct impact on
financial expenditure on things like social security, as well as many indirect consequences for
the economically productive member of the population. Dependents are usually the elderly
(those 65 years and over) and the young, (those under 15 years old). The DRO is computed
by the following formula:
DRO = Number of dependants: Number of working population or
DRO = (Population under age 15) + (Population age 65 and older) x 100
Population age 15–64
In most cases, the working population (that is, population age 15–64) is expressed as a percentage
out of 100. For instance, in 1990, the dependency ratio in France was 52:100 and that for
266 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Syria was 116:100. The difference between the dependency ratios for these countries suggests
that France should have had a higher standard of living than Syria, since there was a higher
proportion of economically active people in France’s population.
Summary
You should now be able to define the basic concepts in the study of population. Their meanings
and the methods of computation should be clear. It should be noted that many of these concepts
are interconnected. For this reason, concepts such as birth rate and fertility rates may be confused.
Another important observation is the relationship between births and deaths, migration rates,
immigration and emigration. These variables have several implications for a country’s level
of economic and social development. In fact, countries with relatively low natural increase and
net migration rates are found to have a higher standard of living than many Third World
states where such rates are relatively higher.
The questions in Activity 10.1 should be answered before you move on to population statistics,
the next topic in this chapter.
Activity 10.1
Statement A
In a small country, X, of population 2 million, there were 200,000 births in the year 2000,
of which 800 babies died before the age of one.
Answer questions 1 and 2, using the data from statement A.
1. The crude birth rate for 2000 is
a.
2 per 1,000
b. 10 per 1,000
c.
20 per 1,000
d. 100 per 1,000
Introduction to Population Studies | 267
2. What was the rate of infant mortality in 2000?
a.
1 per 1,000
b. 2 per 1,000
c.
4 per 1,000
d. 8 per 1,000
Statement B
In the same small country, X, of the 2 million population in the year 2000, there were 3,200
non-infant deaths as well as the 800 infant deaths.
Use the data in statement B to answer questions 3 and 4.
3. What is the crude death r ate?
a.
2 per 1,000
b. 4 per 1,000
c.
10 per 1,000
d. 12 per 1,000
4. Which is true of country X?
a.
The population may be expected to decrease in the next 5 years.
b. There were fewer births than deaths for that year.
c.
Medical facilities for infants were very poor.
d. There was a net natural population increase.
Answer question 5 using data from statements A and B.
5. Which of these statements about life expectancy are true?
i.
It is higher in more developed countries.
ii. In most countries, men outlive women.
iii. Life expectancy indicates patterns of internal migration.
iv. It is related to the factors such as health, education and marital status.
268 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
a.
i and iii only
b. ii and iv only
c.
i, ii and iii only
d. i and iv only
6. Which of the following pairs is not correctly contrasted?
a.
immigration and emigration
b. internal migration and external migration
c.
out-migration and emigration
d. in-migration and out-migration
7. Which is true for some Caribbean societies?
a.
push ——— unemployment, poverty
b. pull ——— unemployment, poverty
c.
push ——— high GNP per capita, low life expectancy
d. pull ——— high GNP per capita, low life expectancy
Statement C
In 1990, country Y’s population statistics illustrated migration trends to and from the Caribbean,
America, Europe and Asia only.
From
Country
Country
Country
Country
Y
Y
Y
Y
To
Nos.
Caribbean
America
Europe
Asia
255,000
455,000
167,000
53,000
From
Caribbean
America
Europe
Asia
To
Country
Country
Country
Country
Nos.
Y
Y
Y
Y
80,000
150,000
50,000
20,000
Introduction to Population Studies | 269
Answer the following questions in relation to statement C.
8. What trend is noticeable about the migration patterns?
a.
Country Y has a negative net migration rate.
b. Country Y gets most of its emigrants from Europe and the Caribbean.
c.
Country Y experiences a net gain in population.
d. All of the above.
9. In 1990, Country Y had a net natural increase of –20,000. What is its overall population
change?
a.
700,000
b. 720,000
c.
650,000
d. -720,000
10. Which set of factors is directly related to population change?
a.
births, morbidity, urbanization
b. births, deaths, migration
c.
morbidity, mortality, health
d. morbidity, death, health
11. Which is the most accurate statement of dependency ratio?
a.
ratio of working population to dependants
b. ratio of dependants to working population
c.
difference between working population and dependants
d. difference between dependants and working population
270 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
12. Which is the best example of commuting?
a.
Taking a plane from St John’s, Antigua to Charlestown, Nevis
b. Taking a cruise form Gran Anse, Grenada, to Bequia, St Vincent
c.
Taking a number nine bus from Bridgetown, to Sheraton Mall, Barbados, every
Monday to Friday for work
d. Taking a fast ferry from Georgetown, Guyana to Paramaribo, Suriname, in 2006, for
a business symposium
13. In a country of 12,000,000, there are 2.5 million children under the age of 15, and 9
million people between the ages of 15 and 64. The rest of the population are elderly
and do not work, because they are either incapacitated or retired.
What is the dependency ratio of this country?
a.
2.5:12
b. 9:12
c.
33:100
d. 75:100
14. Which Caribbean island is most likely to suffer from depopulation as a result of negative
net migration?
a.
Barbuda
b. Cayman Islands
c.
St Vincent
d. Montserrat
Population Statistics
At the end of this section, students should be able to compare the population statistics of
different countries. Population statistics are used to indicate the level of human development
in a particular country. They are also used to assist countries to gauge the extent to which their
policies and programmes in social services (such as health and education) are meeting the
needs of the population.
Introduction to Population Studies | 271
As noted in the previous section, demographers use a variety of rates, ratios and other measures
to study population, but these measures are only as accurate as the data from which they are
calculated. Where do demographers obtain data? How accurate are they? Most demographic
measures are based on counts of people or demographic events (for example, births) in a specific
area during a specific time period. Counts come from population censuses, vital registration
systems, national registers, and s a m p l e surveys of population. Their accuracy varies greatly
by country, and even by regions within countries.
Population statistics are mainly collected via censuses which are usually conducted every 10
years. The population census forms the cornerstone of demographic analysis. In many countries,
the census – an enumeration of all households – is the main source of national population data.
It aims to enumerate an entire village, town, city or country and compile demographic, social
and economic information. During the 1980s, about 94 per cent of the world’s population was
enumerated via national censuses. Most demographers estimate that significant changes in
population patterns will become evident at 10-year intervals, and thus plan for counts of the
national population every 10 years.
It is said that the first modern census was conducted in 1801 in Britain. In Trinidad and Tobago,
censuses are conducted in zero-ended years (for example, 1970, 1980, 1990 and 2000.) It would
be interesting for you to find out when censuses are held in other countries from the national
population or a statistics agency. In most of the countries in the Caribbean responsibility for
keeping population and other national statistics is vested in a Central Statistical Office (CSO)
usually located in the country’s capital city.
Censuses usually miss a small percentage of the population, especially in hard-to-enumerate
areas such as mountainous regions, poor neighbourhoods or high crime areas. The population
characteristics that are recorded in censuses are also subject to error. Residents may misrepresent
their income or forget the age of some household members.
Vital events – births, deaths, marriages and divorces – are usually recorded in national vital
registration systems. These are the sources of data used to calculate fertility, mortality, marriage
rates and divorce rates. But in areas in which mothers give birth at home, or where many residents
are illiterate, a large proportion of vital events are never recorded.
Less than half of the world’s population live in countries that have ‘complete’ vital registration
systems. Even ‘complete’ systems may miss up to 10 per cent of a country’s vital events. A few
countries have comprehensive registration systems, or national population registers, that track
individuals from birth to death, and record changes in their residence or marital status.
Surveys often provide estimates of demographic events where registration systems are inadequate.
They also aid in developing estimates of population size during the long 10-year interval
274 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Introduction to Population Studies |
278
Population Statistics for the English-speaking Caribbean
Age-Group
400
300
200
Thousands
100
0
Male
100
Female
200
Thousands
300
400
280
59,355
63,863
0.7
The Bahamas
255,049
303,611
1.8
Barbados
260,491
268,792
0.3
Belize
185,970
232,111
2.5
Dominica
71,183
69,625
-0.2
Grenada
85,123
102,598
1.9
Guyana
723,673
751,223
0.3
Jamaica
2,380,666
2,607,632
0.9
Montserrat
10,639
4,517
-8.2
St Kitts and Nevis
40,618
46,325
1.3
Saint Lucia
133,308
157,490
1.7
St Vincent
106,480
106,255
0.0
Suriname
401,665
492,464
1.5
1,213,733
1,262,366
0.4
Antigua
Trinidad and Tobago
Adapted from http://www.caricomstats.org/Files/Publications/...
The data reveal that
1 . With the exception of Dominica, Montserrat and St Vincent, populations have increased
between 1990 and 2000.
2 . Belize has experienced the greatest population increase between 1990 and 2000.
3 . The region’s total population was just over 6 million in 2000.
4 . Jamaica alone accounts for about 40 per cent of Caricom’s total population.
CHAPTER 11
POPULATION THEORIES
GENERAL OBJECTIVES
Thomas Malthus (1766–1834)
Population Theories | 285
A relevant modern example of this situation is India. India has experienced serious population
control problems and as a result it is likely to exceed even China’s dense population in 20 or
30 years. In Kolkata, for example, people starve in the streets and it is known to be one
of the dirtiest and most crowded cities in the world.
Malthus further noted the following in his essay:
•
When the population outstrips the ability of the area to support it, the only
possible biological response is either for the births to decrease (preventive checks) or
for the deaths to increase (positive checks). Malthus saw births being limited only
by celibacy or abstinence (he was not at all optimistic about the ability of the poor to
use either of these methods), so the only alternative was an increase in death rates
due to starvation and disease.
•
Malthus argued that the solution to the disproportionate relationship between
population and food supply lay in moral restraint, wars, famine and pestilence (disease).
He blamed the poor and called for the abolition of the ‘poor laws’, which granted
charity to the poor. He believed they were merely encouraged to reproduce more rapidly.
He therefore suggested that since the poor would suffer anyway, any help given to them
would only cause their numbers to grow. His solution was to advocate pouring all of the
economic resources into the elite so that they could contribute to high culture – art,
music, science and medicine. Malthus would disapprove of welfare, public schools and
public libraries as a waste of valuable resources.
•
He reckoned that overpopulation would be a necessary evil since the two chief human
desires – food and procreation – were powerful, uncontrollable and unchanging. The
end result would be misery for the majority of the human race via famine, malnutrition
and disease. How then could human misery be averted? This is the Malthusian problem.
Malthus suggested that the family size of the lower class ought to be regulated to ensure
that poor families did not produce more children than they could support. Malthus’s
recommendations to reduce the exponential growth of the poor included marrying later,
spacing children further apart, and abstinence from sexual relations. However, he held
very little faith in the success of moral restraint since he contended that individuals
desired pleasure from sex. Malthus concluded that unless family size was regulated,
famine and misery would become globally epidemic and eventually consume the human
race.
•
Although Malthus thought that famine and poverty were natural outcomes, he also
thought that the ultimate reason for those outcomes was divine institution. He believed
that such natural outcomes were God’s way of preventing man from being lazy. He
argued that they also provided a solution to the growth problem that most people find
286 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
unacceptable (that is, the increase in death rates). Some find the alternative solution
(reducing births) unacceptable as well.
Thomas Malthus: A Critique
In recent years, Malthus’s theory has gained support. It is claimed that in many less developed
countries, food supply lags behind population growth. However, there have been criticisms of
the theory. The criticisms include the following:
•
Malthus’s theory is too simplistic.
•
Much of Malthus’s writing occurred during Stage Two of the demographic
transition in Europe. During this time, food supplies were improving because of the
increasing use of machinery in agriculture. Malthus’s view, that poverty and famine
were natural outcomes of population growth and food supply, was not popular among
social reformers who believed that with proper social structures, all human ills could
be eradicated.
•
Human ability to solve problems will prevent the cycle of war, famine and disease.
One alternative explanation to Malthus’s theory of human degradation is referred to as
the lifeboat earth view. It claims that international aid will avert malnutrition, hunger
and starvation in the poorest nations. Support for this view is found in the Brandt
Report of 1985.
•
The Brandt Report indicated that countries in sub-Saharan Africa will improve their quality
of living if international lending agencies provide financial aid for the improvement of
agriculture and infrastructure.
•
Put another way, the lifeboat earth view perceives large industrialized countries
as the lifeboat (hope of rescue) for people in less developed countries faced with
the problems of hunger, disease, war and death, thereby refuting Malthus’ theory of
population growth.
Marx’s Theory of Population
Marx and Engels reacted very strongly against Malthus’s theory, which they saw as an apology
for the status quo. In other words, they held that Malthus supported bourgeois ideology and
thus blamed the poor for many of the problems in the world.
Marx presented a reversal of Malthus’s thinking about population by counter-arguing that
human misery and suffering under capitalism were the result of bourgeois exploitation. Poverty,
unemployment, hunger and malnutrition were the products of the inequalities of capitalism.
Population Theories | 287
The rich got their wealth at the expense of the poor. Marx thus believed that it was in the interest
of the wealthy to have a mass of unemployed, unskilled, disorganized proletariat that is not
conscious of its plight.
This group in the society therefore become easily exploited and oppressed. Some of Marx’s
concerns are listed below:
•
Malthus’s theory is another instance of the way in which bourgeois economists reify
social relations (that is, change concrete historical social relations and processes into
universal categories or external nature laws).
•
He suggests that Malthus’s principle of population is the principle of the reserve army
of labour or relative surplus population.
•
Marx rejects Malthus’s solution to the problems created by the contradictions inherent
in the capitalist system.
Marx’s own theory of population will now be discussed. Marx’s population theory results in an
understanding of three main issues. The first is capital accumulation and surplus, the second
is the principle of the reserve army of labour and the third is competition for scarce resources.
1. Capital Accumulation and Expansion
Marx and Engels argue that the process of capital accumulation and expansion is dependent
upon the supply of labour. Despite the fact that machinery is necessary for production, any
attempt to increase capitalist surplus is accompanied also by an increase in the labour supply.
Thus, labour is encouraged to reproduce itself. ‘Since the demand for labour is determined
not by the amount of capital as a whole, but by its variable constituent alone, that demand falls
progressively with the increase of total social capital’ (Marx 1970, 629).
In Marx’s view, population growth is class-related. The working class is encouraged to reproduce,
since the demand for their labour is directly proportional to the availability of capital. It therefore
becomes imperative for the bourgeoisie to exploit the working class by suppressing wages and
keeping them in relative poverty since, once in poverty, they will have no choice but to exchange
their labour for wages paid out by capitalists.
The accumulation and expansion of capital constitute the driving force of capitalism. It becomes
possible only as long as capitalism can operate with a profit. It also implies a process of increase
in the demand for labour. Marx suggested that an increase in the demand for labour would
lead to a redistribution of wealth in favour of the proletariat. Laws of demand and supply would
operate in a way to produce higher wages and lower the amount of surplus appropriated by the
288 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
bourgeoisie (this situation did not occur in reality). Capitalists found ways of maintaining
their profitability, one of which was to increase the prices of goods.
Marx accounted for the widening gap between wages and capital accumulation by arguing that
wages never increase enough to endanger the capitalist system. He goes on to assert that when
wages are high, workers will over-reproduce themselves. The consequent population increase
produces a supply of labour larger than the demand. Wages therefore fall to their natural
level. If workers become class-conscious, they will therefore control the supply of labour by
having fewer children.
In sum, Marx contended that the error of Malthus was in focusing on capital accumulation
and its effects upon specific sectors of production, instead of looking at the relationship between
social capital and the total labour force. Because of this weakness, Malthus was thought to
confuse the laws that regulate that general ratio with the laws that regulate the allocation of
specific sectors of the labour force to specific sectors of production.
2. The Principle of the Reserve Army of Labour
Marx believed that a reserve army of labour was necessary for the survival of the capitalist
system. Based on economic principles of demand and supply, it may be observed that
when labour supply is high, demand for labour will be of necessity low. This is the case, since
it would be easy to find a wide variety of skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled labour among a
large supply. The net effect of this is the depression of wages, and the continued increase in
capital accumulation for the bourgeoisie.
In Marx’s analysis, population is the dependent variable. This means that it is affected by capital
accumulation and not the other way round. The production of a reserve army of labour
is the most important mechanism, at the level of analysis of the mode of production. He
thought that the reserve army of labour was international in nature. Here, Marx saw the role of
immigrant labour in modern societies as helping to keep wages down.
Whenever the reserve army of labour is depleted, the level of wages tends to rise thus reducing the
rate of surplus value, a n d the capitalist class will adopt measures to reverse this reduction.
Besides price increases and immigrant labour, they opt for technological advancements and
foreign investments. The combined effect of all these is unemployment, redundancy and a
fall in the demand for labour.
Population Theories | 289
3. Competition for Scarce Positions
Marx felt that as jobs within capitalism would become relatively scarce (in relation to the
supply of labour), labour would increase its technical efficiency. Increased technical efficiency
would mean that those who were employed would work harder in order to keep their jobs.
Their increase in productivity would raise output level. Capitalists would benefit more from
this, since it is they who would receive more profits from the sale of commodities produced
by workers.
Some Marxists, (for example, Zaretsky), in discussing the family, argue that capitalists benefit
from the supply of trained labour since it is parents who have to pay for this (that is, the training
of the labour supply). Marxist feminists add that today it is the women who form a large reserve
army of labour. Capitalists easily exploit women, since many employment opportunities for
women in traditional female occupations (for example, cotton textiles,) require low levels of skill.
Marx’s theory of population can be aptly summarized in these two statements.
1 . A ‘surplus population is a creation of capitalism, and a necessary condition for its
continuation.’
2 . Capitalism requires a surplus of readily exploitable manpower, which it creates by
expropriating land, and by displacing workers with machines.
Neo-Malthusian Theory
Neo-Malthusian theory is derived from Thomas Malthus’s proposition that limited resources
keep populations in check and reduce economic growth.
This perspective first appeared in the 1870s. It tried to justify the growing impoverishment
of working people by pseudo-scientific theories of ‘absolute over-population, and diminishing
returns on the soil.’ Furthermore, it regards birth control, wars and epidemics as a means of
bolstering up capitalism and alleviating the misery of the masses. A great number of its exponents
advocate race discrimination.
One group of proponents of neo-Malthusian theory was the Club of Rome founded in 1968.
In 1972, it raised much public attention with its Limits to Growth theory. It comprised
scientists, economists, businessmen, international high civil servants and former heads of states
from the five continents. It believed that each person could contribute to the improvement of
his society. The neo-Malthusian theorists may be viewed as a splinter group. Essentially they
agree with Malthus that population control is inevitable. An excerpt from Malthus’s writing
of 1798 illustrates this belief:
290 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
I think I may fairly make two postulates. Firstly, that food is necessary to the
existence of man. Secondly, that the passion between the sexes is necessary,
and will remain nearly in its present state...Assuming, then, my postulates
as granted, I say that the power of population is indefinitely greater than the
power in the earth to produce subsistence for man.
Population, when unchecked, increases in a geometrical ratio. Subsistence only increases in an
arithmetic ratio....By the law of our nature, which makes food necessary to the life of man,
the effects of these two unequal powers must be kept equal. This implies a strong and
constantly operating check on population (adapted from Jordan et al. 1994, 48).
However, Jordan et al. disagree with Malthus that factors like war and famine are the key to
population control, and reject such simplistic notions. Instead, they promote a number of ideals,
some of which will be discussed in more detail in later sections of this module. We will now
examine a few neo-Malthusian issues.
Limits to Growth Theory
One strain of the theory purports that unless at or below subsistence level, a population’s fertility
will tend to move upwards. Under-subsistence conditions the fastest growing group in a country’s
population is likely to be progressing most rapidly in agricultural technology. However, in abovesubsistence conditions the fastest growing group is likely to have an extremely high fertility.
According to neo-Malthusian theory, pro-fertility individuals will encourage a hyper-exponential
population growth that will eventually outstrip economic production even in developed countries.
Part of the blame for this increase is put on immigrants who usually tend to be pro-fertility in
orientation.
Neo-Malthusians argued that a Malthusian catastrophe was imminent. Paul R. Ehrlich, one
proponent of this approach, predicted this based on the rapid growth of the world’s population,
especially after the First World War. Coupled with this is the deterioration of farmland. For
example, in South Asia, about half of the land had been degraded. China has already seen 27 per
cent of its arable land suffer irreversible damage due to protracted farming, and continues
to lose about 2,500 square kilometres of farmland annually.
David Pimentel and Ron Nielson working independently, found that the human population
has passed the numerical point where all can live in comfort. In addition, they postulate that
many people today are trapped in misery (see ‘Malthusian Catastrophe’ www.peak-oil-technology.
com/malthusian-catastrophe.html).
Population Theories | 291
Some ecologists conclude that as the earth’s population surpasses the six-billion mark, the
planet’s bourgeoning population will affect the environment and quality of life for humans in
the next 100 years. Evidence of this catastrophe is underway as of at least 1990; for example,
by the year 2000, children in developing countries were dying at a rate of approximately
11,000,000 per annum from strictly preventable diseases. The term ‘misery’ can be taken
to signify conditions such as high infant mortality, low standards of sanitation, malnutrition,
inadequate drinking water, widespread diseases, war, and political unrest.
A 2004 study by Kenneth Arrow and others, suggests that the central concerns regarding
sustainability have shifted from population growth to the consumption/saving ratio, due to
shifts in population growth rates since the 1970s.
Adverse Effects of Population Growth
Ahlburg 1994, and Kelley and McGreevery 1994, claim that unchecked population growth
increases the amount of impoverishment. Additionally, it leads to an increase in environmental
degradation – the misuse of natural resources with adverse consequences for human well-being.
Rapid population growth has also witnessed the depression of wages, especially for the poor who
depend on wages for subsistence. It also strains investment by diverting funds for the purpose
of maintaining a lumpen proletariat (large body of poor people).
Human Causes of Land-Use Change
Land use is constrained by environmental factors such as soil characteristics, topography, and
vegetation. It is a basic factor of production. Human activities that make use of land can effect
change. For example, the conversion of natural forest into cropland can lead to natural disasters
such as landslides, erosion and flooding. Neo-Malthusians are concerned about the impact of
human population growth because of its implications for sustainable development.
The interactions of population, affluence and technology are causes of environmental change.
One type of change that produces devastating effects is desertification. In the less developed
countries this is cause for concern, especially since population growth is still relatively high,
and re-afforestation drives are especially small (Turner at al. 1993).
The Johns Hopkins University and David Bishai (2006) suggests that the following issues are
related to population growth, increases in the world labour force, and problems in agriculture.
292 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
1. Population Growth and Development
Issues such as deforestation, agriculture, employment, education, food and nutrition, water
resources and urbanization are important today. The critical point is that man has continued
to put pressure on available land and natural resources, due to increased population growth.
2. Some Problems Facing Agriculture in Less Developed Countries (LDCs)
Deficiencies in economic policy and effects on the environment have crippled the transformation
of indigenous systems of farming. For instance, the use of artificial fertilizers imported
from abroad has contributed to this diminishing of local cultural practices in many LDCs.
3. World Labour Force
The World Labour Force has almost doubled since the 1950s, moving from 1.2 billion to 2.7
billion. This implies that more jobs will have to be created to cater for the burgeoning numbers
of young people who become eligible to work. In the LDCs this is of particular concern.
Criticisms of Neo-Malthusianism Theory
1. Jordan et al. (1994) claim that some heads of Third World governments (especially in
the 1960s) opposed ideas such as Planned Parenthood. China, for example, viewed
these as no more than naked imperialist attempts to keep down the population of the Third
World for fear of being overthrown.
2. Population control policies encouraged the exploitation of Third World peoples. For
instance, since 1925, Puerto Rican women have been used as guinea pigs for testing the
effectiveness of various birth control measures. In some cases, these women have been found
to suffer from cervical cancer. Additionally, it is claimed that apartheid in South Africa led
to the forceful sterilization of hundreds of young black women b e g i n n i n g i n t h e
1950s. However, despite these criticisms, the idea of population control for the Third
World is today highly regarded. Caribbean nations such as Barbados, The Bahamas, St
Kitts and Nevis, and Antigua and Barbuda have indeed been successful in controlling
population in ways that ease high levels of poverty, illiteracy, hunger and unemployment.
3. A Malthusian catastrophe is not imminent. A 2002 study by the UN Food and
Agriculture Organization predicts that world food production will be in excess of the
needs of the human population by the year 2030 (the Green Revolution has contributed
significantly to this).
Population Theories | 293
4. Lenin argued that, instead of becoming impoverished, the working class was becoming
stronger, gaining courage, consolidating itself and becoming steeled in battle. He
suggested that they had begun to learn and were rapidly learning to fight collectively.
Before moving on to a discussion of the Demographic Transition Theory, we will briefly examine
two theories related to the neo-Malthusian cause: The Eugenicist Movement and Planned
Parenthood.
The Eugenicist Movement
The Eugenicist Movement of the early twentieth century, aimed to achieve social and biological
evolution through selective human breeding. It originated with the theories of heredity proposed
by Francis Galton.
The British Eugenics Education Society, founded in 1907, attempted to translate ideals of social
disadvantage into legislative measures for controlling marriage and the reproduction of the ‘unfit’.
Being classified as unfit was based on many different criteria, relating to categories of deviant
behaviour such as alcoholism, promiscuity, criminality and mental retardation.
In Europe and America, the Society hoped to introduce birth control and voluntary sterilization
to prevent reproduction among the ‘unfit.’ This was seen as necessary in order to avert the
threat to survival of the ‘fittest,’ (including the ‘civilized race’).
Eugenicists believed that modern economics encouraged dysgenic (genetically harmful)
birth rates, because those who worked supported those who did not or could not. The New
Right reformers of the early 1980s in Britain held a similar view, arguing that welfare benefits
served to create and perpetuate a culture of dependency.
Before the First World War, British eugenicists were concerned with the adoption of social policy
for the care of the mentally deficient. By this time, too, they were focusing on the declining
birth rate, family allowances and family tax relief, voluntary sterilization, eugenic marriage,
and changing the demographic structure of society. In Scandinavia and the United States,
eugenicists were successful in securing compulsory sterilization of the mentally retarded and
various types of criminals.
Eugenicism was combined with other ideologies in Germany around 1933. For instance, Hitler
remarked that the First World War had led to the loss of many people of desirable genetic stock
and the growth of a population of many of undesirable character. One measure he adopted
was the setting up of the ‘Peoples Court’, which was empowered to re-balance the equation (i.e.,
the imbalance between the desirable and undesirable genetic stocks). The aim of the Court
294 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
was cleansing – the process of getting rid of ‘undesirables’ such as Jews, Roma (gypsies), the
mentally ill, and political dissenters. The genocide of many Jews during t h e Se c o n d World
War is a well-known historical fact.
What most united the thinking of Malthus and the eugenicists was their anti-democratic stance
along with their contempt for the poor (Ross 1998).
Planned Parenthood (PP)
Planned Parenthood began as the national Birth Control League, which was founded in 1916
under the leadership of Mary Dennett. Margaret Sanger headed a follow-up organization, the
American Birth Control League, which clamoured for the legalization of birth control throughout
the 1920s and 1930s. In 1942, the League gave way to the Planned Parenthood Federation of
America Inc. Between 1978 and 1992, the organization strengthened its campaign for women’s
reproductive rights.
Today, Planned Parenthood advocates the following:
a.
wide availability of emergency contraception measures;
b. the removal of laws requiring parental consent as notification for girls under the age of
18 to have an abortion;
c.
the removal of laws requiring a waiting period for an abortion;
d. the right to have an abortion without an ultrasound;
e.
the removal of refusal (conscience) clauses which allow pharmacists to refuse to dispense
contraceptives on the grounds of conscience;
f.
sex education (instead of abstinence-only education) in public schools. (i.e., comprehensive
sex education involving the discussion of abstinence and birth control).
Source: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Planned_Parenthood
This policy was indeed adopted with some success in China between 1970 and 1992. Jordan
et al. claim that, between 1970 and 1990, the total fertility rate dropped from 5.9 births per
year per woman to 2.7. By 1992, it had reached 1.9. Billboards posted in China promoted
slogans such as ‘One couple one child eugenical [sic] and well-bred.’
In other countries such as India, Planned Parenthood was not so successful. Mamdani (1972)
presented an article outlining several cases in which families deliberately opposed the use of
Population Theories | 295
condoms, contraceptives and other birth control measures. Instead, such families bred more
children.
The Demographic Transition Theory
This theory of population in some ways resembles Marx’s theory of the development of capitalism
in Europe. It mirrors the transition of European society from primitive communism to nineteenthcentury capitalism. Jackson and Hudman (1986) have described the demographic transition
as follows:
The rate of population growth in some countries, particularly industrialized ones, followed a
pattern of increase and then decline. The experience of the major industrialized countries in
Western Europe and North America, in a period of rapid population growth rates, is referred
to as the demographic transition (Jackson and Hudman 1986, 70).
They also explain it as a model of population change, which suggests that countries move
from a slow population growth stage, with high birth and high death rates, to a stage of rapid
population growth, when death rates drop, and then to a stage of slow population growth, as
birth rates also fall. Others add a fourth stage that involves a convergence of birth and death
rates. At times, the birth rate falls below that of the death rate, causing depopulation.
The stages of the theory will be briefly examined in figure 11.1.
Figure 11.1: The Stages of the Demographic Transition Theory
60
Number Per 1000 Per Year
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
50
Birth Rate
40
30
20
10
0
Death Rate
Time
Stage 4
296 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Stage 1 – High Fluctuating
This represents Britain’s demography before 1700. Birth rates were high, averaging more
than 40 per 1,000, but death rates also remained high, resulting in slow rates of population
growth. In some years, an increase in population followed a good harvest, partly because
of a rise in births and a fall in deaths. In any event, the world’s population remained relatively
low and stagnant, primarily because of disease and limited agricultural capacity. In addition, life
expectancy was much lower than it is today.
Stage 2 – Early Expanding
The process of industrialization (the Industrial Revolution) marks the beginning of this
stage. It lasted for approximately 100 years, from 1770 to 1870. During this time, birth rates
remained relatively high, but death rates fell sharply to almost half the birth rates.
In less-developed countries, this stage was reached sometime around 1988. In both the developed
West and the developing countries, industrialization brought certain positive forces of scientific
progress, which helped to increase life expectancy. Some of these included better housing and
hygiene, wider availability of and access to health care, and more abundant and nutritious food.
Stage 3 – Late Expanding
This stage occurred during the period 1870–1920, when changes in cultural values superseded
all other forms of change. Parsons’s theory of modernization helps us to appreciate the
complementary blend of economic and cultural factors in population change.
Stage 4 – Low Fluctuating
This is a stage of relative consistency in population movement. Both birth and death rates are
low. Sometimes one may slightly exceed the other. Negative population growth (depopulation)
may occur or population may grow in miniscule proportions.
It is argued that some advanced countries (for example, Germany and Italy) experienced negative
net natural increase as a result of austere fertility control policies (for example, delayed marriage)
and strict immigration policies.
Population Theories | 297
Figure 11.2: The Demographic Transition Model
The Demographic Transition
birth
rate
total
population
Death
rate
time
Stage 1
High birth rate
high, but fluctuating
death rate
Stage 2
Declining death rates
and continuing high
birth rates
Stage 3
Declining birth
and death rates
Stage 4
Low death rates
and low, but
fluctuatingbirth rates
Figure 11.3: The Demographic Transition Model Showing Stage 5
1
2
Birth rate
25
Death rate per 1000 population
3
20
15
4
5
40
30
Death rate
20
10
5
10
Total population
0
0
Time
Birth rate per 1000 population
Stage
298 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
The original Demographic Transition model has just four stages, but it is now widely accepted
that a fifth stage is needed to represent countries that have undergone the economic transition,
from manufacturing based industries into service and information based industries, called
. Examples of countries in this category include Germany, Italy, Spain, Portugal,
Greece, United Kingdom and most notably Japan, whose populations are now reproducing well
below their replacement levels, and are not producing enough children to replace their parents’
generation (source: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Demographic_transition).
The Demographic Transition Theory: An Evaluation
The theory of slow population growth and modernity finds much support in the theories of
social change and progress of the early functionalists in sociology. Herbert Spencer’s evolutionary
theory of European society embodies many of the principles of the demographic transition
theory (DTT). Both illustrate the effects of population growth on social and economic life. For
instance, it was only when populations grew beyond certain levels that additional hands were
freed from traditional agriculture, giving the opportunity for people to engage in scientific
pursuits.
The DTT also finds support in Durkheim’s theory of solidarity. Stage 1 and, to some
extent, Stage 2 reveal a society steeped in mechanical solidarity. This is the case, since Europe
was based largely on agriculture and role resemblance, that is, an unspecialized division of
labour. Stage 3 initiated the transition to organic solidarity. In this stage, values became
more individualistic and large families became hindrances to personal wealth and success. To
use Parsons’s words, life became increasingly complex and differentiated. People and institutions
began taking on highly specialized functions. For example, the family and school became
institutionalized as agencies for informal and formal learning (particularistic and universalistic,
respectively). Stage 3 is marked by a rapidly declining birth rate and a continued falling death
rate. The industrialized countries advanced in technology and benefited even more (than
in Stage 2) from technological advancements in social and economic life (for example, in
health and occupational factors).
However, and more significantly, changing attitudes towards children and family created a further
decline in birth rates. With greater technology in agriculture, rapid urbanization and educational
expansion (formal and non-formal), large families were seen as burdens. Parsons argues that the
large extended family gave way to the smaller privatized nuclear units. Achieved status rose to
prominence via the adoption of universalistic values such as equality of opportunity and
meritocracy.
One may infer that many of the developing countries of the Caribbean have more recently (over
–
Total Growth
112.8
139.1
Births
306.8
273.2
Death
68.2
71.4
238.6
201.76
-125.8
-62.7
-111.5
-45.0
1.29
1.39
Natural Increase
Estimated Net
Migration Balance
Migration as % of
Total Growth
Average Annual Rate
of Growth (%)
In this stage, islands such as St Kitts, Nevis, Antigua and Montserrat gained population
as a result of the triangular trade institutionalized by the sugar plantation system. Whites and
blacks lived with mutual hostility but also in symbiosis, or mutual interdependence. The
former depended on the latter for labour to produce sugar, whilst the slaves depended on the
whites for their existence (social, cultural and economic). See table 11.2 below for data on slave
importation in 10 Caribbean territories in the eighteenth century.
It is during this stage that the process of acculturation began. Edwards (quoted in Barrow and
Reddock 2001) describes the process of white cultural hegemony. Institutions and traditions
Population Theories | 303
Stage 4
By about the late 1800s, most of Europe had become unified. This meant a decline in
the significance of the West Indian islands to Europe’s economic survival. T h e Fi r s t World
War (1914–18) and the emergent revolution in Russia compounded the situation by turning
Europe’s attention more to the threat of the spread of communism than to the circumstances
in West Indian colonies.
These events spurred on certain cultural changes within West Indian societies. The rise of black
consciousness in Jamaica, and Trinidad and Tobago (in particular) triggered the development
of the anti-white sentiments. Events such as the Water Riots (1903) in Trinidad and Tobago
had, to some extent, encouraged instrumental cooperation between the two dominant groups.
Calls for improved wages, and working and living conditions, were met partially by white rulers.
Though insignificant in comparison to social reforms of today, improvements in health and
hygiene led to an increase in the number of births among the non-white population.
Stage 5
In this phase, especially in the post-independence era, population growth was triggered by a
number of economic and social reforms. r. 2syrmiccls,ianfchil rnhia h hf(eenia)1(so)1ll21(s)5( )31o2it 2syrmiccic
306 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
3. Write T for True or F for False after each statement below.
a.
Population control is a concern of both Malthus and neo-Malthusians.________
b. Marx largely agreed with Malthus’s theory of population. ________
c.
There is no evidence of demographic transition in the West Indies. ________
d. Crown Colony governments were set up in The Bahamas and Antigua in the
eighteenth century to help their population growth policies. ________
e.
The neo-Malthusians are concerned with issues such as deforestation, global
warming and sustainable development. ________
CHAPTER 12
POPULATION GROWTH RATES AND
TRENDS
OBJECTIVES
On completion of this chapter, students should:
1. understand population issues with specific reference to the Caribbean;
2. compare population statistics in developed and developing countries; and
3. assess the implications of population growth rates.
CONTENT
1. Population Composition
Quantitative measures used for explaining trends in population for developed and developing
countries, for example, age, sex, ethnicity, religion, and occupation.
2. Trends in Population Growth
3. Population Issues
a.
Urbanization
b.
Migration
POPULATION COMPOSITION
Population composition refers to the distribution within a group or groups of people in regard
to specific individual attributes such as sex, age, marital status, education, religion, ethnicity,
occupation, and relationship to the head of household. Populations consist of groups such as
social classes and religious groups. In this section, we will discuss the variables age, sex, ethnicity,
308 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Population Growth Rates and Trends | 309
Figure 12.1 Population Pyramids for India, Japan and Kenya, 2000
Population Growth Rates and Trends |
317
Activity
Race, Ethnicity and Occupation
| Sociology for Caribbean Students
Though controversial in principle (especially extra-uterine conception), Firestone’s call for
fertility control echoes similar sentiments to Malthusian and some non-racist neo-Malthusian
thinkers. In other words, the idea of fertility control is not new. Malthus was one of the first
to envision the necessity for some kind of moral restraint between the sexes. Unlike Firestone’s
radical proposition, Malthus believed that the entire human race faced the threat of extinction
in the absence of some form of fertility control (or if unfettered lust and passion between the
sexes were permitted).
It may be contended that the Malthusian notion of fertility control was rather vague and simplistic.
However, neo-Malthusians were more successful in concretizing fertility control. They were
more inclined to consider measures such as condom use by men, and contraceptive pills for
women. Later, with the advances in science and technology, vasectomy for men was introduced,
and a wide range of devices and implements were developed for use by women, among them
the coil, intra-uterine devices (IUDs) and the diaphragm.
In the Caribbean, there are many myths and misconceptions about fertility control. You may
be familiar with some of these myths and traditions in your country. It may be worth your while
to ascertain the sociological aspects of these ideas and phenomena. For instance, do people
who hold such beliefs belong to a particular age group, social class or ethnic group? Are they
predominantly rural or urban inhabitants? Or do they belong to any particular religious group?
According to Health Care and Training Inc. (http://www.hcet.org), family planning is ‘the
ability of individuals and couples to anticipate and attain their desired number of children, and
the spacing and timing of their births. This is achieved through the use of contraceptive
methods and the treatment of involuntary infertility and reproductive health care which is: ‘the
constellation of methods, techniques and services that contributes to reproductive health and
well-being by preventing and solving reproductive health problems.’
Some of the most common types of birth control available:
•
Birth control pill
•
Male condom
•
Female condom
•
Spermicides
•
Diaphragm
•
Cervical cap
•
Contraceptive sponge
•
Injection
Population and Development in the Caribbean |
•
•
•
•
•
364 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
374 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
However, there are also inhibiting factors to the effective functioning of bureaucracies. These
include the following:
Changes in demands: These agencies were initially established to deal with such
things as simple systems of tax collection, and law and order maintenance. However, new,
more complex demands are constantly being made as the developmental paradigm
shifts at the local, regional and international levels. These agencies must now find
effective mechanisms that allow for the flexibility and ability to respond in ‘real time’
to these perpetually changing demands.
Income as opposed to output orientation: Employees of the public service and
other state bureaucracies tend to be more concerned about increases in their income.
Shifts in bureaucratic power: Public servants are faced with the recurring problems
of dispensing with programmes and policies when governments change. In addition,
senior officials sometimes complain that government ministers ignore their advice or
do not consult the technocrats.
Some Caribbean territories have witnessed a shift in the management of their public service. In
Trinidad and Tobago, for example, public service reform has been an on-going activity for
the past decade. There have been moves towards decentralization (for example, in the health
sector, there are now regional authorities with a large degree of autonomy), the introduction of
human resource departments in ministries, the creation of a ministry of public administration
and the move to hire more labour on contract.
Activity 15.3
Using any large educational institution in the Caribbean as an example, illustrate the advantages
and disadvantages of bureaucratic organizations.
4. Tourism
Tourism the world over is a thriving and steadily expanding industry. According to Auliana
Poon (1993):
[Tourism] is the ultimate immaterial reward after the achievements of work and
other material acquisitions in life. Tourism is also highly sensitive to increases in
income. This means that the higher the income level, the higher the inclination
toward rest, relaxation, recuperation.
Issues in Caribbean Development | 375
She continues by saying,
…there are no substitutes for the tourism experience; looking at movies and at
actors basking in the sun is no substitute for actually being there. This means that
the demand for holidays will grow, rather than be traded off for a substitute.
There have been many arguments against tourism becoming a main sector of development and
growth for Caribbean economies. Some critics view tourism as substituting one type of dependence
for another. For example, it may be viewed as substituting tourism for oil, rice, bauxite or bananas.
Others argue that it is an unpredictable industry, subject to many external factors, such as
natural disasters, security and health issues, just to mention a few examples.
However, the benefits of tourism to the Caribbean cannot be disputed. According to the Caribbean
Tourism Organization Statistical Report, the expenditure of tourists is a significant income
source, as the following graph illustrates:
Figure 15.1: Estimates of Visitor Expenditure (US$ Millions)
Source: Mercedes Silva, 2002.
376 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Table 15.2: Visitor Expenditure as a Percentage of GDP
Anguilla
75%
Cayman Islands
60%
Saint Lucia
55%
Antigua & Barbuda
49%
Aruba
41%
Barbados
36%
St Kitts & Nevis
31%
Grenada
28%
St Vincent & The Grenadines
28%
Jamaica
25%
Source: Mercedes Silva, 2002, Caribbean and Intra-Caribbean Tourism: Current Situation and Perspectives, 8th
Meeting of the Special Committee on Sustainable Tourism of the Association of Caribbean States, Port of Spain,
Trinidad and Tobago, April 4, 2002.
In addition to the foreign exchange earnings by this sector, other significant advantages
include the following:
•
Employment: it is estimated that tourism provides approximately 2.9 million jobs
in the region;
•
Government revenue, in the form of taxes such as port and departure taxes, corporation
taxes; and
•
Income contribution to the GNP: it is estimated that tourism accounts for approximately
25 per cent of the region’s export earnings.
In 2011, there were an estimated 23.8 million tourists visiting the Caribbean shores; this
represented a 3.3 per cent increase from the previous year. Some of the larger destination included
Cuba, the Dominican Republic, Puerto Rico and the US Virgin Islands and the arrivals or main
markets included the United States, Canada, Europe and the United Kingdom.
The cruise ship industry is also a burgeoning segment of this market, as the following figures
indicate.
Issues in Caribbean Development | 377
Table 15.3: Cruise Passenger Arrivals – 2012 and 2011
Destination
Period
2012
2011
% change
Antigua & Barbuda
Jan–Jun.
371,857
382,322
-2.7
Aruba
Jan–Jul.
373,363
382,999
-2.5
The Bahamas
Jan–Jul.
2,666,280
2,451,681
8.8
Barbados
Jan–Aug.
417,594
426,351
-2.1
Belize
Jan–Jun.
368,325
390,932
-5.8
Bermuda
Jan–Jun.
364,070
161,711
1.5
British Virgin Islands
Jan–Apr.
269,791
329,710
-18.2
Cayman Islands
Jan–Jul.
971,255
914,330
6.2
Cozumel (Mexico)
Jan–Jul.
1,699,499
1,746,932
-2.7
Curacao
Jan–Jun.
281,257
238,812
17.8
Dominica
Jan–Jul.
191,752
235,637
-18.6
Dominican Republic
Jan–Jun.
241,367
220,841
9.3
Grenada
Jan–Apr
170,699
225,238
-24.2
Jamaica
Jan–Aug.
937,343
700,137
33.9
Martinique
Jan–Jun.
66,335
18,299
262.5
Puerto Rico
Jan–Jun.
664,668
668,965
-0.6
Saint Lucia
Jan–Jun.
352,771
375,231
-6.0
St Maarten
Jan–Aug.
1,228,488
1,107,577
10.9
St Vincent &
The Grenadines
Jan–Jun.
48,944
58,693
-16.6
US Virgin Islands
Jan–Aug.
1,305,513
1,368,460
-4.6
(Data supplied by member countries, and available as at September 20, 2012).
Source: http://www.onecaribbean.org/content/files/Sept20Lattab12.pdf
| Sociology for Caribbean Students
| Sociology for Caribbean Students
410 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
5. The fifth is fate. This contrasts being lucky with being unlucky or jinxed. Miller argued
that lower-class youth often feel that forces over which they have very little power (a sense
of destiny), control them.
6. The sixth focal concern is autonomy. Autonomy represents freedom from external constraint
or authority, that is, independence. This is contrasted with dependency or being cared
for.
7. The final proposition Miller put forward was that the absence of a father in the home,
and dominance by the mother, lead to the need for a male youth to show masculinity
outside the home. The gang provides this opportunity. The gang is a reflection of what
the youth may think to be the appropriate lower-class male values, in exemplifying the
proper male role and in gaining status.
Strengths
The strength of this theory is that it fits in well with the people who are decrying the downfall
of the nuclear family and problems of single-parent (especially female) families.
Criticisms
•
The primary criticism is that the theory rests heavily on the existence of a distinctive
lower-class culture, which has values distinct from, and in conflict with middle-class
values.
•
Another, often overlooked criticism is that it does not really explain criminality. It
does explain (or purport to explain) lower- class culture; but it does not necessarily
explain any delinquency or crime within the theory.
•
Finally, there are serious problems in operationalization of the focal concerns. Although
Miller does explain what he means by the focal concerns, he does not say how they
may be accurately measured.
The Main Ideas of Subculture Theories
•
The subcultural view states that particular groups in society operate as subcultures.
•
The thesis of the subculture perspective is that there is more than one culture in society.
•
When an individual is a part of a subculture, he or she is often placed in conflict
with the norms or values of mainstream culture.
Introduction to Crime and Deviance: Concepts and Theories | 411
•
Delinquency is an expression of subcultural standards. This means that a person has
bought into the subculture, has assimilated the subcultural standards and is at
the point of expressing those standards, even if they are against mainstream norms.
•
Delinquency is conformity to subcultural norms at the expense of mainstream norms.
•
Here, the person who is expressing his or her subcultural standards understands that
the mainstream society considers those acts to be deviant, delinquent or criminal;
yet the person expresses them anyway. The person is, in effect, willing to sacrifice his
or her good standing in the mainstream society for the ability to express subcultural
behaviour.
•
These theories posit that criminal subcultures develop their own socially approved
norms and practices. These subcultures sanction criminal and deviant behaviour, and
often use it as a status requirement.
•
The value system of some subcultures not only demands but expects violence in certain
social situations. It is this norm, which affects daily behaviour, that is in conflict with
the conventional society. Frustration drives delinquents to pursue values that disrupt
the world w i t h w h i c h they cannot cope. Deviance in this case is non-conformity.
Strengths
The first strength of the subculture perspective is that it is consistent with commonsense
observations of cultural diversity. We know that American society is very diverse, and that groups
are often in conflict with each other. The group that is defined as mainstream generally makes
the laws and, often, subcultural behaviour is defined as criminal. The subculture perspective
can address all this.
Also, subcultural theories can address gang-related crime. Many of the criminological theories
cannot address gang behaviour very well, and rely instead on addressing the individual behaviour
of those in a gang. The subculture perspective deals directly with gang behaviour, either explicitly
or implicitly.
Criticisms
The first criticism of the subculture perspective is its ambiguity in defining ‘subculture.’ We all
belong to different groups, some of which exert more influence on our lives than others. They
do not all represent a subculture, however, and they certainly do not all represent a deviant,
delinquent or criminal subculture. Defining and operationalizing the concept of a subculture is
often a difficult task, and may not be accurately completed by many of the subculture theories.
412 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
The second criticism of the subculture perspective is that it does not account for middle- or
upper-class delinquency. Almost everything you read in the subculture perspective deals with
lower-class youth, and it is quite possible that subculture theory can only deal with this group
because of the nature of the environment and the issue of subcultures apart from the mainstream.
This may be viewed as a weakness of the perspective, however, when middle- and upper-class
people commit a portion of all crime.
The final criticism of the subculture perspective is that most people in subcultures have
the same norms and perceive the same acts as acceptable or deviant. Most of the subculture
theories imply that people in a subculture are fundamentally different from the mainstream.
In most instances this is not true.
Activity 16.3
Place a tick in the box following the selected option:
1. According to Merton’s Strain Theory, which term refers to the situation in which someone
seeks the goals of society but rejects the conventional means to do so?
a. innovation[ ]
b. rebellion[ ]
c.
retreatism[ ]
d. ritualism[ ]
2. According to Merton’s Strain Theory, which term refers to the situation in which
someone ‘drops out’ of society and rejects both the goals and the means to achieve them?
a.
innovation[ ]
b. rebellion[ ]
c.
retreatism[ ]
d. ritualism[ ]
Introduction to Crime and Deviance: Concepts and Theories | 413
3.
According to Merton’s Strain Theory, which term refers to the situation in which
someone protests against the system and thereby rejects both the goals and the means
to achieve them, in favour of some alternative system?
a.
innovation[ ]
b. rebellion[ ]
c.
retreatism[ ]
d. ritualism[ ]
4. According to Merton’s Strain Theory, which term refers to the situation in which
someone survives in a routine job at the lower end of the socio-economic spectrum, but
nevertheless continues to be law-abiding and conforms to the traditional ways of performing
his/her role in society:
a.
innovation[ ]
b. rebellion[ ]
c.
retreatism[ ]
d. ritualism[ ]
5. According to Albert Cohen and Walter Miller, most crime is committed among
a.
high-income youth[ ]
b. low-income youth[ ]
c.
middle-class men[ ]
d. middle-class women[ ]
6. According to Hirschi’s Control Theory, deviant behaviour is likely to occur among
a.
high-income youth who are disenchanted with their lives.
[]
b. youth with unstable family structures and weak social attachments.
[]
c.
middle-class college students.[ ]
d. youth with strong attachments to social institutions.
[]
7. According to Durkheim, deviance
a.
is defined according to the social context in which the act is performed.
[]
b. performs several useful functions for society.
[]
c.
[]
is defined by the powerful groups in society.
d. is always a crime.[ ]
8. According to Labelling theory, deviance
a.
is defined according to the social context in which the act is performed.
[]
b . performs several useful functions for society.
[]
c.
[]
is defined by the powerful groups in society.
d. is always a crime.[ ]
9. According to the Conflict theory, deviance
a.
is defined according to the social context in which the act is performed.
[]
b.
performs several useful functions for society. []
c.
is defined by the powerful groups in society. []
d. develops through prolonged association with significant others, thereby
becoming influenced by them.
[]
10. According to Sutherland’s Differential Association Theory, deviance is determined
a.
according to the social context in which the act is performed. []
b.
according to its functions for society. []
c.
by the elite groups in society. [ ]
d. through prolonged association with significant others, thereby becoming
influenced by them.[ ]
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
419
Religion
Community
Institutions of Social Control |
| Sociology for Caribbean Students
•
438 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Activity 18.2
Issues of Crime and Deviance
Drug Abuse
Juvenile Delinquency
Poverty | 447
Definitions
Before proceeding further, it is necessary to define the types of poverty. The number of definitions
existing in the literature may seem infinite, but the following are some of the most commonly used.
Absolute/subsistence poverty refers to the poor who are unable to attain food (in sufficient
quantities to satisfy their basic nutritional requirements) and non-food items (such as clothing
and shelter) necessary for survival.
Critical poverty refers to people who are unable to obtain food necessary for survival.
Relative poverty refers to those who are poor compared to or ‘relative to’ other members of the
same society. For example, if the majority of people in a country have access to cellular telephones
and cars, then the minority who do not have the financial means to acquire these items are
said to be the ‘relatively’ poor.
Subjective poverty is a somewhat new concept in the field of poverty research. Definitions
are based on surveys that use the households’ own assessments of the minimum or ‘just
enough’ levels of income or consumption needed by people like them.
Chronic poverty is a type of poverty that is characterized by its permanence or duration.
It therefore describes people who remain in poverty for most or all of their lives.
Cyclical poverty describes poverty experienced only during stages of an individual’s life
cycle, such as during childhood or old age.
Seasonal poverty refers to people whose income falls below the poverty line only during certain
months of the year. Their employment and sources of income may be seasonal. This category
is also inclusive of the ‘temporarily poor’ who suffer an income shortfall for a brief period of
time, as a result of an exogenous natural disaster such as an earthquake or flood. Finally,
the term ‘newly poor’ refers to those who have recently become poor after certain measures such
as structural adjustment.
Voluntary poverty refers to poverty that is viewed as being desirable or necessary. This may be the case
in some religions for example. Many people equate this to simplifying their lifestyles or adhering to the
‘less is more’ concept.
THEORETICAL PERSPECTIVES ON POVERTY
Introduction
Social scientists do not agree on the causes and effects of poverty. Some see it as inevitable, some
see it as useful, and others see it as detrimental and unjust. This section will present three
448 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
theoretical perspectives on the causes and persistence of poverty: Culture of Poverty, Marxist
Perspectives and the Conservative/Functionalist Approach.
1. Culture of Poverty
The underlying idea is that the lifestyle of the poor differs in many respects from that of
the non-poor in society. Similarities have been found in this poverty lifestyle even across different
societies. This leads to the development of a subculture, with its own norms and values, that
is transmitted from one generation to the next.
Oscar Lewis, an American anthropologist, developed the culture of poverty concept out of his
fieldwork in Mexico and Puerto Rico in the late 1950s. According to Lewis, the culture of
poverty has the following three levels:
i. At the individual level, the poor tend to experience:
•
feelings of marginalization, helplessness and inferiority;
•
a sense of resignation and fatalism; and
•
the desire for immediate gratification; that is, the poor tend to be unable to
delay gratification.
ii. At the family level, there exist:
•
free unions or consensual marriages;
•
high divorce rates; and
•
a notable number of female-headed households.
iii. At the community level, the poor usually demonstrate the following:
•
People normally become fatalistic, leading to minimal effective participation
and integration in the major institutions.
•
There is non-membership in trade unions and other similar organizations.
•
Little use is made of banks, museums, hospitals and other such institutions.
Lewis concludes that the culture of poverty ‘encourages’ poverty since these aforementioned
characteristics act as vehicles to ensure the perpetuation of poverty.
Poverty | 449
450 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
•
Women and ethnic minorities, who are concentrated in the secondary labour market,
take the low-paid jobs.
b. Stratification System
Poverty | 453
CATEGORIES OF THE POOR
Introduction
The poor are a very diverse group, but some groups in society have an increased possibility
of being poor. These include women, the physically challenged, indigenous groups, children,
the elderly, small-scale farmers and the unemployed. These groups will be considered in this
section.
•
Women: In some countries, such as Trinidad and Tobago, and Saint Lucia, poverty levels
among female-headed households are high, especially in urban areas. Some reasons
advanced for this ‘feminization of poverty’ include wage discrimination, high
unemployment, and time restrictions due to child-rearing activities.
Poor women are also faced with other social problems such as teenage pregnancy, domestic
violence and high fertility rates. Poor women residing in rural areas are further faced with gender
bias in terms of the allocation of services such as credit or loans, and resources such as land
allocation.
•
The physically challenged: These individuals with special needs are at an even greater
disadvantage, since there is limited access to jobs, education and long-term health care.
Despite the fact that there may be existing safety nets, these are frequently inadequate.
•
Indigenous groups: This is another vulnerable group, especially in countries such
as Guyana and Suriname where the prevalence of poverty, malnutrition and illness is
high. This is due in large part to their lack of basic social services such as education and
health care.
•
Children: Children experiencing poverty suffer from a lack of proper nutrition, a
low quality of education, and limited parental care and supervision. These barriers
have negative repercussions for the child later in life, making it even more difficult
for the child to break the poverty cycle.
•
The elderly: With the rising rates of inflation, the value of lifetime savings and pension
benefits is depleted. Further, some elderly parents are left with no family support, since
their children have migrated. If they qualify for social assistance, in many cases this
is still insufficient to meet their needs adequately.
•
Small-scale farmers: Many of the rural poor are engaged in agriculture. Many of
these farmers face problems of limited access to land tenure and to markets.
•
Unemployed youth: Many unskilled youth face increased barriers to entering the labour
market. These youth, who now have much free time, may find themselves involved
in drug use, criminal activity, teenage pregnancy and other related social problems.
454 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Activity 19.4
1. Using the poverty measurement indices outlined earlier, compare the existence of poverty
in:
a.
any two Caribbean territories;
b.
a Caribbean country and a developed country.
Poverty and Youth in the Caribbean
According to the World Development Report 2007, there are approximately 1.5 billion
people worldwide between the ages of 12 and 24 years. Of these, 1.3 billion are in developing
countries – the largest number ever recorded in history. Based on current trends, the number
of 12- to 24-year-olds will reach a maximum of 1.5 billion by the year 2035.
CARICOM commissioned a Youth Development Report in 2010, which led to the ‘Declaration
of Paramaribo on the Future of Youth in the Caribbean Community.’ According to the Report, the
main issues affecting youth development were crime, unemployment, participation in decisionmaking processes and education.
Addressing the poverty issues faced by young people is important for several reasons, including
the following:
•
•
The capacity to learn, for younger people, is much greater than for older people.
Missed opportunities to take advantage of education and skills development, develop
positive health practices and make a meaningful contribution to society can be very
costly to rectify.
The development of young people also affects the development of their children. Research
has shown that educated parents are more willing to invest in their children’s education
and health.
In general, the youth have been identified in many Caribbean countries as being a vulnerable
group. In particular, ‘young men at risk’ leave school with few skills, experience difficulties
finding employment, and are faced with peer pressure to engage in criminal activities. These
situations only perpetuate the cycle of poverty.
One major concern in this area is the young people’s lack of access to the labour market,
to youth training and employment. For those who are employed, there is the possibility of
facing exploitation in terms of being continuously employed in ‘training’ programmes.
They receive only a basic stipend, while performing the same jobs as co-workers who are
adequately remunerated.
Poverty | 455
According to a 1993 Commission on Youth in Barbados, there were two categories of explanations
advanced for youth unemployment:
i.
Factors related to the youth themselves such as inadequate education, lack of appropriate
training, inappropriate attitudes, lack of work experience and exceedingly high
occupational and wage aspirations.
ii. A failure of the economy to produce enough jobs; especially in the preferred areas.
Rural and Urban Poverty
Though rural and urban differences are becoming reduced in the Caribbean, the characteristics
and dynamics of poverty are still different in rural and urban social settings, As such,
it is necessary to examine rural and urban poverty separately. The differences have to be
identified and understood so that appropriate interventions may be designed for the respective
contexts. These varied characteristics include the following:
1. Demographics
Rural Area: The population is scattered in small clusters.
Urban Area: The population is concentrated and increasing.
2. Economic Activity
Rural Area: There is mainly primary production, based on land (agriculture) or some
other natural resource.
Urban Area: There is a concentration of economic activity that is skewed towards manufacturing,
trade and services.
3. Environmental Risks
Rural Area – related to the deterioration of natural resources because of the production processes.
Urban Area – related to production processes (for example, wastes from industrial pollution)
and population density (for example, air and noise pollution from cars).
4. Physical Access
Rural Area – low quality transportation infrastructure and services such as health care
and education.
456 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Urban Area – developed transportation network and ready access to social services.
There are several areas of challenges facing the poor in both rural and urban regions. These are
summarized in the following table:
Table 19.1: Challenges Facing the Poor in Rural and Urban Regions
CHALLENGE
RURAL
URBAN
Institutions/
Governance
For the most part, formal
structures of power are
remote, but traditional
structures have a significant
local role.
Limited access to political power.
Housing and Land
Land tenure may be
insecure.
Choices are limited. The urban poor
may be forced onto illegal lands
which are often in hazardous or
ecologically unsuitable areas. This
leads to problems of illegal squatting
and the development of shantytowns
and ghettoes. Overcrowding may also
add to the existing problems of the
poor.
Physical and Social
Facilities are remote and
may lack basic supplies,
equipment and adequately
trained staff.
High quality services are expensive
and restricted to individuals with more
money.
The rural poor need to
diversify their income
sources (that is, their nonfarm income).
There is a greater dependence on cash
and the urban poor face issues arising
out of semi-permanent wage labour,
the informal sector, and petty trading.
Food Security
Adverse climatic conditions
may lead to food shortages
and hunger.
Food supply is heavily dependent on
cash availability.
Environmental
Bad weather conditions
have a direct impact on the
livelihood of the rural poor.
Poor urban planning worsens the
effects of natural disasters.
Infrastructure
Livelihood
Opportunities
Vulnerability
Social and community networks are
important.
Poverty | 457
In sum, the key aspects to reducing poverty in rural areas are:
•
To increase production levels by improving the productivity of existing activities and
by developing new ones; and
•
To improve accessibility to better basic ser vices, especially health, education
and infrastructure.
In urban areas, attention should be paid to reducing barriers to employment opportunities,
infrastructure and services.
Poverty Alleviation Policies
Introduction
Non-governmental organizations, state agencies and international bodies have made many
attempts to alleviate poverty. The following are two approaches used in the development
of poverty-alleviation policies and programmes.
1. Basic Needs Approach
•
This approach was first formulated by the International Labour Organization (ILO)
in the mid-1970s.
•
In addition to ‘how much’ is produced, it also focuses on ‘what’ is produced, ‘in
what ways’ and ‘with what impact’.
•
Basic needs include:
i.
the need for food, shelter, clothes and other necessities of daily life;
ii. access to public services such as sanitation, health care and education; and
iii. access to participate in and exert influence on decision making in the
community and in national politics.
2. Rights Approach
•
This approach converts people from being beneficiaries of poverty programmes to
citizens with rights.
•
The 1948 Universal Declaration of Human Rights affirms that everyone has the right
to ‘a standard of living adequate for the health and well-being of himself and his family,
458 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
including food, clothing, housing and medical care and necessary social services....
Everyone has the right…to education…to work…[and] to social security.’
•
Additional international human-rights instruments have reaffirmed people-centred
development as a universal right – identifying as additional dimensions the right to
security, participation, freedom of association, inclusion in the development process,
and freedom from discrimination.
•
There is also a concern for equity, which is most often applied to wealth or income.
However, human development emphasizes equity in basic capabilities and opportunities for all
– equity in access to education, in health, and in political rights.
Cost-Effective Interventions
Several countries in the region have tried different intervention strategies to reduce poverty and
inequity. Among these interventions are:
•
Conditional Cash Transfer (CCT) Programmes – these programmes have gained increasing
recognition because they assist with current and long-term poverty reduction. They
provide cash transfers to households to fund current consumption, ‘conditional’ on
certain criteria to develop human capital. For example, recipients may be required to
enrol their children in primary school, pregnant mothers may be expected to attend
health clinics, or mothers may be mandated to ensure that infants are fully immunized.
•
Education – the region recognizes that education can be viewed as a means of
social mobility, as evidenced by the percentage of countries’ annual budgets that is
devoted to the education sector. There has been increased focus on the development
of a seamless education system, from early-childhood care to the tertiary level.
•
Early Childhood Development (ECD) Projects – these interventions are aimed at
improving the intellectual, social and physical development of children, usually between
the ages of 0 and 6 years old. The interventions are wide-ranging and include day-care
services or pre-school activities for the children, and parental training and education.
•
Rural Infrastructure – the development of infrastructure – roads, electrification,
information and communication technology (ICT) and water and sanitation – is
important, as transaction costs are decreased while productivity is increased, as the factors
of production have easier access to markets.
•
Micro Credit and Insurance Initiatives – these initiatives have been very successful
because they facilitate investments, have high rates of return, and reduce the effects
Poverty | 459
of shocks experienced by the poor. These microfinance institutions target the poor,
and rely on peer selection and monitoring to reduce the need for collateral and ensure
that debts are repaid.
Conclusion
The causes of poverty and its attendant consequences are not simple issues requiring singlepronged approaches to develop policies. Rather, these issues are complex, and require inputs
from all sectors, especially from the grass-roots level, since these are the people most affected and
who also stand to gain the most.
Is a world without poverty possible? Perhaps, but it will require unwavering commitment
from all the stakeholders, non-politicization of the issues, a collaborative effort from countries
of both the North and the South, and possibly some debt forgiveness.
Activity 19.5
1. Is there any relationship between population and development in the Caribbean?
2. ‘Economic factors are the main contributors to the causes and persistence of poverty in
the Caribbean.’ Discuss.
3. What are some of the poverty alleviation or eradication strategies and programmes
that have been implemented in your country? In your opinion, have these policies and
programmes been effective in assisting the targeted groups? What changes would you make
in order to further improve these programmes? Make sure that you have covered all the
vulnerable groups in your country.
CHAPTER 20
CARIBBEAN SOCIAL ISSUES:
HEALTH AND THE ENVIRONMENT
OBJECTIVES
At the end of this chapter, students should be able to:
•
discuss the key concepts related selected social issues: health and the environment;
•
apply the main sociological perspectives to understand selected social issues in the
Caribbean;
•
analyse selected social issues in the Caribbean;
•
explain the trends in selected social issues in the Caribbean; and
•
evaluate the measures employed to address selected social issues in the Caribbean.
CONTENT
(a) Health
i.
Definitions of health (positive and negative) and health related issues, for example,
disability, institutionalization, morbidity and mortality.
ii. Indicators of health (death rate, infant mortality rate, morbidity rate).
iii. Main health problems, prevention and control in Caribbean society, for example, HIV/
AIDS; non-communicable diseases (diabetes, substance abuse, obesity, hypertension
and mental health).
iv. Relationship to poverty and the environment.
v.
Availability of resources, for example, anti-retroviral drugs; health personnel.
Caribbean Social Issues: Health and the Environment | 461
(b)
Environment
i.
Climate change – sustainable livelihoods, sustainable development, food security,
disaster preparedness.
ii. Pollution – air, water, noise, land.
iii. Deforestation and forest degradation, for example, Haiti.
iv. Relationship to poverty and health.
Key concepts
Health
According to the World Health Organization (1948), ‘Health is a state of complete physical,
mental and social well-being and not merely the absence of disease or infirmity.’ Though this
definition is comprehensive and views health as positive and not merely the absence of disease,
some writers have expressed reservations over its implications. The use of the word ‘complete’
somehow implies that most people will be sick most of the time.
Illness
Illness or feeling ill is the subjective experience of disease or ill health. It is therefore a social
condition or role.
Disease can be defined using two main models:
1. The pathological model: This focuses on biological (physical) symptoms and abnormal
functioning in an organism and refers to any pathological (unhealthy) condition, in body
or mind.
2. The statistical model which defines health or illness with reference to the average in the
population (Hess et al. 1991).
Morbidity
Morbidity refers to the state of being diseased or unhealthy. It also refers to the incidence of ill
health in a population.
462 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Morbidity rate: The number of existing or new cases of a particular disease or condition per 1000
people (Achengrau and Seage 2003).
Mortality
Mortality refers to the incidence of death or the number of deaths in a population diagnosed
with a condition with distinctive, recognized symptoms.
Mortality rate: The total number of deaths per 1,000 people (Achengrau and Seage 2003).
Some authors claim that mortality measures do not give an adequate picture of a population’s
health status. In such instances, the indicators of morbidity such as the prevalence of chronic
diseases and disabilities become more important (Achengrau and Seage 2003).
Incidence
Incidence is the frequency with which a disease occurs. In medical terms, this
usually refers to the statistical occurrence of a disease within the general population,
measured by how many cases there are per thousand of the population generally.
Incidence is the frequency with which an event occurs within a given time period (such as one
year). For example, it could be said that for a particular country, the incidence of new HIV/AIDS
cases in 2011 revealed 10,000 new cases.
Prevalence
Prevalence refers to how many people currently have a particular condition this year. In the HIV/
AIDS example, prevalence would include those diagnosed and living from earlier years combined
with those diagnosed this year.
Disabilities include ‘impairments, activity limitations, and participation restrictions. An
impairment is a problem in body function or structure; an activity limitation is a difficulty
encountered by an individual in executing a task or action; while a participation restriction is a
problem experienced by an individual in involvement in life situations’ (World Health Organisation
[WHO] 1948).
Thus disability is a complex phenomenon, reflecting an interaction between features of a person’s
body and features of the society in which he or she lives.
Institutionalization refers to the commitment of a patient to a health care facility for treatment.
Caribbean Social Issues: Health and the Environment | 463
Very often, patients who are hospitalized for a long period become dependent on the institution
and its routines.
Theoretical Perspectives
Parsons’ Sick Role
In the early 1950s Parsons introduced the concept of the sick role. Parsons saw illness as a form of
deviance, in a similar manner that crime is considered a deviation from society’s norms and values.
This is because the norm is for members of society to be healthy; it is necessary for individuals to
be healthy in order to perform their functions and contribute to society. Someone who is ‘sick’
cannot perform their duties to their best ability, and may put a strain on others to perform those
tasks. For instance, if a teacher has the flu he/she may not explain the material as much as the
students need and as a result, the students suffer from their teacher’s sickness. Therefore, sickness
is a deviation from the norm of health. As such, according to Parsons, members of society should
make all attempts to get better when they are sick, as they are aware of the importance of their
health to the society.
The sick role is therefore ‘a temporary, medically sanctioned form of deviant behaviour’ (Maguire
2002). It is important to note that what Parsons was describing is what society expects of a person
when they are termed ‘sick,’ that is, how a ‘sick person’ is supposed to behave; however, it is not
always possible for the person to behave in keeping with this expectation. There are four (4)
elements of the sick role:
1. The individual’s incapacity is a form of deviance from social norms, but because it is not
deliberate, the individual is not held responsible.
2. The sickness is legitimate grounds for being exempted from normal obligations, such as
work or school attendance.
3. The legitimacy of this exemption, is based on the sick person’s intent to get well.
4. The attempt to get well implies also seeking and cooperating with competent help to treat
the illness (Parsons 1951 cited in Freund, McGuire and Podhurst 2003).
Additionally, the person’s sickness must be sanctioned by those who are qualified to do so; in
most cases, this is a medical professional.
5. Moreover, the sick role is a temporary condition; upon recovery the person is expected to
resume their daily activities in order to function normally in society.
Parsons incorporated ideas from Freud’s psychoanalytic theories as well as from functionalism and
Weber’s work on authority in order to illustrate the social forces involved in illness (Maguire 2002).
464 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Several writers have identified weaknesses in the model, especially conflict theorists who
emphasize the importance of power imbalances in defining health and illness (Turner 1987).
Also, Freidson (1970) has noted that people often rely on lay opinions and advice as to whether
or not a professional consultation is appropriate. Notwithstanding its perceived shortcomings,
the concept of the sick role has generated a lot of useful research.
The Conflict Perspective
In stark contrast to the Functionalist perspective which believes society is based on consensus,
Marxists see society as conflict-driven and based on inequality between classes. This inequality
is also found in the health care system of modern capitalist societies. The basic assumption of
Marxists, which has also been accepted by non-Marxists, is that problems of the health system
reflect the problems of the wider society and cannot be separated from them.
This perspective focuses on the social, political and economic forces influencing health and health
care delivery. Issues of concern include inequalities in health care, power relations between doctors
and other health care personnel, and power relations between doctor and patient. It also addresses
the exploitation of the subordinate groups in society. According to this perspective, ‘the health
system reflects the society’s class structure through control over health institutions, stratification
of health professionals and the limited occupational mobility into health professions’ (Waitzkin
1978).
The greatest strength of Marxist theory can be seen in its ability to recognize that illness is not
caused by any one specific factor, but is the result of a combination of causes. This can be seen
as early as the nineteenth century in one of the the first major works on public health, Friedrich
Engels’ Conditions of the Working Class in England (1845), which traced the origin of diseases
among the working poor such as tuberculosis, typhus and typhoid to malnutrition, overcrowding,
inadequate housing and contaminated water. Engels made the link between social conditions
created by class inequality, and health conditions.
Disparities do exist between public and private health care for the poor and rich respectively.
This phenomenon is also found in the Caribbean where poor people simply cannot afford private
health care.
As noted by Waitzkin, changes in the health care system must coincide with fundamental
economic, political and social changes. However, these changes rely on wealth and power which
is concentrated in the hands of the ruling class and are therefore resisted (Waitzkin 1978).
Inequalities in health care related to race, class and gender will be addressed later in this chapter.
Caribbean Social Issues: Health and the Environment | 465
The Symbolic Interactionist Perspective
This perspective examines the manner in which social actors give meanings to their health
condition. They see ‘health’ or ‘illness’ as being socially constructed.
Many try to explain the causes of their illness on others, for example, a person may contract an
infection from contact with another person, diet, exposure to chemicals in the atmosphere or
stress on the job. It therefore looks at how sick people define their illness in relation to the social
context. This perspective is also interested in how doctors treat patient in health care settings.
Erving Goffman (1960) and Eliot Friedson (1970) did a great deal of work on health from the
micro-perspective. They focus on the individual’s place in society and highlight how the social
construction of health and illness affect the individual, particularly those afflicted with some
disease or handicap. Thus, these theories give insight on the experience of living with a disease or
handicap. As a result, these theories are beneficial in understanding the psychological impact of
disease. They also highlight specific conditions, many of which are applicable to the Caribbean
setting.
A key area of focus for Symbolic Interactionists is stigma. Stigma refers to ‘a powerful discrediting
and tainting social label that radically changes the way an individual is viewed as a person’ (Goffman
1963, 2–5). According to Goffman, stigma plays a major role in determining how individuals feel
about their health and whether or not they access health care. Thus, this perspective goes beyond
the macro-perspective mentioned above, which focuses on external forces which affect health.
As a result of the stigma attached to certain diseases individuals may be reluctant to seek medical
attention. This stands in direct contrast to Parsons’ concept of the sick role where members are
expected to seek medical care in order to get better. Using this explanation of the impact of stigma
and stereotypes, it may be to a person’s disadvantage if they seek medical attention for these
stigmatized diseases, as they may be discriminated against. An example of this would be persons
who are diagnosed with HIV may not seek treatment due to the stigma associated with the virus.
Goffman also noted that there is what he termed ‘courtesy stigma’ where those associated with
the individual who has the disease are also treated negatively, for example, an entire family may
be shunned by their community if a family member contracts H1N1(swine flu), as recently took
place in some Caribbean countries.
Friedson (1970) shows through his own observations that there are times when the afflicted
person is blamed for contracting a disease and receives negative treatment from those around
them. According to Parsons’ sick role, because getting sick is not seen as voluntary, that is, the
person has no control over whether or not they get sick, they are treated with sympathy and
understanding. However, according to Friedson, this is not always so and in some cases, people
466 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
are held responsible for the disease they contract. These include sexually transmitted diseases and
also, lifestyle diseases such as diabetes. In the case of lifestyle diseases, some blame may be given
as people have some degree of control over their eating, exercise and sleeping patterns which may
affect whether or not they develop these conditions.
These theories highlight how labelling and stigmatizing of diseases and by extension, the individual
interferes with the treatment process since they may be unwilling to disclose their condition and
seek treatment for it.
The Social Construction of Health
Who defines health? Health does not mean the same thing to everyone, and its construction may
differ according to the society or culture. For instance, in the United States of America a ‘slim’
woman is regarded as healthy whereas an ‘obese’ woman would be seen as unhealthy. However,
in Mauritania, the opposite is found and girls are fed large amounts of food, even more than
boys, in order to make them ‘fat’ as this is considered healthy and beautiful. Thus, health is a
construction of the values and beliefs of a group or society.
This brings two terms into focus: Medicalization: The term medicalization refers to the process
whereby non-medical problems become treated and defined as illnesses or disorders, e.g., deviance
has been medicalized (Kendall 2007). An example of this is pregnancy, which was once just a
normal part of a woman’s life. She did not require specialized medical care and the only attention
which was given was from older females, usually in her family or village. However, as time
progressed, and medical advancements were made, pregnancy increasingly came to be seen as a
medical ‘condition.’ It is now expected that a woman who is pregnant should seek professional
medical advice (usually a medical doctor, not a midwife) who recommends special vitamins,
exercises and monthly check-ups. In fact, a woman is only deemed to be pregnant after she has
taken a pregnancy test and it is medically confirmed; a ‘gut feeling’ or ‘intuition’ is no longer
enough and pregnancy as a whole has come under the control of medical professionals who
specialize in what was once a normal life occurrence.
Demedicalization refers to the process whereby a problem ceases to be defined as an illness or
disorder (Kendall 2007). A prominent example of this is the case of homosexuality, which was
once viewed by medical professionals as a psychiatric disorder. This classification stemmed from
societal values towards homosexuality. However, as values changed, so too did the perception and
definition of various conditions. Homosexuality is no longer considered a disorder and individuals
are no longer expected to take ‘treatment’ through means like electro-shock therapy.
Caribbean Social Issues: Health and the Environment | 467
Health in the Caribbean
Health is an extremely significant factor in Caribbean development, because of its impact on the
social stability and economic viability of the region. A healthy population leads to many short
and long-term advantages, including sustained productivity levels, reduced expenditure for the
treatment of avoidable illnesses, and continued employability of people.
The issues facing the Caribbean will be discussed under the following headings:
i.
childhood and early adulthood, and
ii. later adulthood and the ageing population.
Childhood and Early Adulthood
For children, infections as a cause of death have decreased, due primarily to improvements in
sanitation, waste disposal, water supply and vaccinations. However, at the same time, there has
been an increase in nutritional deficiencies, particularly in the poorest nations of the region. Haiti
is the most saddening example of this, where children suffer and die from deficiency diseases
such as kwashiorkor and marasmus. Malnutrition in early childhood often leads to cognitive
underdevelopment and contributes to higher mortality rates. It is a well-known fact that there
are direct links between nutrition and productivity.
However, this is not to say that all countries are suffering from malnutrition or under-nutrition.
In fact, some are experiencing overnutrition. Non-communicable chronic diseases (NCDs) are
becoming more prevalent across the world, and the Caribbean is no exception. More alarming is
that these diseases are now being found in children and teenagers. With regard to obesity, Xeureb
et al. (2001) observe that across the Caribbean, 7 per cent to 20 per cent of males and 22 per cent
to 48 per cent of females over the age of 15 years could be defined as obese by medical standards
(Xeureb et al. 2001, 120). In Jamaica, 52 per cent of persons between the ages of 15 and 74
years, and 64.7 per cent of women are overweight or obese (PAHO 2009). More importantly, the
Caribbean is experiencing an increase in the incidence of obesity among pre-school aged children
and adolescents. In Guyana, among 15 to 19 year olds, obesity rose from 6.7 per cent in 1996
to 12.9 per cent in 2000 (Xeureb et al. 2001, 122).
For young people, there has been a rise in deaths caused by diabetes, suicide, homicide, HIV/
AIDS, injuries and violence. Homicide, injury and violence are associated with the gun and
gang culture which is becoming an intricate part of the Caribbean existence. This is leading to a
steady reduction in the male population between the ages of 16 and 25 years. There is also the
increasing prevalence of road rage, which is the cause of several vehicular accidents. Risk-taking
468 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
and adventure-seeking behaviour such as fast driving, illegal drag racing, texting while driving,
driving under the influence of alcohol, as well as without a seatbelt, are further reasons for this
trend in mortality.
Mortality from communicable diseases was on the decline until the 1980s; then there was an
alarming increase related to the HIV/AIDS epidemic. According to UNAIDS, every day an
estimated 2,500 people, who are between the ages 15–24, are infected with HIV. This accounts for
more than 40 per cent of new infections of all people aged 15 and over. The situation is especially
stark for girls and young women who make up 60 per cent of the five million young people living
with HIV worldwide; this figure reaches more than 70 per cent in sub-Saharan Africa. According
to one source, ‘in many poor countries, especially those in sub-Saharan Africa, 14.8 million
children in the region have already lost one or more parents to the disease. In South Africa alone,
1.9 million children have been orphaned due to AIDS…’ (http://www.one.org).
The Caribbean is now second to sub-Saharan Africa with regard to the prevalence and incidence
of HIV/AIDS cases. There is a strong negative stigma attached to people with HIV/AIDS and
it is estimated that a significant number of cases are unreported. It is therefore safe to say
that the number of HIV/AIDS cases in current statistics is underestimated. According to the
Caribbean Epidemiology Centre (CAREC), if efforts to prevent the spread of HIV/AIDS in the
next two decades are not intensified, approximately three to five per cent of the gross national
product (GNP) could be spent on caring for AIDS patients.
All the aforementioned trends have implications for:
•
an increased demand for day-care and early childhood facilities and services;
•
an increase in the transmission of sexually transmitted diseases (STDs), unwanted
pregnancies and increased abortion rates;
•
increasing numbers of children orphaned by HIV/AIDS and abandoned by relatives;
and
•
pregnant HIV women, and the risk posed to newborns.
Later Adulthood and Ageing Population
Caribbean countries are experiencing a demographic transition. Both men and women are living
longer. The population above 60 years of age has increased because of improved health conditions,
the migration of younger people and an increase in the number of returning retirees.
CAREC estimates that, in later adulthood, one in every four people will be hypertensive, and
one in every six people aged 45 and over will be diabetic. This translates into more than 550,000
Caribbean Social Issues: Health and the Environment | 469
diabetics and 550,000 hypertensive people living and seeking treatment in the Caribbean.
Chronic non-communicable diseases such as heart disease, stroke, diabetes, cancer and injuries
are the leading causes of death for the elderly. However, these problems could be alleviated
to some extent through proper nutrition and increased levels of physical activity.
In the Caribbean, it has also been noted that women are outliving men so that there will be a larger
proportion of women than men over the age of 60 years by 2050. This has further implications
for the region in terms of policy and the society as a whole. Older women are at greater risk of
being victims of crime, especially where they live alone. There is also the growing issue of elder
abuse, both at the hands of family members and caregivers in ‘homes for the aged.’
An ageing population has implications for
•
pension payments for more people;
•
employment opportunities for an increased workforce over 60 years of age;
•
increased demand for services and facilities to care for the elderly; and
•
an increase in the rates of non-communicable diseases.
Behaviour is a major determinant of health and, hence, many of the health problems faced by
the Caribbean today are largely preventable. Preventative measures can be twofold. Firstly, there
is need to practise health-seeking or health protective behaviour involving vaccinations, cervical
cancer smears, hypertension checks and other similar routine examinations. The other important
aspect of preventative care is education in the form of public health campaigns, starting from the
primary school level, which will lead to a heightened awareness and sensitivity among members
of the population.
Nutrition and Health
Nutrition refers to the process of providing or obtaining food necessary for health and growth.
Significant improvements have been made in reducing deficiency diseases or those associated
with malnutrition. According to the UNDP (2002), since 1990, 800 million people have gained
access to improved water supplies, and 750 million to improved sanitation. Fifty-seven countries,
with half of the world’s population, have decreased hunger by half, or are on track to do so by
2015. Despite these measures, however, malnutrition still exists in the world, and in developing
countries in particular, it is still a major cause of global concern.
UNICEF indicates that deficiency diseases caused by a lack of iron, vitamin A, folic acid and
iodine are prevalent in many regions of the developing world. Marasmus and kwashiorkor, both
470 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
diseases linked to deficiencies in protein, claim the lives of thousands of children in Africa each
year. Despite the work of government and non-governmental organizations, there exists ‘widespread
nutrition deficiency and at least 250 million people in India suffer from varying degrees of
malnutrition: out of 100 deaths in rural India, 58 are children and seven million children are
affected by blindness because of nutritional deficiency’ (Basu, Kulkarni and Ray 2006).
Many children and adults in poor countries (for example, in Latin America, and sub-Saharan
Africa) still do not receive the required number of calories daily. Nutrition (or malnutrition)
significantly impacts upon levels of productivity. While nutrition is inextricably connected
to health, one should not take for granted other aspects of health, such as disease. One of the
diseases, with which Caribbean governments are engaged in constant battle is HIV and AIDS.
The UNDP (2002) claims that by the end of 2000, approximately 22 million people died from
AIDS. It states that 13 million children had lost their mothers or both parents to AIDS and
more than 40 million people were living with HIV. The vast majority of these were living in
developing countries (mostly in sub-Saharan Africa).
There are some interesting sociological findings pertaining to the relationship between
health and variables like social class, gender and ethnicity. It goes without saying that health
and poverty are intertwined (in an indirect relationship). That is, high levels of poverty
and poor health are associated with each other, whilst low levels of poverty are identified with
good health.
Health and Social Class
Julian Tudor-Hart (1971) has found evidence of ‘an inverse case law.’ This law asserts that
those who need health care the most, are the least likely to get it. In all countries, it is the
poor who get much less health care than they need. For example, world estimates show
that every year more than half a million women (chiefly poor women in poor countries) die of
complications related to pregnancy and childbirth.
Zola (1981) suggests that the lower class get less health care partly due to their generally
low levels of health education. Because they know less about disease and nutrition, they have
less bargaining power with doctors over the appropriate diagnosis and treatment of illness.
Leslie Doyal (1991) says that members of the lower class are usually more careless with their
diets than are their middle-class counterparts, and a r e more likely to pursue dangerous
leisure activities such as the abuse of alcohol and smoking.
According to Navarro (1975) the corporate and upper middle classes have control over health
institutions. These classes dominate the boards of private health care institutions and influence
Caribbean Social Issues: Health and the Environment | 471
government policy in their favour. Additionally, those of the higher groups hold a certain degree
of political clout which the lower class does not have; policies related to health and control over
health institutions reflects the class dominance of the wider society.
Health and Gender
According to the United Nations Development Programme (UNDP), women experience a
longer life expectancy than men in almost every country in the world (Giddens 2008, 276).
However, women experience more sickness and medical conditions than men due primarily
to their reproductive role and behaviour. Men, on the other hand, have lower numbers of
morbidity but ‘suffer from higher rates of death from accidents and violence and are also more
prone to drug and alcohol dependency’ (Giddens 2008, 276). In some countries, particularly
those which are termed ‘developing,’ the situation is reversed and girls and women experience
a higher disease burden than boys and men (Disease Control Priorities Project 2008, 2).
These two situations can be accounted for through consideration of the social determinants
of health, that is, factors in our social world that affect our health. Gender, the social roles
and behaviours that define being a ‘man’ or ‘woman’ is one of these determinants.
It is argued that men are more likely than women to participate in dangerous occupations and
leisure activities (for example, electricians and alcoholism and smoking, respectively). Men are
also less likely to take their health seriously, and are less motivated to visit doctors regularly.
This is because culturally, men have been perceived as physically stronger and more agile than
women; they are expected to be able to ‘take pain’ and recover from injuries. Men in the Caribbean
are expected to engage in risky behaviour as a way of proving their ‘manhood.’ Men are also not
supposed to complain excessively about pain they are experiencing, except if it is to their partner
or close family members. For this reason, they are less likely than women to visit doctors or to
pay attention to pain they are experiencing.
Women, on the other hand, are deemed to be more susceptible to medical conditions given
their biological make up. Biology also accounts, in part, for why women have been given more
medical attention than men; due to their reproductive functions, they are seen as needing medical
intervention more frequently than men. In fact, this function makes women more ‘in tune’ with
their bodies than men, so that they are more likely to recognize a problem. Additionally, women
have been socialized to seek medical care, unlike men so that they more regularly visit the doctor
and get necessary tests such as pap smears and mammograms.
With regard to disease, both men and women suffer from a wide range of ailments including
hypertension, cardiovascular diseases and cancer.. In Trinidad and Tobago, for instance, the rate
of diabetes is quite alarming. Lifestyle often contributes to the incidence of such diseases. People
472 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
who are careful with their diets, and obtain adequate exercise and rest are generally more likely
to live longer.
Health and Ethnicity
Social class mediates ethnicity and health, for the most part. Minorities and disadvantaged
groups usually belong to the lower class, are more susceptible to poor health and have less
access to proper health care. Health and ethnicity are connected via lifestyle or culture. The
fact is that some cultures may be more susceptible to some types of disease than others, or may
be more willing to admit to their occurrence. A classic case of the latter was noted in Bruce
Dohrenwend’s study of the link between ethnicity and mental illness. He discovered that,
compared to Jews, the Irish and blacks, Puerto Ricans (in America) reported more cases of
mental illness, primarily because mental illness was regarded as less undesirable by this ethnic
group. In the Caribbean, this ethnic diversity can be seen in the type of diseases that various
ethnic groups suffer from. Among East Indians, the incidence of diabetes is significantly higher
than among African descendants. One reason given for this is the sedentary lifestyle and the
high carbohydrate diet, among this ethnic group. Afro-Caribbean persons have been seen to
have a higher incidence of hypertension. This may be linked to diet, stress or lifestyle generally.
The linking of ethnicity to mental illness has been subjected to criticism on the grounds of factors
such as limited sample size and racism. At different points in time in the United States of
America, breast cancer was found to be more prevalent in both white and black women. At the
same time, prostate cancer is noted to occur more in black men than in men of other races.
Table 20.1: The Incidence of Under-Nourishment and Disease in Selected Caribbean
Countries
Undernourished People Living
People Living
People
with HIV/AIDS
with HIV/
(as % of Total) (in 2001) Adults AIDS (in 2001)
Population
(15–24)
Children (0–14)
Tuberculosis
Cases (1999)
(Per
100,000
People)
1
Barbados
-
1.20
-
2. The Bahamas
-
3.50
< 100
25
-
-
-
8
1.
3.
St Kitts and
Nevis
Caribbean Social Issues: Health and the Environment | 473
Undernourished People Living
People Living
People
with HIV/AIDS
with HIV/
(as % of Total) (in 2001) Adults AIDS (in 2001)
Population
(15–24)
Children (0–14)
Tuberculosis
Casesw -1.02AID
474 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
3. State the main initiatives against the spread of HIV/AIDS undertaken by government
and NGOs in your country? How successful would you say these efforts have been?
(Newspapers and magazines may be an excellent source of recent information).
The Environment
Some sociologists are also interested in studying the social factors that cause environmental
problems, the implications of those problems, and attempts to address these problems.
Environmental sociology emerged as a subfield of sociology after the environmental movement
of the 1960s and early 1970s. It still exists as an interdisciplinary field, closely associated with
the field known as Human Ecology. Human Ecology is defined by Anderson and Taylor (2007)
as ‘the scientific study of the interactions between humans and our physical environment.’ These
authors also define a human ecosystem as ‘any system of interdependent parts that involves human
beings in interaction with one another and the physical environment.’
Some sociologists even distinguish between ‘sociology of environment’ (the study of environmental
issues through the lens of traditional sociology) and ‘environmental sociology,’ concerned with
societal-environmental relations (Dunlap and Catton 1994).
A diversity of paradigms have characterized environmental sociology. Despite this diversity, some
major themes have emerged through empirical research and theorizing. The ecosystem has been
viewed as consisting of interdependent parts and a disturbance in one part affects the whole system.
The Impact of Natural Disasters on the Region
Natural disasters can be classified into two categories:
•
geophysical events – such as earthquakes, volcanic eruptions and tsunamis; and
•
hydro-meteorological events – such as floods, droughts and storms.
Different Caribbean islands are vulnerable to different natural disasters. For example, the Eastern
islands are susceptible to hurricanes and others to volcanic activity.
The poor tend to be affected more than other groups in society by the effects of natural disasters.
The poor tend to be more vulnerable, due to their occupation (such as farming or fishing), housing
location (overcrowded slums, or on steep slopes) and lack of access to credit and insurance facilities.
Caribbean Social Issues: Health and the Environment | 475
Climate Change
Climate Change is another threat facing the region. The Caribbean is experiencing higher
temperatures, rises in sea-levels and increased frequency and intensity of storms and hurricanes.
These are driven by factors both within and outside the region. The emission of greenhouse gases
and industrial wastes affect both the air and water in the region. In addition, rises in sea levels
may threaten some low-lying islands.
According to the Trinidad Guardian of June 3, 2012 ‘Trinidad and Tobago, as a small island
development state (SIDS), is particularly vulnerable to the consequences of climate change, such
as the rise in sea levels, increased flooding, the increased frequency and intensity of hurricanes,
hillside erosion and the loss of coastal habitats.’
Quoting form a document entitled ‘Working for Sustainable Development in Trinidad and
Tobago,’ it identified the country’s main sectors that are likely to be impacted:
1. Agriculture
•
Projected increase in air temperature is likely to increase the aridity of soils, thus
decreasing crop yields.
•
Increase in sea level is likely to result in inundation of coastal areas and salination of soil.
•
Increased temperatures can result in the increased proliferation of new and existing pests
and diseases and increase the demand for water for irrigation purposes.
2. Human Health
•
The projected increases in ambient air temperature are likely to increase the spread of
vector diseases, since higher temperature and humidity favour the spread of vector-borne
insects.
•
Projected increases in sea level and precipitation intensity are likely to result in increases
in the incidence of waterborne diseases.
3. Human Settlements
•
Projected increases in precipitation can result in increased flooding, which will have
adverse effects on human settlements, commerce, transport and towns and villages. This
can add pressure to existing urban and rural infrastructure.
476 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
•
Increased frequency and intensity of storms and its associated flooding and storm surges
can disrupt and destroy several coastal settlements, increasing the incidence of poverty.
4. Coastal Zones
•
Sea level rise will result in increased inundation, increased erosion and loss of coastline,
loss of natural resources such as wetlands and loss of important ecosystems, goods and
services.
•
Temperature increases would lead to loss of the country’s vital coral reefs’ ecosystems
and fisheries resource. It would also increase coastal erosion.
5. Water Resources
•
As temperature increases, there is also expected to be loss of available surface water as
increased evapotranspiration would take place.
•
Decreased precipitation would reduce percolation and recharge of groundwater reserves
in aquifers and the loss of coastal habitats.
Source: Ministry of Planning ‘Working for Sustainable Development in Trinidad and Tobago’ 2012, 8.
Sustainable Development
No discussion on development would be complete without some mention of the idea of sustainable
development. For decades, the search for development has led different countries to pursue
several paradigms – modernization, redistribution with growth, the ‘basic needs’ approach,
structural adjustment, and adjustment with a ‘human face.’ However, it was realized that
the proposed benefits of these models did not materialize. Instead, problems still persisted – for
example, growth in poverty, increase in gender and economic inequalities, and environmental
degradation.
Also the availability of resources need to be considered. Many resources once believed to be
available in infinite quantities are now seen as threatened by depletion. Some resources, such as
certain fossil fuels, are simply non-renewable and will be eventually depleted.
It was recognized that economic development and the environment were inextricably linked.
It was further realized that if countries continued along this path, the development process would
eventually destroy the very resources used to attain development. In other words, the present
generation would be sowing the seeds of its own destruction.
Caribbean Social Issues: Health and the Environment | 477
The environmental problems coming to the fore are increasingly severe – chemical and radioactive
contamination of soils, air and water, decreasing biodiversity, alarming rates of depletion of
natural resources, deforestation and desertification, which have not only local effects, but
supranational and global impacts, and which threaten the survival of life on earth.
Other critical issues include the transfer of environmentally sound technology; enhancing research
and development capacities through the dissemination of information; and the provision of
adequate funding. Hence, the new developmental paradigm of sustainable development has
been born.
Historical Evolution of Sustainable Development
The genesis of the United Nations Conference on the Environment and Development (UNCED),
or ‘Earth Summit,’ can be traced back to Sweden, 1972. UNCED marked the twentieth
anniversary of the United Nations Conference on the Human Environment in Stockholm.
United Nations Conference on the Human Environment
The Stockholm Conference heralded the beginning of international environmental awareness
and established a course for action. Stockholm’s most impressive achievement was the creation
of the United Nations Environmental Programme (UNEP). However, Stockholm failed to
foresee and prevent a second generation of environmental problems such as ozone depletion
and climate change.
World Commission on Environment and Development
In 1987, the World Commission on Environment and Development (WCED) issued its report,
Our Common Future, which developed and elaborated the theme of sustainable development.
Based on the WCED report, the dire need to organize another conference was recognized.
United Nations Conference on the Environment and Development
The United Nations Conference on the Environment and Development (UNCED) took
place in 1992 in Rio de Janeiro. Delegates from 178 countries, heads of state of more than
100 countries and representatives of more than 1,000 NGOs attended the conference.
The participating world leaders signed five major agreements or instruments:
478 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
•
The Rio Declaration: A brief statement of principles on sustainable development.
•
Agenda 21: A broad, 40-chapter statement of goals and potential programmes related
to sustainable development, which includes the creation of a new Commission for
Sustainable Development.
•
The Biodiversity Treaty: A binding international agreement aimed at strengthening
national control and preservation of biological resources.
•
The Statement of Forest Principles: A non-binding agreement on development,
preservation and management of the Earth’s remaining forests.
•
The Framework Convention on Climate Change: A binding international agreement
that seeks to limit or reduce emissions of gases, mainly carbon dioxide and methane,
associated with the potential for global warming.
Pollution
Air Pollution
•
Air pollution is a major phenomenon that affects the health of the human and natural
environment since harmful airborne chemicals threaten the health and stability of human,
plant and animal life. According to the World Health Organization, air pollution is
the cause of two million premature deaths worldwide annually and is a major cause of
numerous respiratory infections.
•
The United Nations Environment Programme defines air pollution as ‘an atmospheric
condition in which various substances are present at concentrations high enough
above their normal ambient levels to produce a measurable effect on people, animals,
vegetation, or materials.’ These substances are the result of either man-made activity or
natural processes. Man-made pollutants include emissions from industrial activity or
vehicle exhaust while carbon monoxide and sulphur dioxide from volcanic eruptions
are examples of natural air pollutants.
Causes of Air Pollution
Sources of air pollution are divided into two categories: anthropogenic (man-made) and natural
sources.
One of the major anthropogenic causes of air pollution is the burning of fossil fuels such as coal,
gas and oil which are used for the generation of electricity, fuel and for the manufacturing of
various products. On the other hand, air pollution can be caused by natural sources. For instance,
carbon monoxide emissions from wildfires, sulphur and ash particles from volcanic activity and
organic carbon compounds from vegetation.
Caribbean Social Issues: Health and the Environment | 479
Effects of Air Pollution
Chemicals released from industrial plants result in the production of acid rain or acid precipitation.
The high acidic content of this form of precipitation negatively affects plants, animals and marine
life.
One of the pertinent impacts of air pollution is the myriad of human health complications that
mainly affect the respiratory system resulting in diseases like lung cancer. The following table
outlines the sources of air pollutants and the accompanying health effects.
Table 20.2 Sources and Effects of Air Pollutants
Pollutant
Description
Sources
Health Effects
Welfare Effects
Carbon
Monoxide
(CO)
Colorless,
odorless gas
Motor vehicle
exhaust, indoor
sources include
kerosene or wood
burning stoves.
Headaches,
reduced mental
alertness,
heart attack,
cardiovascular
diseases,
impaired fetal
development,
death.
Contribute to
the formation of
smog.
Sulphur
Dioxide (SO2)
Colorless gas
that dissolves in
water vapor to
form acid, and
interact with
other gases and
particles in the
air.
Coal-fired power
plants, petroleum
refineries,
manufacture of
sulphuric acid and
smelting of ores
containing sulphur.
Eye irritation,
wheezing,
chest tightness,
shortness of
breath, lung
damage.
Contribute to
the formation
of acid rain,
visibility
impairment,
plant and
water damage,
aesthetic
damage.
480 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Pollutant
Description
Sources
Health Effects
Welfare Effects
Nitrogen
Dioxide (NO2)
Reddish brown,
highly reactive
gas.
Motor vehicles,
electric utilities,
and other
industrial,
commercial, and
residential sources
that burn fuels.
Susceptibility
to respiratory
infections,
irritation of
the lung and
respiratory
symptoms (e.g.,
cough, chest
pain, difficulty
breathing).
Contribute to
the formation of
smog, acid rain,
water quality
deterioration,
global warming,
and visibility
impairment.
Ozone (O3)
Gaseous
pollutant when it
is formed in the
troposphere.
Vehicle exhaust
and certain other
fumes. Formed
from other air
pollutants in
the presence of
sunlight.
Eye and throat
irritation,
coughing,
respiratory
tract problems,
asthma, lung
damage.
Plant and
ecosystem
damage.
Lead (Pb)
Metallic element
Metal refineries,
lead smelters,
battery
manufacturers,
iron and steel
producers.
Anemia, high
blood pressure,
brain and
kidney damage,
neurological
disorders, cancer,
lowered IQ.
Affects animals
and plants,
affects aquatic
ecosystems.
Particulate
Matter (PM)
Very small
particles of soot,
dust, or other
matter, including
tiny droplets of
liquids.
Diesel engines,
power plants,
industries,
windblown dust,
wood stoves.
Eye irritation,
asthma,
bronchitis,
lung damage,
cancer, heavy
metal poisoning,
cardiovascular
effects.
Visibility
impairment,
atmospheric
deposition,
aesthetic
damage.
Source: Environmental Protection Agency. ‘Effects of Air Pollutants – Health Effects.’ http://www.epa.gov/
apti/course422/ap7a.html
Caribbean Social Issues: Health and the Environment | 481
Caribbean Responses to Air Pollution
As part of its sustainable development initiative, in 2005, the Government of the Republic of
Trinidad and Tobago sought to revise the Environmental Protection Act, 2000. The focus of this
amendment was to ensure that economic development does not hamper environmental protection.
One measure outlined was the move to adopt quality air standards that were consistent with the
requirements of the World Health Organization by controlling air pollution by issuing permits
and developing regulation strategies to encourage compliance with air pollution regulations.
Water Pollution
The contamination of the bodies of water such as lakes, oceans and rivers presents a major
problem for the earth’s ecosystem. This contamination is known as water pollution and is defined
by Sharma (2005) as the ‘addition of excess undesirable substances to water that make it harmful
to man, animal or aquatic life, or otherwise causes.’
Water may become polluted by natural or human activities. Contaminated water is unsafe for
drinking, recreational and agricultural purposes and also poses a threat to wildlife and marine life.
Causes of Water Pollution
Agricultural activity increases the problem of water contamination. Excess fertilizer and insecticides,
improper dumping of animal waste and plant residue can make their way into water bodies as
agricultural run-off. Harmful substances are deposited and the waterways become polluted.
Oil spills can be deemed as the most destructive form of water pollution and can result from
spillage during transportation or delivery and even loss from storage facilities.
The careless dumping of garbage, old appliances, plastics and other waste material is of major
concern and is another common source of water pollution.
Effects of Water Pollution
Polluted water is unsafe for drinking, swimming and other forms of domestic use. The destruction
of wildlife and natural ecosystems is another consequence of water contamination. Water pollution
– in the form of the dumping of waste material and garbage – also increases the potential for
flooding as this debris causes rivers to overflow their banks and spill onto nearby areas affecting
agricultural land and property.
482 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Caribbean Responses to Water Pollution
Jamaica’s National Oil Spill plan aims at emphasizing the need for mitigation measures to be
put in place should an oil spill occur. The plan outlines that the government will take timely
responsive action in dealing with the onslaught of this form of pollution and work in collaboration
with other environmental bodies to reduce the impact of pollution on marine and human life.
Noise Pollution
Noise pollution is the term used to describe the occurrence of unwanted or disturbing sounds
that affect the overall quality of life. Noise pollution disrupts everyday activities such as sleeping
or reading and refers to a state of constant disturbing sound.
According to Kumar (2004) noise can be categorized as noise pollution due to the:
1. inherent unpleasantness of the sound
2. the persistence and recurrence of the noise; and
3. whether the sound interferes with the listener’s activities
Causes of Noise Pollution
Noise pollution may be brought about by industrial activity. Noise emanating from factories such
as textile mills and other manufacturing industries are disturbances to neighbouring communities.
Moreover, the mechanization of agricultural activities provides another source of noise pollution
in the form of tractors and even lawn mowers. Bulldozing and additional forms of construction
activity are also considered noise pollution.
Road traffic and the various modes of transportation – such as trucks, trains, airplanes and
motorcycles add to the problem of noise pollution. This form of noise pollution depends upon
the speed of the vehicle as well as the intensity of the traffic.
Another source of noise pollution derives from festivities, entertainment and other social gatherings.
Loud music from speakers, public address systems and even fireworks create disturbances to those
nearby who are not involved in the festivities.
Effects of Noise Pollution
Kumar (2004) has categorized the effects of noise pollution as it relates to hearing and general
health of individuals.
Caribbean Social Issues: Health and the Environment | 483
Noise pollution may result in temporary hearing loss or in extreme cases, prolonged high intensity
noises can lead to permanent hearing loss.
Persistent exposure to loud noises can lead to increased levels of anxiety and stress and an
increase in heart rate that can affect various bodily functions. Kumar (2004) also outlined that
the development of the nervous systems in unborn babies or young children may be affected
by noise pollution. Animals such as dogs are also impacted upon by loud noises as they become
frightened and may suffer brain and heart damage as a result.
Caribbean Response to Noise Pollution
As part of its environmental management schematic, the government of Trinidad and Tobago has
outlined regulations to control noise pollution. One clause of the Noise Pollution Control Rules
states that persons seeking to hold events that will produce sound levels above the prescribed level
must apply for a variation permit before such activity can be carried out. Also, the legislation
outlines that in areas of public entertainment where sound levels exceed 100 decibels, a public
notice should be posted to warn patrons that the sound levels pose a threat to their health. In
this way, awareness is raised.
Land Pollution
Even though there are designated areas for the dumping of rubbish and other waste or unwanted
material, the problem of land pollution still persists. This type of pollution can result from simple
actions such as throwing an empty bottle out the window of a moving vehicle or from the disposal
of larger items like furniture on empty lots. Land pollution is unsightly and may cause threats
to public health and safety.
However, land pollution does not only affect the surface of the earth. Harmful liquids are released
when garbage decomposes and these liquids seep into the earth’s soil. This soil then becomes
contaminated and may lead to water pollution as the harmful liquids make their way to the
waterways via run off.
Taking the aforementioned aspects into consideration, land pollution may be classified as the
dumping of sold or liquid waste materials on land or underground, which can lead to the pollution
of the soil and ground water.
Causes of Land Pollution
A main contributor to land pollution is littering. When material such as clothes, aluminum cans,
484 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
plastic bottles, various forms of packaging and other non-biodegradable material are disposed,
they tend to accumulate on the land.
Agricultural practices also lead to land pollution. Farmers utilize fertilizers and pesticides and
most times, the overuse of these chemicals contaminate the soil thereby polluting the land.
Another significant source of land pollution comes from construction. Large waste products from
this industry such as concrete blocks, iron and other metals occupy a lot of space in the landfills
and create unsightly accumulations. Additionally, when wastes such as paint, oil and other liquids
are improperly disposed of, they leak harmful chemicals into the earth and pollute the soil.
Effects of Land Pollution
The improper dumping of chemicals or the overuse of chemical fertilizers for agricultural
production is leached into the soil and enters the waterways. This affects soil flora and fauna
Also, the harmful chemicals in the waterways affects fish and make the water unsafe for drinking
and other uses.
Even though some of the material that is inappropriately disposed of may not be toxic to the
environment, they amass and create breeding grounds for mosquitoes, rats and other vermin that
pose threats to public health and safety. Examples of these materials can be old furniture, plastics
and packaging. Also, since these substances do not decompose, they create unsightly masses and
detract from the cleanliness of the landscape.
Caribbean Responses to Land Pollution
In September 2012, the National Solid Waste Management Authority (NSWMA) of Trinidad
and Tobago issued tickets to more than 1,600 persons who were in breach of the anti-litter act.
Additionally, the Authority has embarked upon a cleanup drive around the country in an effort
to further curtail the littering among the population. In like manner, Litter Wardens have been
sanctioned in Antigua and Barbuda under The Litter Act to monitor and issue sanctions to
persons who breach this legislation.
Deforestation
The Caribbean, once covered with tropical rainforest, now suffers from deforestation.
Deforestation is the removal of trees without planting others in their place.
Trees have been removed for agriculture, including crops and livestock, for firewood, for industrial
development, for housing and sometimes for lumber.
Caribbean Social Issues: Health and the Environment | 485
Deforestation has the following consequences:
•
Soil Erosion
Deforestation makes soil prone to erosion by agents such as wind and water. The roots
of trees hold the particles of soil together thus, preventing the fertile top soil from being
carried away. Soil erosion leads to loss of productivity of the land due to loss of mineral
nutrients and soil microorganisms
•
Destruction of animal habitats
Apart from domesticated animals and marine and freshwater animals, all other animals
need forests as their habitats. These forests do not only provide a place for the animals
to roam but also provide their food and act as a source of protection from predators
through camouflage. Destruction of the animals’ habitats literally kills the animals.
•
Medicinal Plants
Some trees are used as herbs. Trees such as the Cinchona have been used as treatment
against Malaria since time immemorial. Destruction of these forests leads to destruction
of medicinal plants that could be used as treatment for various ailments.
•
Trees act as windbreakers
Absence of trees allows strong winds and storms to do great damage.
•
Greenhouse effect and global warming
Nature balances the flow of energy and nutrients. Forests play a very vital role in these
cycles, e.g., the carbon cycle where deforestation causes carbon dioxide to remain in the
atmosphere. Accumulation of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere acts as a blanket that
traps long wave radiation of heat and prevents it from escaping the surface of the earth
back into the atmosphere. This phenomenon is known as the greenhouse effect. The
trapped radiation is converted into heat. This heat causes global warming. Destruction
of forests also causes modification of climate of an area mostly leading to desertification
and aridity.
Deforestation in Haiti
Haiti is the poorest country in the western hemisphere, with four out of five of its people living
in abject poverty. One reason is that its forests have been cut down, and not replanted, and so
its soil has eroded away. Forests used to cover over nine tenths of Haiti: now only 1–2 per cent
remains densely forested.
About 85 per cent of the country is mountainous and the soil hard to hold in place once the trees
are gone. The heavy daily rains of the five-month-long wet season form brown muddy torrents that
carry massive amounts of topsoil out to sea. Many slopes have been losing over three centimetres
486 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
of topsoil a year for decades, leaving near-barren bedrock or poor soil behind. The people find
it hard to grow crops.
The erosion also wreaks havoc downstream. Sediment fills streams, rivers and lakes, decimating
fish stocks, and clogging irrigation systems in the productive coastal plains. It pours into the
ocean, damaging marine life and the Haitian fishing industry. And the water runs much faster
off the bare slopes into the sediment-filled rivers and streams causing ever-worsening floods (see
www.caribzones.com).
People are being taught to understand how deforestation leads to environmental and economic
hardships.
The Way Forward
The world has come to the realization that present developmental trends cannot continue without
irreparable harm to the environment. Many complex issues must be addressed in the drive toward
sustainability – financial aid, environmentally sound technology, gender issues, and the like. Also,
since it is recognized that all nations have a responsibility for the health of the world, questions
of sovereignty and the right to decide how a nation’s resources will be utilized are raised.
As in any developmental effort, people occupy a central position. For sustainable development
to become a reality, people must become subjects and not objects of their development.
Other Challenges for the Region
Economic Vulnerability – the economies in the region are tied to those of developed countries,
which make our islands more susceptible to external shocks. One way in which the economies
of the region are linked to those of the North is through trade agreements. Hence, the World
Trade Organization’s recent change in the trading agreement with respect to bananas has affected
countries such as Saint Lucia, St Vincent and the Grenadines, and Dominica.
Economic Diversification – Caribbean countries have historically tended to be focused on one or two
main sectors for income, employment and foreign exchange. For example, Trinidad and Tobago
is known for its oil, Jamaica for its tourism and the smaller islands for agricultural production
such as bananas and cocoa. This concern is even more pronounced, given the issue above.
Transportation – the problems associated with regional air and sea transportation continue to
impact on the cost of living of Caribbean nationals. There are increased calls for the introduction
of an inter-island ferry service as a less costly means of transportation.
492 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Campbell, C. Colony and Nation: A Short History of Education in Trinidad and Tobago, 1838–1986.
Kingston: Ian Randle Publishers, 1992.
Caribbean Tourism Organization Statistical Report, 2002.
Chamberlain, Mary. Family Love in the Diaspora. Kingston: Ian Randle Publishers, 2006.
Chevannes, B. Rastafari and Other African-Caribbean worldviews. The Hague: Institute of Social
Studies, 1998.
———.Rastafari: Roots and Ideology. New York: Syracuse University Press, 1995.
Chuck, D. Understanding Crime. Bridgetown, Barbados: Caribbean Law Publishers, 1986.
Cicourel, A.V., and J.L. Kitsuse. The Educational Decision Makers. Boston: Bobbs-Merrill, 1963.
Cicourel, A.V. The Social Organization of Juvenile Justice. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1968.
Clarke, Edith. My Mother Who Fathered Me. London: George Allen and Unwin, 1957.
Cloward, R. and L. Ohlin. Delinquency and Opportunity. New York: Free Press, 1960.
Cohen, A. Delinquent Boys. New York: Free Press, 1955.
Commonwealth Secretariat. Sustainable Development and an Imperative for Environmental Protection.
London: Commonwealth Secretariat Publications, 1997.
Craig, Susan. ‘Sociological Theorizing in the English-Speaking Caribbean’. In Susan Craig,
Contemporary Caribbean: A Sociological Reader, Vol. 2. Maracas: The College Press, 1981.
Cross, M. West Indian Social Problems. St Joseph, Trinidad: Columbus Publishers, 1970.
———. Urbanisation and Urban Growth in the Caribbean. New York: Cambridge University Press,
1979.
CSO National Census Report 2000., Trinidad and Tobago.
Davis, K. and W. Moore. ‘Some Principles of Stratification’. American Sociological Review, 1945,
242–49.
Deosaran, R. and D. Chadee.. ‘Juvenile Delinquency in Trinidad and Tobago’. Caribbean Journal of
Criminology and Social Psychology, Vol. 2, No. 2 (1997): 36–83.
Deosaran, R. et al. Contemporary Issues in Social Science: A Caribbean Perspective, vols. I–III. St
Augustine, Trinidad: ANSA McAl Psychological Research Centre, University of the West Indies,
1994–1996.
Dohrenwend, Bruce P. et al. ‘Socioeconomic Status and Psychiatric Disorders: The Causation-Selection
Issue’. Science 255 (1992): 946–52.
Doob, C.A. Sociology: An Introduction. California: Thompson Wadsworth, 2000.
Douglas, J.W.B. The Home and the School. London: MacGibbon and Kee, 1964.
Doyal, L. and I. Gough. A Theory of Human Need. London: Macmillan, 1991.
Dunn, H.S., ed. Globalisation, Communication and Caribbean Identity. Kingston: Ian Randle
Publishers, 1995.
Durkheim, E. Education and Sociology. New York: The Free Press, 1956.
———. Moral Education: A Study in the Theory and Application of the Sociology of Education. New
York: The Free Press, 1961.
———. The Rules of the Sociological Method. Glencoe, IL: The Free Press, 1962 [1895].
Bibliography | 493
Elder Jacob, D. African Survivals in Trinidad and Tobago. London: Karia Press, 1988.
Elliot, J. An Introduction to Sustainable Development for Environmental Protection. London:
Commonwealth Secretariat Publications, 1994.
Evans, H.L. ‘The Construction of Gender and Achievement in Secondary Schools in Jamaica.’
Caribbean Journal of Education, Vol. 21 Nos. 1 and 2 (1999): 3–24.
Farley, J.E. Sociology. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall, 1990.
Firestone, S. The Dialectics of Sex. London: Paladin, 1970.
Foote Whyte, W. Street Corner Society: The Social Structure of an Italian Slum. 4th edn. Chicago:
University of Chicago Press, 1993.
Frazier, E.F. The Negro Family in the United States. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1939.
Fuller, M. ‘Black Girls in a London Comprehensive School’. In M. Hammersley and P. Woods, eds.
Life in School. Milton Keynes: Open University Press, 1984.
Furnivall, J.S. Colonial Policy and Practice: A Comparative Study of Burma and Netherlands. Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press, 1948.
Gans, H. More Equity. New York: Pantheon Books, 1973.
Giddens, A. Sociology: A Brief but Critical Introduction. London: Macmillan, 1986.
———. Sociology, 4th edn. Cambridge: Polity Press, 2001.
———. Sociology, 5th edn. Cambridge: Polity Press, 2008.
Girvan, N., ed. Rethinking Development. Kingston: University of the West Indies Press, 1995.
Goffman, Erving. The Presentation of Self in Everyday Life. New York: Doubleday, 1959.
Gordon, D. Class, Status and Social Mobility in Jamaica. Kingston: Institute of Social and Economic
Research, University of the West Indies, 1987.
Gordon, S. A Century of West Indian Education: A Source Book. London: Longmans, 1963.
Goveia, E.V. Slave Society in the British Leeward Islands at the End of the Eighteenth Century. New
Haven and London: Yale University Press, 1965.
Government of Trinidad and Tobago. CSO Pocket Digest. Trinidad and Tobago: Central Statistical
Office, 2003.
Greene, J.E., ed. Race, Class and Gender in the Future of the Caribbean. Kingston: Institute of Social
and Economic Research, 1993.
Greenwood, R., and S. Swamber. Emancipation to Emigration. Oxford: Macmillan Education, 2003.
Geer, S. and E. Hughes. Making the Grade. New York: John Wiley, 1968.
Griffith, I. Drugs and Security in the Caribbean. Pennsylvania: Penn State University Press, 1997.
Guttmacher Institute. Facts in Brief: Teen Sex and Pregnancy. New York: The Allan Guttmacher
Institute, 1996.
Halliday, F. ‘Education and Society in St. Kitts and Nevis’. In E. Miller, ed. Education and Society in
the Commonwealth Caribbean. Kingston: Institute of Social and Economic Research, University
of the West Indies, 1991, 27–58.
Haralambos, M. and M. Holborn. Sociology: Themes and Perspectives, 6th edn. London: Collins, 2004.
494 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
———. Sociology: Themes and Perspectives, 7th edn. London: Harper Collins, 2008.
Hargreaves, D.H. Social Relations in a Secondary School. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1967.
Hargreaves, F., S. Hester, and E. Mellor. Deviance in Classrooms. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul,
1975.
Harricharan, T. The Catholic Church in Trinidad, 1498–1852. Vol. 1. Port of Spain: Inprint Caribbean,
1981.
Haupt A., and T.T. Kane. Population handbook, 5th edn. Washington, DC: The Population Reference
Bureau, 2004.
Heer, D. and J. Grisby. Society and Population. New York: Prentice Hall, 1992.
Heger, M., A. Julca and O. Paddison. 2008. Research Paper No. 2008/25 Analysing the Impact
of Natural Hazards in Small Economies: The Caribbean Case. UNU WIDER United Nations
University: World institute for Development Economics Research, 2008.
Hayter, T. Aid as Imperialism. London: Penguin Books Ltd., 1971.
Henriques, Fernando. Family and Colour in Jamaica. London: Eyre and Spottiswoode, 1953.
Henry, F. ‘The changing traditions of the Shango Religion in Trinidad’. Workshop on African, Indian
and Indigenous Religions of the Caribbean. St Augustine, University of the West Indies, 1996.
———. Reclaiming African Religions in Trinidad: The Socio-Political Legitimation of the Orisha and
Spiritual Baptist Faiths. Kingston: University of the West Indies Press, 2003.
Hersberg, W. Protestant, Catholic, Jew. Revised edn. New York: Anchor Books, 1960.
Herskovits, M.J. The Myth of the Negro Past. New York and London: Harper Brothers, 1937.
———. Life in a Haitian Valley. New York: Octagon Books, 1964.
Herskovits, M.J. and F.S. Herskovits. Trinidad Village. New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 1947.
Hess, B.B., E. Markson and W. Stein. Sociology. New York: Macmillan Pub. Co., 1993.
Hinchcliffe. K. Caribbean Region: Access, Quality, and Efficiency in Education. Washington, DC:
International Bank for Reconstruction and Development, 1993.
Hirschi, T. The Causes of Delinquency. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press, 1969.
Horowitz. M. Peoples and Cultures of the Caribbean. New York: Doubleday Press, 1971.
Houk, J.T. Spirit, Blood and Drums: The Orisha Religion in Trinidad. Philadelphia: Temple University
Press, 1995.
Hunte, Desmond. Demographic Trends in Trinidad and Tobago. Port of Spain: Population Council of
Trinidad and Tobago, 1995.
Hyacinth, E. Gender differences in education in Jamaica. Kingston: Office of the UNESCO
Representative in the Caribbean, 1999.
Hylton, P. The Role of Religion in Caribbean History. Washington, DC: Billpops Publication, 2002.
International Bank for Reconstruction and Development, (The World Bank). World Development
Report 2007.
International Task Force on Literacy. ‘Words Are What I’ve Got’. Compiled by the International Task
Force on Literacy, 1991.
Jamaica Observer Monday, December 4, 2006.
Bibliography | 497
Nanda, S. and R.L. Warms. Cultural Anthropology, 7th edn. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth/ Thomson
Learning, 2002.
National Commission for the Protection of Human Subjects of Biomedical and Behavioral Research.
The Belmont Report: Ethical Principles and Guidelines for the Protection of Human Subjects of
Research. Washington, DC: DHHS, 1979.
Newman, M.D. Exploring the Architecture of Everyday Life. London: Pine Ridge Press, 2002.
O’Donnell, M. A New Introduction to Sociology, 3rd edn. London: Thomas Nelson and Sons, 1992.
———. An Introduction to Sociology. Cheltenham: Nelson Thornes Publishers, 1997.
Oakley, A. The Sociology of Housework. Oxford: Martin Robertson, 1974.
Ogburn, W. On Culture and Social Change. Otis Dudley Duncan, ed. Chicago: Phoenix Books;
University of Chicago Press, 1964.
Olmos, F.M. and L. Paravisini-Gebert. Creole Religions of the Caribbean: An Introduction from Vodou
and Santeria to Obeah and Espiritismo. New York: New York Press, 2003.
Otterbein, Keith. ‘Caribbean Family Organization: A Comparative Analysis’. American Anthropologist
67 (1965): 66–79.
Owens, J. Dread: The Rastafarians of Jamaica. Kingston: Sangster’s Book Stores, 1976.
Pan American Health Organization. Mortality and Population Database. Technical Information
System, 2002.
———. ‘Comparative Gender Analysis of Dietary and Exercise Behavior in the Caribbean: A
Framework for Action’. Kingston: Jamaica: Caribbean Food and Nutrition Institute and PAHO,
2003.
Pareto, V. A Treatise on General Sociology. New York: Dover Publications, 1963.
Parker, H. A View From The Boys: A Sociology of Downtown Adolescents. Liverpool: Newton Abbot, 1974.
Parry, O. Male Underachievement in High School Education in Jamaica, Barbados, and St. Vincent and
the Grenadines. Kingston: Canoe Press, 2000.
Parsons, T. and R.F. Bales, eds. Family Socialization and Interaction Process. New York: Free Press, 1955.
Patterson, O. The Sociology of Slavery: An Analysis of the Origins, Development, and Structure of Negro
Slave Society in Jamaica. Kingston: Jamaica: Sangster’s Book Stores Limited, 1973.
Patton, M. How to Use Qualitative Methods in Evaluation. London: Sage Publications, 1986.
Poon, A. ‘Caribbean Tourism and the World Economy’. In Stanley Lalta and Marie Freckleton, eds.
Caribbean Economic Development – the First Generation. Kingston: Ian Randle Publishers, 1993,
262–79.
Popenoe, D. Sociology. New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 2000.
Pryce, K. ‘Towards a Caribbean Criminology’. Caribbean Issues Vol. 2, No. 2 (1976): 3–21.
Ramesar, M. Survivors of Another Crossing: A History of East Indians in Trinidad, 1880–1946. St
Augustine, Trinidad: School of Continuing Studies, University of the West Indies, 1994.
Reddock, Rhoda, ed. Ethnic Minorities in the Caribbean. St Augustine, Trinidad: Institute of Social
and Economic Research, 1996.
Reid, D. Sustainable Development: An Introductory Guide. London: Earthscan, 1995.
498 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Renaud, B. National Urbanization Policy in Developing Countries. New York: Oxford University
Press, 1981.
Roach, J.L. et al. Social Stratification in the United States. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall, 1969.
Roberts, G. The Population of Jamaica: An Analysis of its Structure and Growth. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press, 1957.
Roberts, G. Fertility and Mating in Four West Indian Populations: Trinidad & Tobago, Barbados, St
Vincent, Jamaica. Kingston: Institute of Social and Economic Research, 1975.
Roberts, G.W. Population Trends in the British Caribbean. Port of Spain: Guardian Commercial
Printery, n.d.
Robertson, R. Sociological Interpretation of Religion. Harmondsworth: Penguin Books, 1970.
Rodman, Hyman. Lower Class Families. New York: Oxford University Press, 1971.
Roopnarine, J.L. and J. Brown. Caribbean Families: Diversity Among Ethnic Groups. Westport, CT:
Greenwood Publishing Group, Inc., 1997.
Rosenthal, R. and L. Jacobson. Pygmalion in the Classroom. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston,
1968.
Ross, E.B. The Malthus Factor: Poverty, Politics and Population in Capitalist Development. London:
Zed Books, 1998.
Rostow, W.W. ‘The Five Stages of Growth – A Summary’. In The Stages of Economic Growth: A NonCommunist Manifesto. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1960, 4–16.
Roxborough, I. Theories of Underdevelopment. New York: Macmillan, 1979.
Rubenstein, Hymie. Coping with Poverty: Adaptive Strategies in a Caribbean Village. Boulder, CO:
Westview Press, 1987.
Ryan, S., ed. The Independence Experience 1962–1987. St Augustine, Trinidad: Institute of Social and
Economic Research, 1988.
———. Social and Occupational Stratification in Contemporary Trinidad and Tobago. St Augustine,
Trinidad: Institute of Social and Economic Research, 1991.
Schaeffer, R.T., and R.P. Lamm. Sociology. 6th edn. New York: McGraw Hill, 1998.
Scott, J. The Upper Classes: Property and Privilege in Britain. London: Macmillan, 1982.
Sealey, N.E. Caribbean World: A Complete Geography. Cambridge and New York: Cambridge Caribbean,
1994.
Senior, Olive. Working Miracles: Women’s Lives in the English-Speaking Caribbean. Bloomington, IN:
Indiana University Press, 1991.
Silva, M. ‘Caribbean and Intra-Caribbean Tourism: Current Situation and Perspectives’. 8th Meeting
of the Special Committee on Sustainable Tourism of the Association of Caribbean States, Port of
Spain, Trinidad and Tobago, April 4, 2002.
Sharma, R.H. and N.M. Shayka. ‘Hydrological changes and its impact on water resources of Bagmati
watershed, Nepal’. Journal of Hydrology, Volume 327, Issues 3–4 (20 August 2006), 315–22.
Sharma, P. Water Pollution. Delhi: Krishna Prakashan Media. 2005.
Bibliography | 499
Shaw, Clifford R. and Henry D. McKay. Juvenile Delinquency in Urban Areas. Chicago: University
of Chicago Press, 1942.
Simey, T.S. Welfare and Planning in the West Indies. London: Oxford University Press, 1946.
Simon, J.L. ‘More People, Greater Wealth, More Resources, Healthier Environment’. Journal of the
Institute of Economic Affairs, Article 3 (April 1994).
Simpson, G.E. Religious Cults of the Caribbean. Puerto Rico: Rio Piedras, Institute of Caribbean
Studies, University of Puerto Rico, 1970.
Skeggs, B. Formations of Class and Gender, London: Sage Publications, 1997.
Smart, C. ‘The New Female Criminal: Reality or Myth’. British Journal of Criminology, 19 (1979):
50–59.
Smith, M.G. West Indian Family Structure. Seattle: University of Washington Press, 1946.
———. The Plural Society in the British West Indies. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press, 1965.
———. ‘A Survey of West Indian Family Studies’. In Lambros Comitas and David Lowenthal, eds.
Work and Family Life: West Indian Perspectives. Garden City, NY: Anchor Books, 1973, 365–408.
———. Culture, Race and Class in the Commonwealth Caribbean. Kingston: Department of ExtraMural Studies, the University of the West Indies, 1984.
Smith, R. T. The Negro Family in British Guiana. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1956.
———. ‘The Matrifocal Family’. In J. Goody The Character of Kinship. Cambridge, Cambridge
University Press, 1973, 121–44.
Solien, N. L. ‘Household and family in the Caribbean’. Social and Economic Studies 9 (1960): 101–106.
Spiro, M.E. ‘Religion: Problems of Definition and Explanation’. In Michael P. Banton, ed.
Anthropological Approaches to the Study of Religion. London: Tavistock Publications, 1966, 85–125.
Stacey, M. Tradition and Change: A Study of Banbury. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1960.
Stoller, R. Sex and Gender: On the Development of Masculinity and Femininity. New York: Science
House, 1968.
Stone, C. Class, Race and Political Behaviour in Urban Jamaica. Kingston: Institute of Social and
Economic Research, 1973.
Sunday Express, Trinidad and Tobago, April 20, 2008.
Sutherland, E.H. Principles of Criminology. Philadelphia: Lippincott, 1939.
———. White Collar Crime. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1960.
Taylor, L. In the Underworld. London: Unwin Paperbacks, 1984.
Taylor, P. Nation Dance: Religion, Identity and Cultural Difference in the Caribbean. Bloomington, IN:
Indiana University Press, 2001.
Taylor, P. et al. Sociology in Focus. Bath: The Bath Press, 2002.
The Statistics Department. Population and Housing Census 1991. Castries, Saint Lucia: The Statistics
Department, 1993.
———. ‘1995 Special Tabulations of the 1991 Census’. Castries, Saint Lucia: The Statistics
Department.
500 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Thio, A. Sociology, 2nd edn. New York: Addison-Wesley Educational Publishers Inc., 1994.
Thomas-Hope, E. ‘Transients and Settlers: Varieties of Caribbean Migrants and the Socio-Economic
Implications of their Return’. International Migration, 24 (1986): 559–70.
———. Caribbean Migration. Kingston: University of the West Indies Press, 2002.
Tinker, H. A New System of Slavery: The Export of Indian Labour Overseas 1830–1920. London:
Hansib, 1993.
Tischler, H.L. Introduction to Sociology. 7th edn. Texas: The Harcourt Press, 2002.
———. Introduction to Sociology, 8th edn. Texas: The Harcourt Press, 2004.
Townsend, P., ed. The Concept of Poverty. London: Heinemann, 1970.
Trinidad Guardian October 4, 2004.
Trochim, W.M.K. Ethics in Research: Research Methods Knowledge Base. 2nd edn. Cincinnati, OH:
Atomic Dog Publishing, 2002.
Tudor-Hart, J. ‘The Inverse Care Law’. Lancet. 1971; i: 405–12.
Tumin, M. ‘Some Principles of Stratification: A Critical Analysis’. American Sociological Review 18
(August 1953): 387–94. Reprinted In R.Bendix and S.M. Lipset, eds. Class, Status and Power.
London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1967.
Turner, B.L., R.H. Moss, and D.L. Skole, eds. ‘Relating Land Use and Global Land Cover Change: A
Proposal for an IGBP-HDP Core Project’. Stockholm: Royal Swedish Academy of Sciences, 1993.
Tylor, E.B. Primitive Culture: Researches into the Development of Mythology, Philosophy, Religion,
Language, Art and Custom, vol.1. London: John Murray, 1871.
United Nations Development Programme. Human Development Report. New York: Oxford University
Press, 2002.
US Census Bureau. Current Population Survey, March Supplements, 1970–2000.
US Federal Bureau of Investigations, Crime in the United States, Washington, DC: The Bureau, 2001.
van der Hilst, E. ‘The Winti Religion in Suriname’. Workshop on African, Indian and Indigenous
Religions of the Caribbean. University of the West Indies, St Augustine, 1996.
Vertovec, S.A. Hindu Trinidad: Religion, Ethnicity and Socio-Economic Change. London: MacMillian
Educational Ltd, 1987.
Waitzkin, H. A. ‘Marxian interpretation of the growth and development of coronary care technology’.
Am J Public Health, 69(12) (December 1979): 1260–68.
Waugh, D. Geography: An Integrated Approach. London: Thomas Nelson and Sons, 1995.
———. The Wider World, 2nd edn. Cheltenham: Nelson Thornes, 2003.
Weber, M. From Max Weber: Essays in Sociology. Translated and edited by H.H. Gerth and C. Wright
Mills. New York: Oxford University Press, 1958 [1946].
Webster, A. An Introduction to the Sociology of Development. Basingstoke: Macmillan, 1990.
Weeks, J. Population: An Introduction to Concepts and Issues, 5th edn. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth
Publishing Company, 1992.
Westergaard, J., and H. Resler. Class in a Capitalist Society. Harmondsworths: Penguin, 1976.
Williams, E. Capitalism and Slavery. London: André Deutsch, 1964. Reissued, 2005. Kingston: Ian
Randle Publishers, 2005.
Bibliography | 501
———. From Columbus to Castro: The History of the Caribbean, New York: Harper & Row, 1986.
Willis, P. Learning to Labour, Saxon House: Farnborough, 1977.
Wilson, B.R. Religion in Secular Society. London: CA Watts, 1966.
Woods, P. The Divided School. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1979.
World Commission on Environment and Development (WCED). Our Common Future. Oxford:
Oxford University Press, 1987.
Xuereb, G., P. Johnson, A. Morris, C. Bocage, P. Trotter and F.Henry. ‘Obesity in Caribbean Children:
Its Magnitude and Current Control Efforts’. In Nutrition and Health, 34 (3) (2001): 120−26.
Yinger, J.M. Religion, Society, and the Individual, an Introduction to the Sociology of Religion. New
York: Macmillan, 1957.
Young, J. The Drug Takers: The Social Meaning of Drug Use. London: Paladin, 1971.
———. ‘The Role of the Police as Amplifiers of Deviancy, Negotiators of Reality and Translators of
Fantasy: Some Consequences of Our Present System of Drug Control as Seen in Notting Hill’. In
Stanley Cohen, ed. Images of Deviance. London: Penguin, 1971, 27–61.
Young, M. and P. Willmott. Family and Kinship in East London. Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1969.
Zola, I.K. ‘Medicine as an Institution of Social Control’. In P. Conrad and R. Kern, Sociology of Health
and Illness. New York: St Martin’s Press, 1981, 392–402.
Electronic sources:
http://www.un.org/esa/socdev/family/majortr nds.htm
http://www.unicef.org/lac/media_10551.htm
http://www.ndacan.cornell.edu/
http://www.paho.org/English/AD/DPC/NC/child-abuse-lac.htm
http://www.unicef.org/jamaica/press_release_abuse.doc
http://www.nlm.nih.gov/medlineplus/news/fullstory_73573.htmaid. http://www.advocatesforyouth.org/
publications/factsheet/fsimpact.htm
http://www.thenationalcampaign.org/resources/pdf/pubs/10Tips_prtable.pdf http://www.ipsnews.net/
index.asp
http://www.nando.net/prof/caribe/caribbean.religions.html http://www.hist.unt.edu/09w-blk4.htm http://
www.yorku.ca/research/cerlac/crp/welcome.htm http://schoolsite.edex.net.uk/49/Afro-caribbean.html
http://www.stthomas.edu/www/juspce_http/rasta10.htm http://www.kheper.auz.com/topics/religion/
Rastafarianism.htm http:/ http://medalia.net/Links.html http://www.amnh.org/exhibitions/vodou/
http://www.iac.net/~moonweb/NOSVT/VoodooResources.html
http://encarta.msn.com/index/conciseindex/05/0051A000.htm
http://family.jrank.org/pages/203/Caribbean-Families-Family-Structure.html http://sta.uwi.edu/ACHEA/
downloads/ACHEA 2004/Horace William
http://www.worldbank.org/
http://www.un.org/millenniumgoals http://www.developmentgoals.org http://www.iiasa.ac.at/Research/
LUC/Papers/gkh1/chap1.htm http://hdr.undp.org/statistics/data/pdf/hdr04_table_5.pdf
http:www//carec.org
502 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
http//:www.undp.org
http//:www.worldbank.org http://hdr.undp.org/statistics/data/index_indicators.cfm http://www.eclac.
org/celade/proyectos/migracion/ThomasHope.doc http://www.caricomstates.org/Files/Publications/
www.cis.org/articles/paper2html
http://www.cis.org/articles/paper2htm http://www.hcet.org http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Demographic_
transition http://www.onehealthylifestyle.com
http://www.colorado.edu/socioology/gimenez/work/popissue.html http://www.wider.unu.edu/stc/repec/
pdfs/rp2008/rp2008-25.pdf
http://www.undp.org/content/undp/en/home/librarypage/hdr/caribbean-human-development-report2012-l.html
http://www.jamaicaobserver.com/news/1-600-ticketed-for-breaching-anti-litter-law
http://www.peak-oil-technology.com/malthusian-catastrophe.html
http://www.epa.gov/apti/course422/ap7a.html
http://www.all-recycling-facts.com/cause-of-land-pollution.html
http://www.environmentlaw.org.uk/rte.asp?id=90
http://www.laws.gov.ag/acts/chapters/cap-250.pdf
http://www.biodiversity.gov.tt/.../national_environmental_policy_1.pdf
http://www.odpem.org.jm/DisastersDoHappen/NationalDisasterPlans/tabid/57/grm2id/13/Default.aspx
http://www.ema.co.tt/cms/images/stories/pdf/noise%20pollution%20control%20rules%20(mola).pdf
http://www..planning.gov.tt
http://www.caribzones.com
http://www.beyondbooks.com/wcu91/3g.asp, http://www.ocw.jhsph.edu/courses/populationchange/
PDFs/Lecture3.pdf
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Planned_Parenthood)
http://www.cdc.gov/features/worldaidsday/
http://www.ndacan.cornell.edu/
http://www.paho.org/English/AD/DPC/NC/child-abuse-lac.htm
http://www.unicef.org/jamaica/press_release_abuse.doc
http://www.unicef.org/lac/media_10551.htm
http:// www.un.org/millenniumgoals http://www.onecaribbean.org. http://www.un.org/dpcsd/earthsummit
http://www.nlm.nih.gov/medlineplus/news/fullstory_73573.html.
http://www.medgraphics.cam.ac.uk/shield/2002
MULTIPLE CHOICE ANSWERS
Activity 1.1
1. a) social facts
b) positivism
c) function
d) collective conscience
e) prerequisite
2. a) T
b) T
3. a) latency
c) T
d) F
e) F
b) adaptation c) integration d) goal attainment
Activity 1.3
1. d
2. a
3. b
4. c
5. c
Activity 1.4
1. equilibrium
function
institutions
consensus
interdependence
2. a
3. a. T
b. T
c. T
d. T
e. T
Activity 1.6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
i) Weber
ii) Mills
a. F
b. F
c. F
b
d
a
c
a
a
iii) Durkheim
d. T
iv) Mead
504 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Activity 2.3
3. (iv)
Activity 2.4
1. d
2. c
3. b
4. c
5. d
3. c
4. c
5. a
3. b
4. d
5. b
3. a
4.b
5. b
3.c
4. a
5. a
3.c
4.c
5.c
c) F
d) T
e) T
Activity 2.7
1. d
2. c
Activity 2.8
1. b
2. b
Activity 2.11
1. c
2. c
Activity 2.12
1. d
2. a
Activity 2.14
1.b
2.c
Activity 3.3
1 a) T
b) F
Activity 4.1
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
J.S. Furnivall
M.G. Smith
E.K.Braithwaite
George Beckford
Toussaint L’Ouverture
Paul Bogle
Multiple Choice Answers | 505
Activity 4.2
a) T
b) T
c) F
d) F
e) F
3. c
4. d
5. b
c) F
d) F
e) F
c) F
d) F
e) T
3. c
4. c
5. b
3.b
4. c
5. d
3. d
4. a
5. c
Activity 5.2
1. b
2. a
Activity 5.5
1 a) F
b) T
Activity 6.1
2. a) T
b) F
Activity 7.2
1. a
2. c
Activity 7.4
1. c
2. d
Activity 7.5
1.c
2. c
Activity 7.10
Schooling in Capitalist America
Role Allocation
Typing
Education and Inequality
Human Capital
Activity 7.11
1. Streaming
2. Distance Learning
3. Role Allocation
4. Labelling
5. Tracking
f)T
g) T
506 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Activity 10.1
1.d
10. b
2.c
11.b
3.a
12.c
4.d
13.c
5.d
6.c
7.a
8.a
14.d
3. c
4. a
5.c
3.c
4.c
c) F
d) F
e)T
3. a
4. c
5. a
3.T
4. F
5.F
9.c
Activity 10.2
1.d
2. b
Activity 10.3
1.b
2.d
Activity 11.1
3. a) T b) F
Activity 12.5
1. b
2. d
Activity 12.9
1. F
2.F
Activity 12.13
1. urbanism
4. urbanization
2. gemeinschaft
5. gesellschaft
3. inverse care law
Activity 15.1
a) ii
b) v
c) i
d) iii
e) iv
Activity 16.3
1. a
2. c
3. b
4. d
5.b
6.b
7.b
8.a
9.c
10.d
Multiple Choice Answers | 507
Activity 17.1
a) F
b) F
c) T
d) F
e) T
Activity 17.2
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
deviance
crime
informal social control
criminal justice system
labelling
the ‘medicalization’ of deviance
white-collar crime
corporate crime
hate crime
recidivism
f) F
g) T
h) T
Index
Absolute poverty: definition of, 451
Academic achievement: and gender, 248
Acculturation: in the Caribbean, 112;
definition of, 105, 112
Achieved status: definition of, 216
Adversity: the researcher and, 81
African-Caribbean: family structure, 134–35;
resistance culture, 107–108, 109–10
African religions: in the Caribbean, 161–62
African retentions: and the Caribbean family, 135
Africans: in the Caribbean, 116–17, 106, 108;
eighteenth century trade in enslaved, 301
Age: and crime, 375;
distribution in the Caribbean, 312
Ageing: and family structure, 141;
and health, 412
Agenda 21, 478
AIDS: and family structure, 151;
teenagers and, 156
American Birth Control League: and planned
parenthood, 294
Amin, Samir: classification of economics, 353–54
Animism: definition of, 162
Anomie: concept of, 392
ANSA-McAL Psychological Research Centre: and
attitude surveys, 44;
and structured interviews, 48
Antrobus, Peggy: and interpretivism, 42
Ascribed meanings: definition of, 32
Ascribed status: definition of, 216
Attachment: definition of, 405
Attitude surveys: description of, 48
Autocentric centre economy: description of the, 354
Barbados: juvenile delinquency in, 440
Basic needs approach: to poverty alleviation, 457
Becker, Howard: and crime and deviance, 402
Beckford, George: and the plantation society theory,
109
Belief: definition of, 405;
and religion, 161
Best, Lloyd: and Caribbean urbanization, 311,
and the plural society theory, 102
Birth Control League: and planned parenthood, 274
Biodiversity Treaty, 478
Bourgeoisie: definition of, 229
Bowles and Gintis: on education, 186–87
Brathwaite, Kamau: and creolization, 243
Braithwaite, Lloyd: and social stratification in T&T,
239–40
Bureaucratization: description of, 373–74
Calypso: and Caribbean resistance culture, 114–17
Capital, 14
Capital punishment:
arguments for and against, 386;
description and use of, 386
Capitalism: and competition for scarce positions,
289;
and poverty, 450
Caribbean: age distribution in the, 312;
ageing in the, 412;
bureaucratization in the, 404–405; consumption
patterns, 324–25;
and the creole society theory, 111–13;
cricket in the, 115; culture, 99–117; development
issues, 401–14;
education in the, 175–80;
globalization and the, 116;
identity, 107;
Islam: in the, 163–64;
juvenile delinquency in the, 378–79;
language and culture in the, 106, 109–10;
literature, 121;
and the MDGs, 398–400;
migration trends, 307–308;
natural disasters in the, 412;
occupations in the contemporary, 298–300;
popular culture, 111–12;
population growth in the, 304–306, 412;
population statistics, 258–60;
poverty in the, 425–26; religions, 160–66;
510 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
resources, 323;
social stratification in the, 222–33;
sociology, 17–19;
tertiary education in the, 194–95;
tourism, 374;
under-nourishment in the, 315;
urbanization in the, 371–73;
and white-collar crime, 433–35
Caribbean Community (CARICOM): population
growth in, 329;
population statistics, 280
Caribbean kinship: ethnic diversity and, 143–47
Carnival: Caribbean culture and, 114, 119
Case studies: description of, 63
Caste system: and stratification, 223–24
Censuses: description of, 271
Central tendency: measurement of, 43–44
Centre for Ethnic Studies (UWI): and population,
317
Child abuse: changes in family structure and,
152–55; description of, 441
Child and Youth Health: Action, Research and
Advocacy, 154
Child rearing: in the Caribbean, 146–47
Chinese: in the Caribbean, 108
Christianity: in the Caribbean, 162
Chronic poverty: definition of, 447
Clarke, Edith: and Caribbean family structure, 144;
and Caribbean sociology, 19
Class system: and crime, 376; description of, 217
Classism: examples of, 6
Classroom organization: education and, 203
Climate Change: description of, 475;
and Agriculture, 475;
and Coastal zones, 476;
and Human health, 475,
and Human settlements, 475–76;
and Water resources, 476
Closed stratification: definition of, 223
Cloward, R: and the differential opportunity theory,
407–408
Club of Rome: and the neo-Malthusian population
theory, 289–90
Cohen, Albert: and the subculture of delinquency,
406–407
Colonialism: and culture, 105–107
Commitment: definition of, 405
Common-law unions: description of, 145–46
Communication: definition of, 32
Communist Manifesto, The, 14
Community: and internal social control, 417
Commuting: definition of, 264
Companionship: the family and, 133–34
Competition for scarce positions: and population
growth, 289
Comte, Auguste: and positivism, 41; sociology
pioneer, 7, 10
Conditional cash transfer (CCT) programmes: and
poverty alleviation, 458
Conflict theory: of crime, 386, 398–400; definition
of, 13–14, 30; and education, 171–72; and
religion, 157–59; and social stratification, 214
Conformity: definition of, 189, 394
Consent: the participant and informed, 81
Consumption patterns: in the Caribbean, 342
Convergent cultural evolution: definition of, 105
Corporal punishment: arguments for and against,
429; description of, 429
Corporate crime: in the Caribbean, 435; definition
of, 433
Craig, Susan: and M.G. Smith’s thesis, 111
Creolization: Caribbean, 111
Creole society theory: description of the, 112–13
Cricket: in the Caribbean, 122
Crime: characteristics of, 390; classification
of, 371–74; concepts and theories, 331–56;
conflict perspective on, 398–99; definition of,
334–35; and development, 413; and deviance,
377; differences between deviance and, 390;
differential association and, 403–404, 349–50;
Durkheim and, 392–93; elite, 372; Erikson and,
395; ethnicity and, 375–76; gender and, 375;
index, 45; lower-class delinquency and, 350–52;
Marx and 399, personal, 371; property, 371; and
society, 371–80; definition of, 389; theories on,
391–412; and urbanization, 404
‘Crime and Violence in T&T ’: UNICEF-funded
study, 337
Criminal justice system: and social control, 362–65
Critical poverty: definition of, 419
Cross-sectional studies: description of, 71–72
Crude birth rate: description of, 241
Index | 511
Crude death rate: description and calculation of the,
243
Counterculture: definition of, 87–88, 89, 97
Cult: definition of, 153–54
Cultural assimilation: description of, 94
Cultural anthropology: description of, 16
Cultural change: causes of, 100
Cultural evolution: description of, 96
Cultural lag: description of, 99
Cultural diffusion: description of, 100–101
Cultural relativism: description of, 86–87, 97
Cultural resistance: description of, 340–41
Cultural universals: definition of, 82–83, 97
Cultural variations: description of, 91–97
Culture: Caribbean, 99–117; and change, 93–96;
characteristics of, 81–82; and colonialism,
105–107; definition of, 79–80, 96; functions of,
82; and globalization, 123; and identity, 79–89,
107; levels of, 96–97; perspectives on, 95–96;
plantation society and, 106
Culture change: definition of, 97
Culture shock, 84–85
Custodial sentencing: aims of, 363; alternatives to,
364; juvenile delinquency and, 378
Cumulative: definition of, 21
Dahrendorf, Ralf: and Marxism, 14; and sociology,
24
Data gathering tools, 46–47
Davis, Kingsley: and education, 183: and social
stratification, 225–28
Deforestation: consequences of, 485; definition of,
484; in Haiti, 485–86
Delinquency: subculture of, 406–407
Demographic transition theory: Caribbean
perspective of the, 299–303; criticisms of the,
303–304; description of the, 295–98; evaluation
of the, 298–99; and population control, 321;
stages of, 300–303
Denomination: definition of, 163
Dependency ratio: definition and calculation of,
265–66
Dependency theory: neo-Marxist, 352–54
Dependent peripheral economy: description of the,
354
Descriptive surveys: description of, 48
Deviance: characteristics of, 387; concepts and
theories, 331–56; crime and, 377; definition of,
387; dysfunctions of, 389; functions of, 388–89;
typology, 339
Development: definition of, 386; obstacles to, 340
Development indicators: description of, 357–58
Differential association: and crime, 403–404, 406
Discipline of sociology: development of the, 10–11
Distance learning: and education, 205–207
Documents: in qualitative research, 64–65
Domestic migration: definition of, 245
Domestic violence: definition of, 440–41; family
structure and, 151–52
Dominant culture: description of, 91
Dominican Republic: marital status of women
(1991, 1996), 141
Douglas, J.W.B.: longitudinal study, 70
Dramaturgy, 14; description of, 33–34
Drug abuse: crime and, 438
Durkheim, Emile: and crime, 392–93; and the
functions of education, 182; and the functions of
religion, 165; sociology pioneer, 7, 8, 10
Early childhood development (ECD) projects: and
poverty alleviation, 458
East Indians: in the Caribbean, 108–109, 145–46;
culture of, 118
Economic stagnation: description of, 340
Economics: description of, 18; and development,
413
Education, 180–207; in the Caribbean, 191–95;
definition, 180–82; and equality, 204–205,
217; and gender, 200–203; and globalization,
206–207; and internal social control, 359; and
mobility, 183–84, 217; and poverty alleviation,
429; and social stratification, 217–18; and
technology, 203–204; theoretical perspectives of,
182–90
Elite: crime, 433; definition of, 220
Empirical: definition of, 22
Emigration rate: calculation of the, 263
Emotional abuse: description of, 440
Endogamy: definition of, 134
Environment: definition of, 474
512 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Equality: and education, 197
Equilibrium: description of, 28–29
Erikson: and crime, 395
Estate system: definition of, 225
Ethics: and research, 80–82
Ethnic diversity: and Caribbean kinship, 143–47
Ethnicity: and crime, 436–37; definition of, 207;
and population, 312–13, 317–18; race and,
220–22
Ethnocentrism: definition of, 93–94, 104
Ethnomethodology, 15; description of, 32–33
Eugenicist Movement: population theory, 293–94
Evolutionary theories: early, 349
Explanatory surveys: description of, 49
Extended families: description of, 130
External control: description of, 420–22
Family, 121–47; companionship and the, 133–34;
definition of, 128, 140; and gender, 147–49; and
internal social control, 358–59; patterns, 136–
38; and rehabilitation of juvenile delinquents,
379; theoretical perspectives on, 132; types,
129–32
Family Land: and Caribbean sociology, 19
Family planning: definition of, 326–28
Family structure: ageing and, 150; changes in,
149–50
Father: Caribbean family and the role of the, 144–45
Feminism: Branches of Feminism: Liberal; Marxist;
Radical, 38; definition of, 37; feminist perspective
in Sociology, 37
Feminist theories: and deviance, 401; and family,
137–38; and gender, 208; and religion, 157
Feminization: of the teaching profession, 249
Fertility control: description of, 337–39; and
development, 339
Fertility rate: description and calculation of the,
259–61
Firestone, Shulamith: and fertility control, 337–39
Framework Convention on Climate Change, 478
Functional perquisites: four, 11
Functionalism, 14, 26–27: and crime, 337, 340–41;
and education, 169–71; and the family, 133; and
religion, 155–56; and social stratification, 211–14
Functions: description of, 26
Gans, Herbert J.: and poverty, 450
Garfinkel, Harold: and ethnomethodology, 32; and
interpretivism, 37
Garvey, Marcus: and the Rastafarian movement,
114–16; 177
Gender: and crime, 375; development, 478–79; and
education, 200–202, 231–32; and health, 471;
and occupation, 318; and stratification, 222; and
sex, 222
Gender roles: family and, 132, 138–40
Gender stratification: description of, 247–48,
230–31
German Ideology, The, 14
Global population: growth trends in the, 323–26
Globalization: and the Caribbean, 123; and culture,
98–99; definition of, 101, 105, 355–56; and
education, 203–204
Goffman, Erving: and dramaturgy, 32; and
the interactionist perspectives, 14, 31; and
interpretivism, 41
Gunder Frank, Andre: dependency theory, 352–53
Haiti: marital status of women in (1994, 2000),
130; voodoo in, 115, 164–65
Health: and Caribbean development, 410–12;
definition of, 461; ethnicity and, 472; gender
and, 471; nutrition and, 469–70; social class and,
470–71; theoretical perspectives, 463–66
Hinduism: in the Caribbean, 174
Hirschi, Travis: and the social control theory,
404–405
HIV: and family structure, 141; teenagers and, 146
History: description of, 17
Homogenous societies: definition of, 103
Horowitz, M: and the plantation society theory, 109
Housing: and urbanization, 372
Hudman: and the demographic transition theory,
295–305
Human Capital Theory (HCT): definition, 193
Human Development (HD): definition of, 193
Human Development Index (HDI): description of
the, 273–74
Ideal culture: definition of, 91, 104
Identity: culture and, 86–105, 118
Index | 513
Ideology: and social change, 102
Illness: definition of, 461
Immigration rate: calculation of the, 263
Imprisonment: arguments against, 423
Incidence: definition of, 462
Independence: and Caribbean education, 193–95
Independent invention: definition of, 105
Index crimes: definition of, 432
Indigenous people: Caribbean, 107–109
Industrialization: definition of, 370, 348
Infant mortality rate: description and calculation of
the, 262
Innovation: definition of, 101, 394
Institutional Review Boards (IRBs): description of,
82
Interaction: concept of, 32
Interactionist perspective, 14–15, 31–34; on crime,
401; on education, 187–90
Interculturation: definition of, 101
Interdependence: definition of, 28
Internal control: definition of, 417–19
International culture: definition of, 104
Interpretation: definition of, 32
Interpretive sociology: concept of, 14
Interpretivism: definition of, 41
Involvement: definition of, 405
Islam: in the Caribbean, 173
Jackson: and the demographic transition theory,
295–96
Jamaica: demographic transition in, 299–301;
Kumina in, 165; marital status of women
in (1993, 2000), 140; migration from,
309; population growth rate in, 304–305;
Rastafarianism in, 177–79; teenage pregnancy in,
155–56
Juvenile delinquency: and crime, 377–79; definition
of, 377
‘Juvenile Justice in Barbados: A View to the Future’,
379
Kibbutzim: family type, 125
Kumina: in Jamaica, 174
Labour market: and urbanization, 372
Labelling theory: and crime, 402–403; and
education, 173–74
Land use: changes in, 291
Language: Caribbean culture and, 112
Law of diminishing marginal returns: and
population growth, 284–85
Law of necessity: and population growth, 284–85
Legal system: and external social control, 420
Lewis, Oscar: and the culture of poverty, 448–49
Life expectancy: description and calculation of the,
262, 273
Limits to growth theory, 289–90
Literature: Caribbean, 121
Longitudinal studies: description of, 70
Lower-class delinquency: crime and, 409–10
Malinowski: theory of religion, 166–67
Malthus, Thomas: and fertility control, 338;
population theory, 283–86
Marital status: of women in the Dominican
Republic (1991, 1996), 141; in Haiti (1994,
2000), 140; in Jamaica (1993, 2000), 140; in
Mexico (1991, 1996), 141
Marriage: in East Indian families, 145; rates in the
Caribbean, 171
Maroons: and resistance culture, 115
Marx, Karl: conflict theory, 13, 30; population
theory, 266–69; and poverty, 420–21; and
religion, 157; and social class, 217, 203, 214–17;
sociology pioneer, 9
Marxism, 13, 14
Material culture: definition of, 87, 104
Matrifocal family: the Caribbean, 146
Mead, George Herbert: and the interactionist
perspectives, 14, 31
Men: family and the role of, 148–49
Meritocracy: neo-Marxist perspective on, 198
Merton, Robert: criticisms of, 394; deviance
typology, 395; sociology pioneer, 12; strain
theory, 393–94
Mexico: marital status of women in (1994, 2000),
141
Micro credit and insurance initiatives: and poverty
alleviation, 458
Middle-ground adaptation: definition of, 189
514 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Middle range studies, 70–72
Migration: and family structure, 149; definition
of, 262–64; and population change, 330–34;
trends, 307–309; and urbanization, 403. See
also Emigration and Immigration.
Miller, Walter: and lower-class delinquency, 409–10
Mobility: and education, 197–98; and social
stratification, 218–19. See also Social mobility
and vertical mobility
Modern family: description of the, 135
Modern thinking: the change from traditional to,
7–8, 389–90
Modernization: definition of, 348, 350–52; theory,
390
Mohammed, Patricia: and interpretivism, 58
Moore, Wilbert: and social stratification, 225–28
Multiculturalism: description of, 98
Multilinear evolutionary theories, 349
Multistage sampling: description of, 75
Murdock, G.P.: cross-sectional study, 72; and the
family, 128, 130–31
Music: Caribbean, 119–20; and culture, 108
My Mother Who Fathered Me: and Caribbean family
structure, 135; and Caribbean sociology, 18
National Task Force for Crime Prevention
(Barbados): and juvenile delinquency, 439
Natural disasters: description of, 316–66; impact of,
474
Nayar: family type, 131
Neo-Malthusian theory: on population, 289–95
and
meritocracy,
198;
Neo-Marxist:
perspective on education, 185
Non-conformity: among pupils, 189
Non-direct observation: description of, 62–63
Non-material culture: definition of, 87, 99
Non-probability sampling: definition of, 76
Non-representative sampling: description of, 78
North American Caribbean Teachers’ Association
(NACTA): and attitude surveys, 48
Nuclear families: description of, 129, 149
Nutrition: and health, 467
Oakley: and the feminist perspective on family, 132
Objective: definition of, 23
Objectivity: definition of, 46
Observational studies: description of, 60
Occupations: in the contemporary Caribbean,
320–22; and ethnicity, 317–18; and gender, 318;
population and, 294–95; and race, 317–18
Official statistics: description of, 51–52
Ogburn, William: and cultural lag, 99–100
Ohlin, L: and the differential opportunity theory,
349–50
Open stratification, 223
Optimum population: definition of, 339
Organized crime: definition of, 433
Orisha: in T&T, 176
Parsons, Talcott: and the role of the school, 183; and
social change, 348; sociology pioneer, 11; and
status, 216; theory of religion, 156
Participant observation: description of, 60–62
Pattern variables, 11
Personal crimes: definition of, 432
Phenomenology, 14; description of, 33
Physical abuse: description of, 440
Planned Parenthood (PP): and population growth,
294
Plantation society: and Caribbean family structure,
146; and culture, 106; and social stratification,
245; theory, 109
Plural society: thesis, 109, 110, 245
Pocomania. See Kumina
Policy considerations: changes in family structure
and, 151
Political science: description of, 17
Pollution: air 478–81; land, 483–84; noise, 482–83;
water, 481–82
Poor: categories of the, 453
Popular culture: Caribbean, 118–19
Population: age, 308–10, 334; and change,
329–35; definition of, 68; and development in
the Caribbean, 320–27; and ethnicity, 312–13;
occupation, 316–17; pyramids, 308–309; and
religion, 314–16; and sex composition, 311–12
Population growth: adverse effects of, 291; definition
and calculation of, 264–65; in Jamaica, 304–305;
planned parenthood and, 294–95; rates and
trends, 323–35, 301–303; and urbanization, 403
Index | 515
Population policy: analysis, 343–45
Population pyramid: description of, 308
Population statistics: description of, 270–73; for the
English-speaking Caribbean, 278–81
Population studies, 257–81; basic concepts in,
258–62
Population theories, 283–304
Positivism: definition of, 36
Post-emancipation: education in the Caribbean, 178
Poverty: definitions of, 418; measurement of,
422–23; rural, 426, 427; theoretical perspectives
on, 419–23; urban, 426, 427; and youth, 425
Poverty eradication: global, 440; policies, 446
Practicality: definition of, 46
Prayer: and religion, 150
Prevalence: definition of, 462
Primary occupations: description of, 320
Privacy rights: participants’, 81
Probability sampling: definition of, 68, 69–70
Proletariat: definition of, 217
Property crimes: definition of, 432
Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism, The, 10
Pryce, Ken: use of case studies, 61
Psychology: description of, 17
Punishment: and social control, 421
Pupil-adaptation: in schools, 189
Qualitative research methods: description of, 56
Quantitative data: description of, 42–44
Quantitative research: planning for, 45–52
Quaternary occupations: description of, 321
Questionnaires, 49–51
Quinary occupations: description of, 321–22
Quota sampling: description of, 76–77
Race: definition of, 220; and ethnicity, 220–22, 295;
and occupation, 295–96; and social stratification,
222–23
Rastafarian movement: and reggae, 120–21; and
resistance culture, 114–15; in Jamaica, 177
Real culture: definition of, 92, 96
Rebellion: definition of, 394
Reconstituted families: description of, 130
Reggae: and Rastafarianism, 120–21
Regional migration: definition of, 264
Relative poverty: definition of, 447
Reliability: definition of, 46
Religion, 159–69; in the Caribbean, 171–77;
conflict perspective on, 157–58; definition of,
159–60; features of, 160–61; forms of, 163–64;
and internal social control, 359–60; sociological
explanations of, 165–69; types of, 161–62
Reproductive functions: and the family, 134
Research: ethical issues in, 80
Reserve army of labour: and population growth, 287
Resistance culture: African-Caribbean, 114, 116–17
Resources: Caribbean, 340
Retreatism: definition of, 394
Rewards: and social control, 420
Reddock, Rhoda: and Caribbean sociology, 19–20
Ritual: religion and, 160
Ritualism: definition of, 394
Rights approach: to poverty alleviation, 457
Rio Declaration, 478
Roberts, George: and demographic transition in
Jamaica, 299–305
Rostow, W.W.: growth theory, 304; and social
change, 351
Rural poverty, 455–57
Rubenstein, Hymie: and Caribbean sociology, 19
Rules of Sociological Method, The, 9
Ryan, Selwyn: and social stratification in T&T, 240
Safety: of the researcher and participant, 80
Same-sex marriages: family types and, 131
Sampling: description of, 74
Schutz, Alfred: and phenomenology, 33
Science: definition of, 22–24
Seasonal poverty: definition of, 447
Sect: definition of, 163–64
Secondary occupations: description of, 320–21
Secularization: and sociology, 8; definition of, 170
Self: concept of, 32, 200
Sentencing: and social control, 422–23
Service: right to, 82
Sex: composition in population studies, 289–90; and
gender, 208
Sexual abuse: description of, 153, 441
Sexual gratification: the family and, 133–34
Shangoism: in T&T, 176
516 | Sociology for Caribbean Students
Simple random sampling: description of, 75
Simulated example: definition of, 75
Single-parent households: description of, 131
Skegg, Beverly: longitudinal study, 70
Slavery: description of, 107–108, 223
Smith, M.G.: and Caribbean sociology, 18; and
the plural society thesis, 110, 239, 245; and race
stratification, 238–39
Smith, R.T.: and Caribbean kinship systems, 302;
and Caribbean sociology, 19
Snowballing: description of, 76
Social action theory: and the interactionist
perspective, 13
Social change: and development, 348; ideology and,
102; and modernization, 388–89
Social class: description of, 217–18; health and,
313–14; measuring, 218
Social conflict analysis: description of, 102
Social control: and crime, 346–47; definition of,
357; institutions of, 357–80
Social Darwinism: description of, 388
Social development: concepts and theories, 346–56;
measurement of, 357–68
Social mobility: description of, 218–19; education
and, 231–32
Social pathology: description of, 139–41
Social stratification, 214–19; in the Caribbean,
237–49; consequences of, 233–34; definition of,
200–201; theories of, 225–31; types of, 223–25
Social surveys: types of, 48–49
Socialization: definition of, 25–26; and the family,
128; secondary, 25
Society: and crime, 381; definition of, 24
Socio-biology: description of, 103
Sociological imagination: concept of the, 7
Sociological perspectives: main, 24, 25
Sociological research, 40
Sociology: branches of, 15; in the Caribbean, 18–20;
definitions of, 6–7; development of, 7–11; and
social sciences, 17–18
Sociology of Housework, The, 132
Spencer, Herber t: evolutionar y theor y of European
society, 298; sociology pioneer, 8
Statement of Forest Principles, 478
Status: definition of, 216
Stone, Carl: and M.G. Smith’s thesis, 111
Steel pan: and Caribbean resistance culture, 115
Strain theory, 393
Stratified random sampling: description of, 76
Streaming: in education, 188
Structural functional analysis: description of, 102
Structural universals: description of, 90
Structured interviews: description of, 55–56
Subculture: definition of, 104, 113, 347–48;
theories, 406–12
Subjective poverty, 447
Subsistence poverty, 447
Supernaturalism: definition of, 161
Surveys: description of, 258–60
Sustainable development, 476–77
Sutherland, Edwin H.: and the differential theory on
crime, 403
Symbol: concept of, 32
Symbolic interactionism, 14, 32
Systematic random sampling: description of, 75
Teaching: feminization of, 249
Technology: education and, 203–204
Teenage pregnancy, 145–46
Tertiary education: in the Caribbean, 248
Tertiary occupations: description of, 321
Theism: definition, 162
Theoretical: definition of, 22
Tourism: and Caribbean development, 374–78
Trade in enslaved Africans: eighteenth century, 115
Traditional thinking: the change to modern from, 8,
389–90
Transhumance: definition of, 264
Transportation: and development, 380
Trinidad & Tobago (T&T): carnival in, 112;
custody costs in, 439; education in, 180–18;
juvenile delinquency in, 378; migration from,
309; orisha in, 164; social stratification in,
223–24, 230
Tumin, Melvin: criticism of Davis and Moore, 227
Underdevelopment: definition of, 348: Gunder
Frank and, 353
UNICEF: and child abuse, 154
Index | 517
Unilinear evolutionary theories: description of, 349
United Nations Children’s Fund (UNICEF): and
poverty eradication, 418
United Nations Conference on the Environment
and Development (UNCED), 414, 415
United Nations Conference on the Human
Environment, 414
United Nations Development Programme (UNDP):
and the HDI, 254–55; and poverty eradication,
418
United Nations Millennium Development Goals
(MDGs), 359–68
University of the West Indies Distance Education
Centre (UWIDEC): and distance learning,
205–206
Unstructured interviews: advantages of, 57–58;
disadvantages of, 59
Urbanization: in the Caribbean, 333; definition of,
264,
Validity: definition of, 46
Value-free: definition of, 23
Vertical mobility, 219
Victimless crimes: definition of, 373
Visiting unions: description of, 143
Vodoo: Haitian, 176
Weber, Max: and the interactionist perspective, 13,
29; and interpretivism, 37; on Protestantism and
capitalism, 168; and social class, 203, 216–17;
sociology pioneer, 7, 9, 22; and status, 202
West Indian Royal Commission (1937): and the
Caribbean family, 139
White collar crimes: characteristics of; definition of,
433
Willis, Paul: use of case studies, 63
Women: and Caribbean development, 409–10;
family and the role of, 138–40; marital status of,
130–31; occupations and, 296
Working class: definition of, 215
World Commission on Environment and
Development, 414
World systems theory: description of the, 355
Youth: poverty and, 454